data acquisition systems
NUCLEAR DATA INC NUCLEARDATA, INC. Golf and Meacham Roads Schaumburg, Illinois 60196
March, 1978
IM 88-0604-01 OPERATOR’S INSTRUCTION MANUAL ND600 MULTICHANNEL ANALYZER SYSTEM
Copyright 1978, by Nuclear Data, Inc. Printed in U.S.A. CONTAINED THE OF MANNER, RESERVED “THIS INC. A PROPRIETARY AND PATENTABLE DOCUMENT TO EXCEPT MAY THEREIN NUCLEAR NOT RIGHTS AND IS BY THE WRITTEN BE OR DATA, UNPATENTABLE REPRODUCED, EXCLUSIVE TO DERIVABLE THE INC.” PERMISSION A AFORESAID PROPERTY THEREFROM NOR NATURE, OF MAY INFORMATION, OF NUCLEAR BE ARE THE NUCLEAR USED EXPRESSLY INFORMATION DATA, IN DATA, ANY BOTH INC.
C;
C
C
2.
of
The
1.
the
ND600
status
The
acquire pushbutton.
then from
operand
the
ation
acquisition
The
ND600
ACQ
characters
operation
the
a
of
Version
displays.
pause
by
Analyzer
pushbutton
acquisition
ACQ
pushbutton
VERSION
successive
pause
state
Previous
08
of
pushbutton.
“ND600”
the
Firmware
accomplished
System:
was
array
from
ACQ
alternately
08
versions
depressions
accomplished
FiRMWARE
now
a
and
pushbutton
changes
pause
appear
they
ADDENDUM
of
by
initiates
the
state
of
depressing depressing
the
OPERATIONAL
the
by
in
ND600
has
is
following
the
depressing
ACQ
accomplished
or
been
first
I
terminates
firmware
the
the
pushbutton.
altered
line
operating
ACQ
minus
the
CHANGES
of
allowed
minus
by
such
acquisition
pushbutton.
all
(—)
depressing
alphanumeric
pushbutton
Termination
characteristics
that
(—)
acquire,
pushbutton
depressing
with
Continu
the
at
of
an
pause,
ACQ
the
acquire and
CHAPTER Ill CONTROL, Ventilation ADC Optional System Systeminterconnection Power System General General ND600 INSTALLATION INTRODUCTION Unpacking Installation Source Description Specifications X—Y Operational PowerConnection Data Page Page Terminal ND600 ND600 ND600 ND600 ND600 System and Plotter INDICATOR 2 Input/Output 1 — — Inspection Terminal Terminal Electronics Electronics Terminal Component Display Alphanumeric Data Interconnection
Function CONTENTS Acquisition Installation Parameters AND TITLE Enclosure Enclosure Peripheral Board Firmware Status CONNECTOR Parameters installation . Display Interface . Option . DESCRIPTIONS. Packages Options . . . . 2—5 2—4 2—3 2—2 2—2 2—1 2—5 2—3 2—2 2—1 2—1 2—1 2—1 3—1 3—1 3—2 3-1 3—3 PAGE 1—5 1—2 1—6 1—2 1—2 1—1 1—1 CHAPTER
IV
ND600
OPERATINGPROCEDURES Definition ND600 ND600
Introduction
DataAcquisition Principles
Data
SpectrumComparison Display TotalizationandReadout Spectrum Region Automatic AutoAnalysis Scroll
PlotterReadout
StatusDisplaylnput/Output.
Subtraction
Display
DisplayPushbuttons
Page Page Operand Terminal FuncHonPushbuttons StatusPushbuttons Electronics
Terminal
Analog
of
A’phanumeric ND600 Pulse Initial SystemCalibration
Parameter MultichanneiScaling PHA Multichannel Multichannel Sequential
Calibration
ReadoutProcedure
Expansion
Stripping
of
Interest
of
Energy
4
3
Spectrum
Radiation
Terms
Height — —
System
to
Terminal
Data Auto
Pushbutton Pushbutton CRT
Digital
Entry
Selection,
Calibration
and
Enclosure
Listing
and
Procedure
Analysis
Controls
Scaling Scaling
Analysis
Manipulation Set—up
Status
Storage
Analysis
Positioning.
Description
Converter
TITLE
.
Array.
Keyboard
.
. Page
II
(Rear
and
Intensification,
(Single (Preset
for .
Parameters
. .
. ..
Spectrum
Selection
a
.
Panel)
of
Parameters
Preset
.
. ..
Recurrent
Pass)
Common
.
.
Clock
Storage
and
Passes) Spectral
Time
Features ,
. . ,
4—1 3—5 3—4 4—1 3—6 PAGE 4—4 4—] 3—8 3—6 4—6 3—12 3—13 3—14 4—7 4—8 3—13 4—8 4—8
4—10
4—16 4—12 4—14
4—18 4—17 4—20 4—20 4—21
4—24 4—22
4—28 4—30
4—35 4—32
4—39
4—40 440 4—41
C CHAPTER TITLE PAGE
V DATAMANIPULATION PACKAGE (47-0054) 5-1
VI INTENSIFIEDREGION PEAKEXTRACTIONPACKAGE (47-0055) 6—1
VII INTENSIFIEDREGION ISOTOPE IDENTIFICATION PACKAGE (47-0056) 7—1
VIII AUTOMATICPEAKSEARCHPACKAGE (47-0057) 8-1
IX AUTOMATICISOTOPE IDENTIFICATION PACKAGE (47—0058) 9—1
X DIGITAL RATIOSPACKAGE (47-0071) 10—1
XI SERIALINPUT/OUTPUT INTERFACE(70—2437) 11—1
XII PARALLELINPUT/OUTPUT INTERFACE(70—2461) 12—1
XIII 7/9 TRACKMAGNETIC TAPEINTERFACE(70—2438) 13—1
III
or variety other other voltage Optional front microcomputer, accommodating it four—wide The The converter power RAM into high The powerful, It Terminal, in The 8—inch, SYSTEM ND600 contains combines eight—half—size multichannel front second built—in ND600 either and end memory basic ND600 of of is supplies. display can a boards board modules DESCRIPTION (ADC) packaged yet half—size NIM is of the completely system unit, the is the NIM board be hardware the easy a LSI—1 enclosure operational up housing 2K, analyzer firmware which system’s CRT, mounted module the board such enclosure optional board to to for boards in 1 20—bits ND600 six use a 1/0 two firmware expanding and as can accepts housings. functionally (an contains display full—size design in controlled, preamplifiers, and multichannel for bus, compact be boards. firmware convenience a and of ND575 Electronics power 19—inch plugged interfacing data two two controlled power and and
the INTRODUCTION data plug—in convenient ADC storage full—size One printed supply.
operational is CHAPTER grouped operational basic microcomputer—based, rack storage supply contained into data amplifiers, Enclosure, of of is to boards, 1—1 LSI—1 system the or a the included memory circuit analysis input/output 44-pushbutton basic hardwired houses used memory front units, basic 1 simplicity. control on
firmware I microcomputer and system board as and is discriminators printed board system. and with system only a representing to the table—top analyzer 1K, center. powers up housings, peripherals each boards system five housing (preprogrammed circuit interactive multichannel boards to 16—bits One BK system) and the and to with power It pedestal unit, or data a include boards contains each one—quarter produce contains of analog modern detector up including the scratch and channels, the keyboard supplies. to capable analyzer computational which for four a optional to ROM ND600 the new an a full—size high the digital pad. large, high extremely full—size LSI—1l inches plug approach of memory). and terminal. a All system. The speed a 6—inch x paper
or printer
the
common to Interface, The housing interfaces controller
controller. lines
CRT SYSTEM
full
ND600
Dimensions Keyboard: in NIM Weight: lx4and4x4).
NIM Operating for
Power
between supplies. LSI—1
ND600 i/o lines,
peripheral
DMA
parallel.
Display
rear
230
screen).
Parameters:
of
with
tape
Enclosure
Enclosure
1
or
Requirements:
18
the Terminal is
bidirectional
i/o
peripheral
Vac,
board
Electronics
LSI—1 65 RS—232 SPECIFICATIONS
available
access and
the
control/synchronization
highest
punch/reader,
Bus
Temperature
44—pushbuttons,
LSI—1
Interface,
(overall):
Bus:
lbs.
drivers.
available
Acquisition
keyboard
housing
supports
1
Module
Power
microcomputer
the
channel, 1
Phosphor
Asynchronous,
priority
options
I/O
for Enclosure
LSI—1
data
All
Supply: 115
all
contains
l5.3—in.
both
insertion Bus.
Power
on
Range:
interface
line
on
boards
assigned Controller
Vac
and
1 such —
and
request.)
arranged
vectored I/O
Green,
full—size
The
printer
Receptacles:
control
+
a +12
the
as
and
10
h.
of
bidirectional second
Bus 10%, plugged
Acquisition, connect
industry
signal
to
to
Vdc X Direct
up
system
P—31.
using
and
in
and
device 40°C.
interrupts
18.5—in.
boards.
to lines
50/60
@
four
full—size
DMA
lines two
into
serial
to
Memory
a 2A.
standard
component
1—2
of
Display
Four
true
functionally the
electronically
additional
Hz,
the
bus the
and
Display
The Interface,
w.
—12
without
devices
common
DMA Amp
ROM
front
Single with
LSI—11
X power
Access
remaining
Vdc
7
Face
25—in.
or
type
boards
priority and
board
common
memory
polling
@
such
full—size
9
bidirectional
Phase,
distribution — grouped
I/O the
(DMA)
magnetic
1A. 202516—3
any
Flat,
closest
d.
for
as
housing space Acquisition
Bus.
scheme
optional
board
and ±24
interface
Teletype,
200
16
rectangular
Controller
boards
arrays
to
priority multiplexed
tape.
Vdc in
W,
connectors,
from
for
LS1—11. connect
the
through data
DMA
®
(2 max. for
firmware
connections
Interface
the Terminal
rear
The
x
250
and
DMA
interfacing
and
4,
(6—in.
peripheral system
to
(Strapping
the
board
DMA
mA.
data/address
4 control
Keyboard
the
wired
structured
x
options
DMA
and
x 4,
power
8—in. Mechanical: Front and back printed circuit board housings, each capable of accommodating six full—size (8.5—in. x lO.5—in.) system component boards.
System Power Supplies: +5 Vdc @ 25 A. +12 Vdc @ 2.5 A. +15 Vdc @200 mA. Dimensions: 5.25—in. h. x 19—in. w. x 23—in. d. Weight: 65 lbs.
Operating Temperature Range: 10 to 40°C.
Power Requirements: 115 Vac + 10%, 50/60 Hz, Single Phase, 350 W, max. (Strapping for 230 Vac, available on request.)
Data Storage Memory
Number of Channels: 2048, 4096 or 8192; field expandable from 2K to 4K to 8K.
Count Capacity per Channel: 220_i (1,048,575) plus 4 flag bits.
Type: Solid state, random access.
Cycle Time: 960 nsec.
Refresh Cycle: Every 25 psec. Complete memory refresh in 1.6 msec.
Arithmetic: Add or subtract.
Storage Group Size: Selectable in binary increments from 32 channels to full memory.
Data Acquisition
Acquisition Modes: PHA, MCS or List.
Acquisition Control: Automatic termination upon reaching preset live or clock time (preset number of passes in MCS), preset count level in any channel or preset count total between markers.
Preset Time (Pass) Selection: 1 to 6,553,500 sec (65,535 passes).
Preset Level Selection: ito 1,048,575 counts.
Preset Total Selection: 1 to 4,294,967,295 counts.
ADC Digital Offset: Selectable from 0 to 8191 channels.
1—3 Digital Ratemeter: Automatic computation and display of input count rate between markers during PHA acquisition.
MCS Count Rate: 100 KHz, max.
Dwell Time Selection: 10 lisec to 900 sec in decade increments.
MCS Count Input: Pulse Amplitude — +2.4 to +5 V. Duration — 30 nsec, mm. Input Impedance - 75 ohms.
Pass Initiation: Single or repetitive triggering.
External Sweep Trigger Input: Pulse Amplitude — + 3 to 0 V, with sweep start occurring
on negative transition of pulse. Duration — 0.5 psec, mm. Input Impedance — 1000 ohms.
External MCS Time Base Input: Pulse Amplitude — +2.4 to +5 V, with clock occurring on
positive transition of pulse. Duration — 0.5 psec, mm. Pulse repetition rate — 100 kHz, max.
List Word Size: Up to 12 bits.
List Data Rate: 100 kHz, max.
Auto Job Mode: Permits entry of a sequence of up to eight operations and automatically
repeating the sequence from 1 to 65,535 times.
Data Display
Display Rate: 100 kHz.
Display Presentation: Linear or logarithmic.
Display Group Size: Selectable in binary increments from 32 channels to full memory.
Counts Full Scale: Selectable from 32 to 1,048,575 in binary increments.
Display Resolution: One part in 1024 (10—bits)for both X and Y axes.
Display Linearity: ±2%.
Analog Display Output: X-Y Axes — 0 to 4V. Blanking — OVto +5V (blank to normal).
Display Expansion: Digital selection of any segment of channels for expanded display.
Alphanumeric Character Display: Internal circuitry permits generation of 64 ASCII characters for display.
1-4 Display Overlap: Spectral data in up to four selected memory groups can be overlapped and displayed at fixed vertical displacements (stacked) or with a common baseline (superimposed).
Region of Interest Identification: Dual (left and right) channel markers permit selection of any region of interest. Display intensification permits identification of multiple regions of interest.
X—YPlotter Control: Internal Circuitry with external connections permits analog readout of entire display (including alphanumeric characters) to an X—YPlotter.
Numeric Readout Mode: Permits statically displaying the contents of up to 56 channels, starting with the left marker channel or the channel contents or count totals in up to 12 consecutive intensified regions.
Spectrum Strip Mode: Permits multiplying a selected memory group by a specified strip factor and adding it to, or subtracting it from, the current display group.
Data Input/Output Peripheral Interface Options
Serial Devices (Teletype, Terminal Printer, RS—232Channel, etc.):
Communications: 20 mA current ioop or EIA RS—232. TransmissionCode: ASCII or ND Binary. Transmission Rate: Selectable from 110 to 9600 baud, depending on device.
High Speed Paper Tape Punch/Reader:
Input/Output Code: 8 level ASCII or ND Binary. Input Rate: 200 or 300 char/sec, depending on device. Output Rate: 75 char/sec.
Line Printer:
Printing Method: Impact, character—by—character, one line at a time. Printing Rate: 100 char/sec. Character Structure: 5 x 7 dot matrix, lO—pointtype equivalent. Code: ASCII, 64 printing characters. Format: 80 char/line. 6 lines/inch.
Industry Standard Magnetic Tape:
Number of Tracks: 9 or 7—track, IBMcompatible. Data Density: 9—trackat 800 bpi. 7—trackat 800/556 bpi. Tape Velocity: 25 or 45 ips. Reel Size: 7—in, on 25 ips units; 10.5 in. on 45 ips units.
Tape (Computer Grade): 0.5—in, wide, 1.5 mil thick. Tape Labelling: In accordance with ANSI STANDARDANSI X3.27—1969.
1-5 Operational Function Firmware Option Packages
Data Manipulation Package (47—0054)
Performs the following functions: integration, differentiation, addition of a constant to, or subtraction of a constant from the data spectrum, data transfer, data smooth (five—point), square root calculation, and relative error calculation.
Intensified Region Peak Extraction Package (47—0055)
Determines the peak channel, FWHMand intensity information for each region of interest identified by intensified display. Upon determining the peak in each region, the following information is provided: peak channel energy, FWHMin energy, net area, background, peak—to—backgroundratio, left and right region limits, and statistical error.
Intensified Region Isotope Identification Package (47—0056)
Provides a report identifying the isotope, half—life, energy and percent abundance for each peak determined during the intensified region peak extraction process. Each isotope is identified on the basis of finding an energy line which corresponds to an isotope in the isotope Iibrary.
Automatic Peak Search Package (47—0057)
Automatically determines the centroid, FWHMand intensity information for each peak in the marker defined portion of the data spectrum. Upon determining each peak, the following information is provided: peak centroid energy, FWHMin energy, net area, background, peak—to—backgroundratio, left and right peak limits, and statistical error.
Automatic Isotope Identification Package (47—0058)
Provides a report identifying the isotope, half—life, decay, energy, percent abundance, percent efficiency and activity for each peak determined during the automatic peak search process which corresponds to an energy line of an isotope in the isotope Iibrary.
Digital Ratio Package (47—0071)
Permits monitoring up to 12 digital ratios between net areas, gross areas or combinations of net and gross areas in overlapping or non—overlappingregions in any memory group. The net or gross area of any region bracketed by left and right markers can be specified as either the numerator or denominator for any of the 12 digital ratios. The ratios are dynamically computed for monitoring live during data acquisitions. The package also permits generating a summary report at an optional hardcopy peripheral device. 0
1—6 CHAPTER II INSTALLATION
GENERAL
The user should familiarize himself with the information contained in this section before attempting to install or operate the ND600 System.
UNPACKING AND INSPECTION
Carefully unpack the ND600 Electroncs Enclosure, ND600 Terminal and peripherals, saving the shipping cartons for possible re—shipment. Refer to the instruction manuals on the reSpective peripherals for specific informaHon relating to unpacking and inspecting these units. Carefully examine each unit for possible damage to controls, indicators and connectors. If damage incurred during transit is apparent, notify the delivering carrier and then notify the hearest Nuclear Data representative, or the Nuclear Data home office.
NOTE: The deliverng carrier must be notified within 24 hours after receipt of the equipment to insure reimbursement for any damage incurred during transit.
ND600 Electronics Enclosure
Remove the front panel, top and rear cover retaining screws, remove front panel, top and rear covers and examine each plug—insystem component board installed in the ND600 Electronic Enclosure for damage. If no damage is apparent, carefully push—inon each circuit board and interboard connector to ensure proper contact between the board/chassis connector and cable connector/board connector which may have shaken loose during transit. Leave front panel, top and rear covers off the unit until installation and interconnection procedures are completed.
ND600 Terminal
Removethe retaining screws (two at the bottom front and two at the rear) hoiding the top to the base of the ND600 Terminal, carefully pull forward on the top and lift it off the base. Be careful not to damage the cable which extends through the cable slot at the rear of the
2—1 ND600 Terminal and attaches to the Keyboard by allowing the cable sufficient slack to slide through the cable slot when lifting the top from the base. With the top of the ND600 Terminal removed, examine the internal circuitry for damage. If no damage is apparent, carefully push—ineach internal circuit board and interconnecting cable connector (including the one attached to the keyboard) to ensure they are properly seated, If any ADC’s are to be installed in the ND600 Terminal, leave the top off the base until the ADC installation is completed. If not, carefully replace the top of the base, pulling the slack in the keyboard cable through the cable slot, and replace the four retaining screws.
VENTI LLATION
Locate the ND600 Electronics Enclosure so that there is free air space at the sides and rear of the unit. The ND600 Electronic Enclosure is equipped with cooling fans; however, if it is totally enclosed in an unventilated area, there will be insufficient heat dissipation which will result in damage to the unit.
CAUTION: Do not operate the ND600 Electronics Enclosure without the front panel, top and rear covers installed as this will hamper operation of the cooling fans and result in damage to the unit.
If the ND600 Electronics Enclosure is mounted with other units in an enclosed rack type cabinet, forced air cooling may be required. When possible those units with high heat dissipation should be mounted at the top of the cabinet.
POWER SOURCE
The ND600 System requires a 115 Vac (strapping for 230 Vac is available on request), 60/50 Hz source which is free of excessive noise or fluctuations. A voltage stabilizing transformer can be inserted between the ac source and the ND600 System where available power is subject to large fluctuations. Noise produced by various types of electrical equipment can be eliminated or greatly reduced by connecting a suitable filter between the ac source and the interfering equipment.
ADC INSTALLATION
With the top removed from the base of the ND600 Terminal, install an ADC module into its 4—wideNIM enclosure as follows:
NOTE: One ADC module is normally supplied with, and installed in the ND600 Terminal at the factory prior to shipment of the system. However, if the ADC module is ordered separately, the following installation procedure must be performed.
1. Insert the ADC module into the 4—wideNIM enclosure of the ND600 Terminal in such a manner as to mate the 42—pin male power connector on the rear of the module with a 42—pin female power connector at the rear of the 4—wideNIM enclosure. C
2—2 2. Fasten the ADC module to the front of the 4—wideNIM enclosure with the two retaining screws on the module front panel.
3. Lead the 26—pinfemale connector on the ribbon cable extending from the rear of the ADC module through the cable slot located at the bottom rear of the terminal base, pulling the slack in the ADC cable through the cable slot.
4 After completing installation of the ADC module, replace the top of the ND600 Terminal on the base, pulling the slack in the keyboard cable through the cable slot and replace the four retaining screws.
OPTIONAL SYSTEM COMPONENT BOARD INSTALLATION
If an optional system component board (additional memory, firmware option or input/output peripheral interface option) is ordered with the system, it is normally installed in the ND600 Electronics Enclosure prior to shipment from the factory. However, if the optional system component board is ordered separately, it is necessary to install it into an available connector in the ND600 Electronics Enclosure.
1. Insert the system component board into an available connector in the ND600 Electronics Enclosure such that the component side of the board being inserted is at the top.
2. Connect any interface cables which are provided for interconnecting to an optional module or peripheral to the system component board.
NOTE: To insure proper interconnection between the system component boards and any associated perpherals, refer to the appropriate installation procedure outlined in the corresponding chapters of this instruction manual.
SYSTEM INTERCONNECTIONS
The basic ND600 System consists of two units, the ND600 Electronics Enclosure and the ND600 Terminal. All ND600 System Component Boards plug into either the front or rear board housing of the ND600 Electronics Enclosure. Basic system component boards to which external connection is required include the DMA board, DMBboard and ACX (or ACT) board, each of which is installed in the rear board housing of the ND600 Electronics Enclosure. The Terminal keyboard is interconnected to the DMA board. The Terminal display is inter connected to the DMB Board. The analog to digital converter (ADC) module is interconnected to the ACX (or ACT) board.
Installation procedures for interconnecting the ND600 Terminal, ADC module and optional X—Yplotter to the appropriate ND600 System Component Boards installed in the ND600 Electronics Enclosure are provided in the following paragraphs. Installation Procedures for firmware options or input/output peripheral interface options are provided in the corresponding chapters of this instruction manual.
2—3 ND600 Terminal Installation
1. Locate the ND600 Terminal on top or adjacent to the ND600 Electronics Enclosure (or adjacent to the cabinet in which the ND600 Electronics Enclosure is installed),
NOTE: The interconnecting cables between the ND600 Terminal Keyboard and the ADC module (installed in the ND600 Terminal 4—wideNIM enclosure) are normally connected internally to the ND600 Terminal and lead through the cable slot at the bottom rear of the terminal base prior to shipment from the factory.
2. Interconnect the ND600 Terminal Keyboard to the DMA board installed in the rear board housing of the ND600 Electronics Enclosure by inserting the 20—pinfemale connector on one of the ribbon cables extending from the cable slot at the bottom rear of the ND600 Terminal into the 20—pinmale connector on the DMA board (rear center connector, component side, viewing the ND600 Electronics Enclosure from the rear) such that the color mark on the ribbon cable is at the right.
3. Interconnect the ADC module installed in the ND600 Terminal 4—wideNIM enclosure to the ACX board installed in the rear board housing of the ND600 Electronics Enclosure by inserting the 26—pinfemale connector (designated ADC) on one of the ribbon cables extending from the cable slot at the bottom rear of the ND600 Terminal into the 26—pin male connector (designated ADC) on the ACX (or ACT) board such that the color mark on the ribbon cable is at the right. 4. Connect the display interface ribbon cable (contains a 26—pin female connector on one end and a 25—pinmale connector on the other end) between ND600 Terminal and the DMBboard installed in the rear board housing of the ND600 Electronics Enclosure as follows:
NOTE: If an X—YPlotter is ordered with the ND600 System, the display interface ribbon cable is replaced by a display/plotter interface ribbon cable which permits interconnecting both the ND600 Terminal Display and the X—YPlotter to the ND600 Electronics Enclosure. Refer to the X—YPlotter Interconnection procedure.
a. Insert the 26—pinfemale connector on the ribbon cable into the 26—pinmale connector (designated DISPLAY)on the DMBboard (rear center connector, component side, viewing the ND600 Electronics Enclosure from rear) such that the color mark on the ribbon cable is at the right.
b. Insert the 25—pinmale connector on the ribbon cable into the 25—pinfemale connector (designated DISP IN) at the right rear of the ND600 Terminal.
C 2—4 5. Connect an ac line cord from the ac line receptacle (designated AC INPUT) on the rear of the ND600 Terminal to a conveniently located 115 Vac outlet.
X-Y Plotter Interconnection
If an optional X—YPlotter was ordered with the ND600 System, interconnect it to the ND600 Electronics Enclosure as follows:
1. Remove the display interface ribbon cable (installed in step 4 of the ND600 Terminal Installation procedure) and connect the display/plotter interface ribbon cable (contains a 26—pinfemale connector on one end, a 25—pinmale connector in the middle and another 25—pinmale connector at the other end) between the ND600 Terminal, X—YPlotter and the DMBboard installed in the rear board housing of the ND600 Electronics Enclosure as follows: a. Insert the 26—pinfemale connector on the ribbon cable into the 26—pinmale connector (designated DISPLAY)on the DMBboard (rear center connector, component side, viewing the ND600 Electronics Enclosure from the rear) such that the color mark on the ribbon cable is at the right. b. Insert one of the 25—pinmale connectors on the ribbon cable into the 25—pin female connector (designated DISP IN) of the right rear of the ND600 Terminal. c. Insert the other 25—pinmale connector on the ribbon cable into the 25—pin female connector on the bottom front of the X—YPlotter.
2. Connect the ac line cord supplied with the X—YPlotter from the ac line receptacle on the bottom front of the X—Yplotter to a conveniently located 115 Vac outlet.
NOTE: The X—YPlotter must be calibrated for proper operation with the ND600 System. Refer to Chapter IV for the X—YPlotter Calibration procedure.
Power Connection
After completing system installation, replace the front panel, top and rear covers of the ND600 Electronics Enclosures, and connect an ac line cord from the ac line receptacle on the rear of the ND600 Electronics Enclosure to a conveniently located 115 Vac outlet.
CAUTION: Do not operate the ND600 System without the front panel, top and rear covers installed as this will hamper operation of the cooling fans and may result in damage to the unit,
2—5 C
C
C CHAPTER III CONTROL, INDICATOR AND CONNECTOR DESCRIPTIONS
GENERAL
This section contains detailed descriptions of the controls, indicators and connectors on the ND600 Terminal and the ND600 Electronics Enclosure.
ND600 TERMINAL ALPHANUMERIC STATUS DISPLAY
ND600 displays anyone of four separate pages of alphanumeric data simultaneously with spectral data at a fast, flickerfree 100 kHz rate. Each page contains parameter data pertinent to basic operational functions of the ND600. Page 1 contains the parameters normally associated with visually monitoring spectral data. Page 2 contains the parameters relating to set-up and performance of data acqUisition. Page 3 contains the data manipulation parameters. Page 4 contains the parameters available for set—upof an auto job sequence.
Parameter data which varies with operational functions, such as elapsed time, channel contents or count totals, is periodically updated by the system. Parameter data which is user selected, such as an operational mode, numerical value or mathematical mani pulation, is altered by positioning the display cursor to the desired parameter and then entering the new parameter data at the operand pushbutton array, or by sequencing to the desired parameter entry via the NXTV pushbutton.
3—1
is upon
configuration NOTE
NOTE
For
upon
is
For
TOTL
CFS AGRP
PAGE
LMRK
LE LCNT
GRPS
GSIZ not
.FAGE not A’3
5612 C: L[iF.K ‘3FF Ti:’TL
LE
example, example,
F
system system S
PP
an an
S
2: 1
- 1:
—
r’Current
integer
integer
The
The
of
Current Current
right
Left
Left Total
including
Left
Number Display
626.
memory memory
57521
channels/group
if
(2048, if
Li
number 2046
group
marker
L:”3 ‘326
marker marker 451 210
.
7
1000
marker
counts
binary binary were 1 1
1
group
Parameters
counts
acquire
of
configuration.
configuration.
size
left,
4096,
were
groups
of
channel
channel channel entered C: 013FF p)::HT ‘:“3RP i:
RE P[lPf.
between
channel.
multiple, multiple, ‘3
3FF
groups
size, (GSIZ)
PP
full
excluding
entered
group
or
(Note
(Note
scale
8192).
i.e.
energy. 700.
number.
content.
for
(GRPS)
markers,
is
number.
it it
the
for
in 2).
390 700
number value.
1:3:3
1).
is GSIZ
is If 0
ci El binary
1
rounded
the the
rounded
If
GRPS
is
the
in
X
number
GSIZ
3—2
number
GRPS
parameter,
increments
binary
OGRP
DGRP
RMRK
OGRP
RCNT
RE OGRP
up up
/
parameter,
to to of
=
of
the
the
channels
increments
number
groups
Current
Overlap
Right
Right
Right
from
next
next
it
would
t
32
1
marker
marker marker
available
available
of
entered
entered would
“
display
from
to
group channels
t::fr.
be
8192
/
rounded
channel
channel channel
‘:
be
1
for
for
numbers.
to
group
integer
integer
•/
rounded
channels
the
256
the
in
the
to
energy. number.
content.
number.
GRPS
GSIZ
groups
binary
binary
8.
system
to
depending
1024.
parameter
parameter
depending
multiple.
multiple. memory
frOP-St
DOFF
PTOT
PLEV
TOTL
PTI TBASE
AGRP
MODE
PAGE
L M AG t:c PAGE T PT TB P PT
cii:’ Li CIT L AS PP CIT F El...’ I E L ti
F 2 E
—
right
ADC
Time
channel acquisition
Total acquisition MCS
channels). markers PTIM modes;
Preset
including Preset Preset
TBASE
Current
LIST
Current
MCS
PHAL
PHAC Data 1437437 l:I 50000 Ii P L1
HAL digital
Li
base
marker mode
counts
X Acquisition
Li
total
time
level
X preset
LI
for
TMULT
for
acquire data
TMULT
List
Multichannel
PHA
PHA
left,
(ito
(1
terminating
for
(1
(ito
terminating
counts
(counts)
between
offset channel. D T B C: LT
PATE T
acquisition
to
number
Mode. to4 tiLl 03’] LIS
T 13PP
clock
live
PHAC.or
excluding = 9).
L
65K). group
= 1
T
PHA
Parameters
billion). between.
(0 million).
MCS
time
time in
71i3.
of
to markers,
io
preset number.
I
data scaling
any
&
passes dwell 8K
2029 2000
PHAL
mode, mode.
429
55 718 mode.
0
time.
time.
for
mode.
3—3
CT
LT
TMULT
RATE BUSY
DGRP
TOGO
Current
Current
units
System
Effective
markers. units
Current
passes
PHAL
Time
Preset
1
mm
entered entered
multiplier
or
modes;
remaining
time
busy
elapsed
elapsed
display
External).
input
remaining
status
for
for
preset
count
group
clock (10
live
TMULT.
TMULT.
in
in
psec
MCS
number
time
percent.
rate
number.
time
in
to
PHAC
mode.
in
between
in
100
of
time
time
or sec, _PAGE 3 4 E / OH 4.017 E 0) —5 • 583 CYCLES 50 Fl I NT ED A‘3PP 4 D.C 0 • 673 CTCIGO 49 P2 P S I NT AREA 84986 1 • 001 STEP1 ERASE F3 0 BI3ND 95571 D/O 1823.808 STEP2 ACR F4 TCITL 18055? 0 GRP 4 STEP3 STRF 101 TTv F UJHM 98.366 SF 1 . 000 STEP4 I,2 MC:C.’E P 0U PERK 1341. 848 STEP5 F2 DATA TOT STEP! 101 102 ri.o T STEP? NODE E:I i C. STEPS DATA F;LL ALITO 1 STRIP o. ic D’3RF 1 Wf3P.P AI3RP . 1 —
L..
PAGE 3 — Data Manipulation Parameters
E/CH Calibrated energy per channel. E(O) Calibrated energy offset.
AGRP Current acqufre group number. D/O Ratio(s) of gross counts between markers in current display group AREA Net area (total counts minus and respective overlap group(s). background counts) between Ratio(s) of net counts (total minus C markers. D/O background) between markers in current display group and respective BGND Background counts between overlap group(s) is obtained by markers. depressing the minus(—)pushbutton D/O at the operand pushbutton array and TOTL Total counts between markers, then the AREABGND pushbutton. including left, excluding right marker channel. DGRP Current display group number.
FWHM Full width at half maximumvalue SF Strip factor for spectrum in energy. stripping operation performed by depressing STRIPpushbutton.
PEAK Peak channel between markers in energy.
C 3-4 PAGE 4 — Auto Job Parameters
CYCLES Preset number of auto lob Fl Optional firmware controlled cycles (1 to 65K) F2 operational functions which are F3 performed when Fl, F2, F3 or CTOGO Preset number of auto lob F4 F4 pushbutton is depressed, or cycles remaining. when specified as steps in an auto job sequence.
STEP1 Operations performed in steps INTEG STEP2 1 to 8 of auto lob sequence. DlFF STEP3 ERASE Erase operation. PSRCH STEP4 ACR Acquire operation. Etc. STEPS STRP Strip operation. STEP6 PLOT Plot operation. 101 Optional input/output devices used for
STEP7 NXTG Increment AUTG by 1.102 data input/output when 101 or 102 STEP8 Fl Operational function pushbutton is depressed, or when 101 F2 specified for F1,F2, or 102 operation is specified as a F3 F3orF4. step in an auto lob sequence. F4 TTY Teletype. 10] Input/output operation MAGT 7 of 9—trackmagnetic tape. 102 specified for 101 or 102. LP Line Printer. PT High speed paper tape reader/ AUTG Current auto group number. punch. SU1 Available for future special DGRP Current display group number. SU2 units, such as SDCC, etc. SU3 AGRP Current acquire group number. MODE input/output mode (101 or 102).
BCDI BCDformatted input. BCDO BCDformatted output. BlNl Binary formatted input. BINO Binary formatted output.
DATA Input/output data (101 or 102). ALL Content of all channels in group. MRKR Content of channels between markers. ROI Content of channels in intensified regions. TOT Intensified region count totals. STAT Current status page.
STRIP Auto job additive (+) or subtractive (—)spectrum strip mode and factor. WGRP Work group for auto job spectrum strip operation. WGRP: WGRP X (+ STRIP)+ AUTG AUTO 3-5 -WGRP: AUTG X (+ STRIP)+ WGRP WGRP ______
ND600 TERMINAL PUSHBUTTON KEYBOARD
The ND600 Terminal’s 44—pushbuttoninteractive keyboard is functionally grouped for ease of operation. Eight Display pushbuttons control data display. 16 Function pushbuttons allows selection of data acquisition, manipulation and input/output functions. Four Status pushbuttons select and control status display. 16 Operand pushbuttons permit numerical entry, mode selection and mathematical manipulation. Lf-i 1L-;)-. r’I {* 64 —I — -1 j 0,, ø3F 0,,
m n 0 Yf 172 17 I2 0 0 a
ERIIE 173 SO7 9. ,.,Q ..-j h6j. a- 0 eYp
Display Pushbuttons
MPOS The MPOS pushbutton permits moving the left and right markers (vertical lines imposed upon the spectrum display) to the left or right on the display. Holding e,o/ the MPOS pushbutton depressed moves the left and right markers in the direction selected by the SHIFTpushbutton. The rate of movement is a function C 14’ ,/ I • I • of the iength of time tne MPOS push utton is heid depressed However, a momentary depression will only move the left and right0 markers one channel.
- The left and right marker channel numbers, contents and energies are displayed ‘ on Status Page 1.
MSPN The MSPN pushbutton permits moving the right marker to the left or right on the /7/ display, decreasing or increasing the number of channels between the left and /. right markers. Holding the MSPN pushbutton depressed moves the right marker in the direction specified by the SHIFTpushbutton. The rate of movement is a function of the length of time the MSPN pushbutton is held depressed. However, a momentary depression will only move the right marker one channel.
CFS The CFS pushbutton permits selecting the linear display range (counts full scale) or logarithmic display. Depressing the CFS pushbutton increases the counts full scale value by a factor of two when the right (>>) direction is selected by the SHIFTpushbutton, or decreases the counts full scale by a factor of two when the leff (<<) direction is selected by the SHIFTpushbutton. The range of counts full scale values is from 32 to 1M in binary increments. Logarithmic display is selected by depressing the CFS pushbutton after the minimumcounts full scale value (32) is reached when the left (<< ) direction is selected by the SHIFT pushbutton, or after the maximum counts full scale value (1M) is reached when the right (>>) direction is selected by the SHIFTpushbutton. q
3-6 XPND Depressing the XPND pushbutton expands the display defined by the left and right markers to horizontal full scale. Once expanded, the display can be returned to normal (display of the full group) by depressing the XPND push button a second time.
RST Depressing the RST/ADVpushbutton when the right (>>) direction is selected by
p the SHIFTpushbutton, resets the markers to the first and last channels of the current display group.
ADV Depressing the RST/ADVpushbutton when the left (<<) direction is selected by the SHIFTpushbutton sequentially advances the markers to the next assigned region o interest to t e rig t on t e Isp ay. ter t e ast assigned region of interest on the right selection reverts to the first assigned region on the left of the display.
INT Depressing the INT/1DELpushbutton when the right (>>) direction is selected by ,‘ the SHIFTpushbutton enters the channels between the left and right markers as r ,,/ an assigned regions of interest and intensifies the display of the marker defined channels, including left, excluding right marker channel.
DEL Depressing the INT/bEL pushbutton when the left (<<) direction is selected by the SHIFTpushbutton deletes any previously assigned region(s) or portions of a region between the left and right markers and clears the intensified display between the left and right markers.
MOTN The MOTN pushbutton permits moving the expanded display to the right or left. Holding the MOTN pushbutton depressed moves the expanded display horizontally in the direction specified by the SHIFTpushbutton. The rate of movement is a function of the length of time the MOTN pushbutton is held depressed. However, a momentary depression will only move the expanded segment one channel.
WIDTH The WIDTHpushbutton permits horizontally expanding or contracting the display. Holding the WIDTHpushbutton depressed horizontally contracts the display when the left (<<) direction is selected by the SHIFTpushbutton, or horizontally expands the display when the right (>>) direction is selected by the SHIFT pushbutton. Horizontal expansion increases the spacing between channels, causing the number of channels displayed to decrease, while horizontal contraction decreases the spacing between channels, causing the number of channels displayed to increase. The rate of expansion or contraction is a function of the length of time the WIDTHpushbutton is held depressed. However, a momentary depression will only expand or contract the display by one channel.
3-7 0,, • 0, C
;$,;v •;Pf I PO, 1.7’,I 444.14f Function Pushbuttons
ACQ Alternately starts, pauses or stops data acquisition in the selected mode. Depressng the ACQ pushbutton once starts data acquisition. Depressing the ACQ pushbutton a second time pauses data acquisition, allowing it to continue when the ACQ pushbutton is depressed a third time. During the time data acquisition is in progress, the letter “A” is flashed on the display. When data acquisition k paused, depressing the minus (—)pushbutton at the operand push button array and then the ACQ pushbutton stops data acquisition. Data acquisition can be preset to stop automatically after reaching a preset live or clock time (preset number of passes in MCS), after reaching a preset count total in the channels between the markers, or after reaching a preset count level in any channel. ADC digital offset from 0 to 8191 channels may also be selected for C: PHA acquisition. The desired acquisition mode, PHA preset time (MCS passes), preset count total, preset count level, digtal offset, and MCS dwell time are entered via the operand pushbutton array and displayed as acquisition parameters (Status Page 2). During PHA acquisition, the system automatically computes and displays the elapsed live and clock times, the preset time (passes) remaining, the count total and effective count rate in the channels between the markers, and the system busy status in percent.
AUTO Initiates the preselected auto lob sequence. Depressing the AUTO pushbutton initiates the sequence of up to eight auto job operations and automatically repeats
- the sequence the specified number of times. Entering a group number at the operand pushbutton array and then depressing the AUTO pushbutton sets the auto group (group in which the auto job operations are performed) to the group number entered and then initiates the sequence of auto job operations. The auto job is terminated upon completion of the last operation of the last specified auto job cycle or when the STOP pushbutton is depressed. Operations which can be included in the sequence are erase, acquire, spectrum strip, plot, next group, any of the four operational functions or the input/output operations. The auto group, strip factor, work group, the operational functions, erase, acquire, spectrum strip, plot, next group and input/output operations and the preset number of auto job cycles are entered via the operand pushbutton array and displayed as auto job parameters (Status Page 4). During auto job, the preset (Status Page 4). C number of cycles remaining is displayed as an auto job parameter
3—8
SCRL
AREA
BGND
ECAL
depressing
the
simultaneous
to
channel
selecting defined
(Status
channels, channels
4.
Depressing
intensified
up
the
the 2.
3.
array for
net
channel Depressing
Page
minus
known
Selects
calibrate
In
1.
select
this
to
the
SCRL
value(s)
counts
current
time.
pushbutton. energy
compute energy
(offset), Exit
(Status pushbutton.
Position
Position
respective
Select
3).
56
and
background
Page
reference
mode,
AREA,
portion
energy
contents
energy
channels,
another
in the
pushbutton
ALL,
mode
Depressing
then,
intensified
the
(total
regions
the
the
display This
up
Status
value
value
Page
4).
for
with
energy
the
the
and the
energy
WIDTH
to
BGND,
SCRL
AREA
the
ROl
calibrate
of
as
the low
between
removes
jp
display
portion
and
counts
The
energy
energy
3)
six
updates
numeric
at
at
the
counts),
Page
indicated
withinthe
AREA
starting
group
respective
or
to
and
calibrate
a
pushbutton
the
the
consecutive
the
region
numeric
region
BGND
calibration
qyjutsr
pushbutton. spectrum;
second
TOT,
the
FWHM
minus
1
high
peaks.
per
the operand
operand
the
of cursor
mode
minus
BGND
and
the
and
Scroll
respective
background
with
the
totals
channels
by
flashing
channel
pushbutton
respectively,
left
reference
)
current
display
time.
display
the
position
mode
background
D/O
and
permitting
3—9
spectrum
at
at
(—)
the
statically
or
the
pushbutton
Depressing
display
and
pushbutton
is
pushbutton
intensified
respective
the
the
are
pushbutton
the
PEAK
Scroll
performed
letter
by
parameter(s)
left
marker
(slope)
right
“E”
of
computed
is or
LE
RE
changing.
the
count
depressing
counts,
energy
updated
computes
the
intensified
marker
or
can
parameter,
parameter,
parameters,
from
entry
display
“E”
displays
counts)
left
markers
as
during
computes
the
E/CH
defined
overlap and
array
array
regions
be
totals
the
being
as
at
the
peaks.
and
FWHM
values. of
channel;
ECAL
selected
as
zero follows:
the
(Status
DATA
the
is
the
between
Spectral
display,
the
and
data and
and
the
and
right
the
of
region
terminated
Flashed
within’the
portionof
operand
group(s)
enter
enter
the
net
respectively
energy
ECAL
up
enters
known
numeric
E(O) depress
depress
energy,
displays
markers
acquisition
parameter
Page
markers
by
to
the
ratio(s) area
totals
the
the
data
the
parameters
causes
12 pushbutton
momentarily
on
the
content
energies
intercept
and pushbutton
3).
the
the
known
(total
known
markers
consecutive
content
by
the
current
and are
these
the
display
energy
at
are
of
displays
system
depressing
for
ENTER
ENTER
(Status
spectrum.
when
moved
display.
the
peak
the
specified
counts
of
values
low
high
101
for
marker
in
of
a
the
to second
two
by All SP1, SP2, Spare pushbuttons available for future operational functions. SP3
F1/F2, Depressing the F1/F2 or F3/F4 pushbutton when the right ( >> ) direction F3/F4 is selected by the SHIFTpushbutton performs the operational functions specified for the Fl or F3 parameter (Status Page 4), respectively. Depressing the F1/ F2 or F3/F4 pushbutton when the left (<<) direction is selected by the SHIFT pushbutton performs the operational function specified for the F2 or F4 parameter (Status Page 4), respectively.
NOTE: Pushbuttons F1/F2 and F3/F4 are only operational when one or more of the fj mwa otion pqcjqgs are ordered with the system and an operational function contained in these packages is specified for the respective Fl, F2, F3 or F4 parameter (Status Page 4).
STRP Multiplies a selected group by the. strip fcjps_(SF) and adds it to, or subtracts it from the current display group The strip factor (SF) is entered via the operation pushbutton array and displayed as a data manipulation parameter (Status Page 3). Entering a group number at the operand pushbutton array and then depressing the STRP/PLOTpushbutton when the right (>>) direction is selected by the SHIFTpushbutton, multiplies the selected group by the strip
factor and adds itto the current display group. Depressing the minus (—) pushbutton prior to entering a group number at the operand pushbutton array and then depressing the STRP/PLOTpushbutton when the right (>>) direction is selected by the SHIFTpushbutton, multiplies the selected group by the strip factor and subtracts it from the current display group.
PLOT Depressing the STRP/PLOTpushbutton when the left (<< ) direction is selected by the SHIFTpushbutton, plots the current spectral data display and the current alphanumeric parameter display (current status page or scroll data) at the X—’per. Output to the X—Yplotter is terminated by depressing the STRP/PLOTpushbutton a second time when the left (<<) direction is selected by the SHIFTpushbutton. Depressing the minus (—) pushbutton at the operand pushbutton array and then the STRP/PLOT pushbutton when the left (<<)direction is selected by the SHIFTpushbutton, alternately displays and supplies a (0,0) and full scale (X,Y) point for plotter calibration. Output of the plotter calibration points is terminated by depressing the STRP/PLOTpushbutton a second time when the left (cZ() direction is selected by the SHIFTpushbutton.
3-10 101, Depressing the 101 or 102 pushbutton performs the selected data input/output 102 operation at the input/output device specified for 101 or 102, respectively. The input/output device, input/output mode and input/output data for 101 and 102 are entered via the operand pushbutton array or selected via the NXTV pushbutton as auto analysis parameters (Status Page 4).
NOTE: Pushbuttons 101 and 102 are only operational when one or more input/output peripheral interface option is ordered with the system and the desired input/output device, mode and data is specified for the 101 or 102 parameter (Status Page 4). If no I/O device is specified when the 101 or 102 pushbutton is depressed, the selected data input/output operation defaults to the ND600 Terminal operand pushbutton array/CRT display.
ERASE Simultaneously depressing both ERASEpushbuttons clears all channels of the current display group.
STOP Depressing the STOP pushbutton terminates auto analysis or any input/output operation currently in progress.
NOTE: Depressing the STOP pushbutton does not terminate data acquisition.
3—11 Status
SHIFT
CRSR
NXTV ENTER
Pushbuttons
Depressing function parameter
(<<
Depressing by parameter the direction of selection to pushbutton selection pushbutton, cursor. parameter last depressing currently Holding display parameter Entering Depressing operand
cursor.
at NOTE: parameter was
numeric
to
:•
the
the
the
the
zero
last
parameter.
entered,
)/right
currently
next
SHIFT operand ‘______
of
parameter
of the
After
pushbutton
Depressing
minus entry
displayed reverts
reverts is
movement
to
entries
the entry.
the
selected the ERAS.
the
a at
the
status
selected SF
NXTV
sets
the
dual
(
pushbutton,
the
depressing
the
list
SHIFT
NXTV >>
at
CRSR
(—)
ENTER SF3
pushbutton
displayed
Depressing
to the
to left
the
operand parameter
available
function
last
However, is of
at ‘rrop E
)
pushbutton
the
status the
by 0
array the
(left,
again
pushbutton by
caret
display
pushbutton or
the
the
operand
pushbutton,
parameter
pushbutton
the
first
first
the
up, ENTER SF
the
currently operand
for
moves
page.
status
pushbutton
decrease
(one display array
sequentially
pushbutton,
the
SHIFT for
parameter to
line parameter
cursor
if
ENTER
the
pushbutton
depressed
3—12
the
the
the pushbutton
CRSR
flashing,
when
the page alternately
deletes
by
entry
status
pushbutton
enters
backs
pushbutton,
cursor,
displayed
right
NXTV
status to
or
line.
display pushbutton
pushbutton,
array
the
the is
.
contract/right,
for (PAGE). entry
parameter or
advanced.
selected, or
the
the up
sequentially
array
one parameter
right
first
pushbutton
to
Pa
the
After
when
down,
If
and
the
selects
cursor
parameter
parameter
(except
specify status
array
the
static)
•EF
status
parameter
moves
and (>>)
display
then
sets
the
no
Depressing
parameter
selected
when
line 0,
selection
to
and
page
display
parameter
no
the
selected
first
parameter
depressing the
to
for
direction
the
the is
displays
by
parameter value increase
value
then of
specify
the
held
parameter
the
direction
is
parameter
(PAGE)
display
next
line.
the
by
selected,
of
left
value
the reverts
PAGE momentarily
depressed,
of
by
selected
the
list a
value
the
status
is is
the
or
the
the
double
(<<)
minus
the
After
of cursor
value
displayed, selected
by display
required
list
of
expand).
value
parameter).
to
lower/upper CRSR (PAGE) status
the
display
was
one
display
of
at
the
(—)
left
entered
the
a
C ‘...‘,..‘. !:•IEF
Operand Pushbutton Array
This 16—pushbuttonarray permits entry of numerical values, operational codes and mathematical operators to define data acquisition, display, manipulation and input/output functions. The telephone format alpha characters on number pushbuttons 2—9permit entry of functions using understandable mnemonic codes. For example, entering PHAC specifies the PHA Clock Time Acquisition Mode.
Entries made at the operand pushbutton array (numerical values, numeric equivalents of mnemonic operational codes, and mathematical operators) are displayed in the order of entry just below the display of the current status page. This allows the operator to verify their correctness before they are entered by depressing the ENTERpushbutton.
Power On/Off Rocker Switch
Controls application of the ac line voltage to the display CRTand NIM power supply of the ND600 Terminal. When the upper portion of the rocker switch is depressed, power is applied. When the lower portion is depressed, power is removed.
NOTE: On later units, the switch will be located on the rear panel of the ND600 Terminal.
ND600 TERMINAL CRT CONTROLS
INTESITY Adjusts the brightness of the CRTdisplay.
FOCUS Adjusts the sharpness of the CRTdisplay.
This control, which is located on the rear of the terminal, adjusts the t vertical position of the olphnumeric and spectral data display on the POSITION CRTscreen.
This control, which is located on the rear of the terminal, adjusts the POSITION horizontal position of the alphanumeric and spectral data display on the CRTscreen.
3—13 ND600 POWER
Ji J2
J3
J4
(MSINP)
(MSSTA*)
(EXTTB)
(ACQEN)
ELECTRONICS
OFF/ON
Controls
of
with An Enclosure. each OV
An
of start occurs by negative is
or dwell is An NOTE:
pulses, or of negative
pulse. to Maximum
If
by clock PHA, NOTE: the An introduced +3V) acquisition enable/disable
220
the
15
switch
SW4
at
switch
channel setting
input
1 pulse
input
setting
input
ENCLOSURE
input
ACT—A
a
and occurs
channel.
MHz.
a
to
time ND600
ohms. the
time
minimum on
positive
is
+2.4
To
A application
enable
An
used
with
used or
TMULT
used or
SW3
used set
SW4 the
pulse
SW3
live
switch multiple
use
per
advance
When
base
at
on positive
board
positive
is
external
Input
to
to
negative
System. to
in a
the to
disabled.
on
to
on
the
the
time
channel
to
Requires
duration
level. +5V repetition acquisition. function. minimum
ON,
in
start multichannel
parameter
provide
enable
the
set
SW7
the
OFF
is impedance
10 (REAR
external positive
PHA.
pass,
clock
occurs
transition
of
set
transition in
to time
ACT—A MHz
3-14
a ACT—A
clocking
on
transition
When the and
amplitude
during
multichannel
POWER
to
positive
of
or
an
duration
Setting
recurrent
the
base
When scales
PANEL)
rate
level. OFF,
ac
on transition
is
leaving 30
hold
clock/time
external
board,
set
When board. is set
ACT—A
scaling
line
the of
nsec.
multichannel of
occurs
is
may
75
ON,
an off
pulses, to at
this switch
the
of
to
the
with 100
of
negative
Live
voltage
ohms.
mode
the
external one
POWER this
the
EXT.
also
acquisition.
0.5
pulse
scaling clock/time
pulse
input of If
board
kHz. Maximum
If
power for
on
a
base,
start
time
SW3 pulse.
second
input the SW6 SW4
be
minimum
+2.4
of
the psec.
incrementing
depending
to
depending
is
transition
substituted operation
to OFF,
pulse.
Scaling.
Clocking
signal
clock
correction is
is
to pass.
positive
is
normally
TBASE the
is
to
ON.
applied
set
intervals set
IF
pulse
ON
brought
Start
base
+5V
ND600
When
duration
power
SW3
to
time
to
either
Requires
Input
parameter
inverts
ON,
repetition
occurs
of in transition
upon
OFF, for can
occurs
upon Requires
open
for
the to
is
can
switch is
amplitude
to the
with
is
determining
Electronics
set
disconnected
impedance the
be selected
the
of
removed.
count ground
the start
the
be
the
clocking
pulse.
(biased
on a
on
to
selected
correction 0.5 circuits
internal
+3
disabled
SW6
setting
is positive
setting
acquisition the
of
OFF,
rate the
in
set
to
Jsec.
(OV), the
for
on
at :MCS
J5
J6
MODE
J7, the MODE connector,
to ADCOO* MODE time
signal location.
data PHA
to of
In
(CHNGj
ON,
both the
50
PHA
J8,
base.
MODE input
MODE
I.isec
DX23*
J4
2
2
2
of
J9
or
modes
ACQUISITION — Acquisition
and
(ACQEN*)
the
ADC
Sequential
lines
per
by
pin
2
2 -
PHA
is
externally
enables
above enables
storage
(PHAC
15).
11
the
(signals
*
MODE
A of sample transition
signals (i.e., where Swtch J6
duration. with This
Spare 10
least
is Setting
modes,
BNC
TTL
channel
acquisition
addition or
addition
provides
cycle. MHz
activated
pulse
ADCOO*
50
supplying
PHAL)
significant
2,
compatible
BNC’s.
ADCOO*
when
changer for not SW5
ohms.
pulse
the
sweep
respectively.
of
is
out
advance The
the
of
of
a
on
static
when this
TTL
MODE
by —
pulse put
in
train
a
a
J2
circuitry
the
signal
is ADCl2*). to
synchronization
20—bit
setting
the
12—bit level
compatible,
bit
the at
output
(MSSTA*)
the
MODE
or
ACT-A
for
upon
is
parameter
BNC )
auto
flashing
least
controlled
to DEVEN* next
3-15
from
system
data
data
either
feeding
signal
the
completion
analysis 2
J6.
board
significant
sample.
Acquisition +5
word
word
BNC.
channel
active A
test
switch
to
(Status
When
to
level
must
is
J6
by
selectively
CV
(signals
on
the
mode,
purposes.
displayed
can
either Both
of
low,
can
the be SW5
which
location
SW2
ACT—A
Page
bit)
a
is drive
controlled
ADC
modes this be
multichannel
DX04* activated,
is approximately
to
the or
2)
is
used
set
on
enables
When
the
SW8
level
coax board
at
defined to
data
internal
require
the
to
+5V
MCS
current
to —
on
ON,
via cable
changes
SW5
CRT). input
advance
(50-pin
DX23*,
one
selects
during
the
or by
scaling
a
or
a
J6
is
signal
50
channel
either of
terminated
service
ACT—A lines
the
an
set
Upon
provides
to
two
nsec
DXT
acquisition
MCS
external
where
an
ADC
to
CV.
pass.
(signals
supplied
of
external
infernal
termination
OFF,
time
board in
The
a C
ci CHAPTER IV OPERATING PROCEDURES
INTRODUCTION
From the point of view of the scientist using the multichannel analyzer, the most impor tant portion of the analyzer is the analog—to—digitalconverter which produces, in response to each input pulse, a number whose magnitude is a linear function of the peak amplitude of the input pulse.
The basic method used for conversion is a Wilkinson—typeconverter which employs a circuit which causes a capacitor to become charged to a voltage proportional to the peak voltage of the input pulse. Following this charging operation, the capacitor is linearly discharged, with the time required for this discharge therefore a linear function of the input pulse magnitude. During the discharge, pulses from a periodic pulse generator are counted by means of a simple scaler; the state of the scaler at the end of the process indicating in digital form the magnitude of the input pulse.
This description of the Wilkinson conversion method may also be used in describing the operation of the ADC which is used in the ND600 Analyzer System. This description is, of course, not complete, in that nothing has been said of such things as coincidence gating, generation of “end of conversion” signals, and the like. For a preliminary understand ing of the complete analyzer, however, no further discussion is needed of the ADC, in order to understand the overall structure of the pulse height analyzer.
DEFINITION OF TERMS AND DESCRIPTION OF COMMONSPECTRAL FEATURES
Before discussing the principles of radiation analysis, it will be helpful first to define, with explanatory remarks, the terms to be used in the discussion.
Some of these terms emerge from a description of the spectrum shown in Figure 4—1which shows the distribution of energy of gamma radiation detected by means of a scintillation crystal, NA) (Ti), which is one of the most commonly utilized detectors. While the general shape of the Cs137 spectrum is peculiar to this form of detector, the observations usually apply to other detectors.
4-1 The presentation is in logarithmic form, wherein the vertical position of each point is at a level which is a linear function of the logarithm of the number of counts recorded in the corresponding analyzer channel. Various features of the spectrum are indicated by 0 Figure 4—2, the legend underneath the figure, and the following explanation.
b
%. g
L...
Figure 4—1. Typical 1024 channel Cs137 Figure 4—2. Principle features of typical spectrum taken with energy scale set at Cs137 spectrum shown in Figure 4—1. approximately 1.3 MeV full scale. a. 32 keV Barium X—rayline. b. Backscatter peak c. Compton edge. d. 662 keV Cs137 photopeak. e. 749 keV photopeak of Cs134 impurity. f. Continuum due to accidental self— concidences producing partial sum pulses. g. Accident sum coincidence peak. h. Detail due to background radiation.
Barium X-Ray, 32 keV
This X—rayis useful from the operator’s point of view in setting the analyzer zero energy position. It can be removed from the spectrum by use of an absorber such as a one— millimeter thick iron disk. There should be a flat region on the low energy side of this flne, extending back to the photomultiplier noise region. Typical noise, at room temperature, does not extend beyond the equivalent of 10 keV. Slightly incorrect amplifier adjustments can cause this noisy region to extend up to the low energy side of the X—rayline, at high counting rates. Amplifier misadjustments can be decreasing the counting rate. At low counting rates amplifier misodjustments produce less apparent noise, whereas photomulti— plier noise is not affected appreciably by counting rate and becomes proportionately a greater part of all recorded information.
C 4-2 Backscatter Peak
This broad line is produced by gamma photons which are scattered back at about 1800 from surrounding material. The amount of scattering is a function of the distance of the source from the material, descreasing with increasing distance. The proportion of backscattered gammas entering the crystal to the number of gammas directly received, for a fixed sample—to—surrounding—shielddistance obviously decreases as the distance from the source to the detector decreases. The shielding around the detector and source should not be nearer than approximately one foot, and the source should not be more than two or three inches from the detector.
Compton Distribution
Although the Cesium 137 source emits a nearly monochromatic gamma, the sodium iodide crystal does not absorb all of the energy of all of the gamma photons entering the crystal. The amount of energy absorbed in the crystal is quite random, except that there is a minimum amount of energy with which any gamma may escape after interacting. The probability of any gamma, which has lost only part of its energy in an interaction with an atom within the crystal, losing all or part of its remaining energy in interactions subsequent to the initial “collision” increases with crystal size. The resolution of the crystal —photomultiplier combination usually decreases somewhat as the crystal size increases, but the slight loss in resolution is much less important than the effect of a large number of gammasescaping the crystal after losing only part of their energies.
0.662 MeV Photopeak
Those gammas which lose all of their energies within the crystal produce a large number of scintillailons in the crystal. The number of light photons produced is, on the average, proportional to the gamma energy absorbed, but unfortunately only a small percentage of light photons produce photoelectrons at the photomultiplier cathode. Since the number of scintillations and the number of photoelectrons produced is subject to statistical vari ations, the pulse height produced at the photomultiplier anode differs from individual gamma photons, despite the fact that all of the absorbed gamma photons were virtually identical in energy. The width of the photopeak, at half height, is approximately equal to 2 /TT, where N is the average number of photoelectrons produced at the phototube cathode. A typical width, at half height, for the cesium 137 photopeak, is 53 keV.
0.794 MeV Cesium 134 Photopeak
Accidental Self-coincidence Continuum
At any counting rate, there is cifinite probability of two gammas entering the crystal at nearly the same time. Even if these gammas are of identical energies, there is a certain chance that one, or neither, will lose all of their energies, or that both will be totally absorbed. There is a greater chance that they will enter at slightly different
4-3 times, perhaps a microsecond apart, than nearly coincidentally. There will always be a photomultiplier output pulse which is greater than if only one of the gammas had entered, if the two are coincident within a microsecond. The “sum” pulse produces the apparent continuum beyond the photopeak, and in fact produces a continuum at lower energies also, obscured by the non—coincident gamma counts. The number of counts in this continuum is directly proportional to the source intensity, for a given isotope. It is obvious that not only is this continuum capable of completely obscuring very weak lines, but what is quite as important in some cases is the fact that counts appearing in this continuum represent counts which have been “swept out” of some other region of the spectrum by the accidental self—coincidences. Analyzers capable of perfect, dead time corrected, timing of experiments are frequently accused of incorrect timing because of the absence of counts in a line, swept out by accidental coincidences. Errors of a percent can occur at counting rates of 10,000 pulses per second while the accuracy of the timing should be better than one percent. The sweepout effect must be considered during tests of timing accuracy or during quantitative measurements of activity.
Accidental Self-coincidence Sum Peak
Calculation of the shape of the self—coincidence component of the complete spectrum would be difficult, since the amplifier and analyzer characteristics enter the situation. It is not difficult to see, however, that it is not unreasonable to expect that two com pletely absorbed gammas virtually in coincidence will occur frequently enough to produce a sum peak at the region corresponding to 1.324 MeV. Such “accidental” or quasium peaks can readily be distinguished from true sum peaks by changing the counting rate without changing the source—to—detectorposition (use a weaker sample). True sum peaks (‘ do not vary in intensity, relative to other lines in the spectrum, as a function of source intensity.
Background Detail
The detector used in this measurement was not shielded.
PRINCIPLES OF RADIATION ANALYSIS
In this section will be discussed the numerous concepts and instrument requirements which are encountered in the analysis of the energy distribution of events detected by various radiation detectors. The discussion will be general in the sense that it will usually not refer to the use of Nuclear Data analyzers but to matters encountered in the use of any pulse height analyzer. It should not be taken to represent universally accepted inter pretations, but it is a reasonably oblective discussion.
In any interpretation of a multichannel analyzer spectrum, it is important that all the effects of experimental conditions be carefully considered. For example, in the spectrum shown in Figure 4—1, experimental conditions can alter the shape of the spectrum in many ways. The amount of X—radation detected depends upon the material between C 4-4 the source and the sodium iodide crystal, and the backscatter peak magnitude depends upon the nature and location of the surrounding material. The reasons for which these changes in condition can alter the spectral shape are for the most part beyond the scope of this discussion. But it is important to appreciate that conditions which might appear irrelevant to those not well acquainted with the techniques, can markedly affect the spectrum shape. Not only can experimental results be misinterpreted, if the experimental conditions are improperly controlled, but the operation of the analyzer cannot properly be evaluated unless test conditions are quite well reproduced.
The effect of counting rate, that is to say, source intensity, upon the shape of the spectrum is evident from comparative measurements made under the same conditions except for source intensity. The apparent continuum of radiation beyond the photopeak is at a higher level for the case of higher counting rate than for the low counting rate measure ment. This is to be expected for the following reasons.
The probability of two events being nearly coincident, by accident, at any given counting rate can readily be calculated. If the input pulses are one microsecond wide, after amplification and shaping, then at 10,000 events per second at the radiation detector, about one percent of the events will be to some degree improperly reported by the detector, It is not always important that the number of accidental self—coincidences be minimized, but in some measurements if such coincidences occur once per hundred pulses, the error may be important. What is more important is there may well be information of interest obscurred by the presence of large number of “accidentals”. Where accurate quantitative measurements are involved, and whenever experimental conditions permit, analysis should be at a sufficiently low counting rate to reduce the number of accidental coincidences to an acceptably low level. The effects produced by accidental self—coincidence are commonly referred to as pulse pile—upeffects.
More frequently than in the past, automatic data reduction techniques are utilized in interpreting accumulated data. The method most commonly used is to subtract, point by point, one or more components of the spectrum by use of a previously measured or computer—derivedstandard spectrum. If the standard spectrum was compiled at low counting rate, then the remainder of the complex spectrum, after subtracting out a single component may be in error if the complex spectrum was measured at high count ing rates. The same sort of error will be made if the source—detector geometry has been changed from that used in accumulating the standard. This is further evidence that for highly accurate work, source intensities should be kept as low as economics and other experimental factors permit. Carefully standardized detector—source geometrics, and standardized energy scales are recommended in applications involving activation analysis.
A large proportion of the experiments made with this type instrument do not involve gamma analysis, of course, and in some cases nuclear particles (protons, neutrons, deuterons, etc.), or dust, rather than gamma radiation is involved. But, in as much as the input signals are of the same general shape and randomness as those encountered in gamma analysis, the requirements upon the analyzer are roughly the same.
4-5 Analog to Digital Converter
Conversion Gain Selection. One factor to consider in the selection of the proper conversion gain is storage capacity of the analyzer memory being used. Since the number of address ad vance pulses for a full scale (8 volt) input signal corresponds to the Conversion Gain switch positions of 256, 512, 1024, 2048, 4096 and 8192, it may seem feasible to select the switch position corresponding to the memory size, i.e., for a 1024 channel memory, set the switch at 1024, for a 2048 channel memory, set the switch at 2048, etc. This is true in some experiments but not necessarily in others. For example, if the energy of interest does not exceed four volts, it would be better to select a conversion gain of 2048 with a 1024 channel memorysize since the spectrum peaks would be spread out over the full memory rather than half as would be the case if a conversion gain of 1024 were chosen.
Another factor to consider is resolution. With the Conversion Gain switch set at 1024, each channel represents 8 millivolts for a full scale 8 volt input. This means the voltage levels can be resolved within 8 millivolts of each other, hence the term resolution. As the conversion gain is lowered (voltage per channel increased), the resolution decreases accord ingly. Therefore, if the experiment being performed requires high resolution to obtain the desired accuracy, it may be advantageous to use a higher conversion gain setting.
Still another factor to consider is speed. Since the analysis time for a full scale input pulse with the Conversion Gain switch set at 1024 is twice as long as it is with the switch set at 512, it may be feasible to use a lower conversion gain setting when speed rather than resolution is desired. However, since the average analysis time rather than the maximum is usually used in evaluating the selection of the proper conversion gain, the percentage of increase in speed is considerably less and the loss in resolution may be enough to make the increase in speed meaningless. Therefore, first consider how these factors will affect the experiment being performed and then select the conversion gain which is most applicable.
Lower Level Discriminator Adjustment. In some experiments, intense noise or low energy radiation may be present. To reduce the effect of dead time, which is a result of noise analysis, the THRESHOLD(LLD)control must be adjusted above the level of the noise. The THRESHOLD(LLD)control biases a discriminator circuit such that signals below the bias level imposed by this control are not presented to the ADC for analysis. For those signals which exceed the bias level, the bias is removed to permit passage of the entire signal. Therefore, a large signal would be analyzed into exactly the same counting channel, independent of the bias, but small signals would not be analyzed.
A percent dead time meter is a useful tool in determining whether or not the ADC is preoccupied with the useless analysis of noise. This allows the user to determine whether or not the setting of the THRESHOLD(LLD)control affects the indicated percent dead time.
When there is no appreciable noise mixed with the input signal, a minimum THRESHOLD (LLD) control setting equivalent to 30 to 4OmVis usually appropriate. For highest linearity in the lower energy regions, the THRESHOLD(LLD)control should be set at the minimum value. However, if there is an apparent increase in noise, the minimumsetting should be increased accordingly.
4-6 Upper Level Discriminator Adjustment. The setting of the ULDcontrol (may be loctaed on the front panel or internal) selects the triggering level of the upper level discriminator circuit. Input pulses which exceed the bias setting imposed by this control will cause the linear gate of the ADC to close, prohibiting the analysis of the input pulse. For most exper iments, this control is set to maximum(approximately 8.8V), but can be set as desired iment depending upon experiment requirements.
Zero Level Adjustment. The Zero control is used primarily for precise adjustment of energy zero to correspond to the lower boundry of channel zero. It will be found that alteration of the Conversion Gain switch or input coupling (AD/DC) switch changes the energy zero position. It is therefore recommended that the proper setting of the ZERO control to locate the zero energy intercept be correctly determined each time a different conversion gain or input coupling mode is selected. It is likely thata calibration performance check once a month will be adequate for most applications, but this must be determined by experience.
ND600 Terminal
The ND600 Terminal is the system’sdisplay and operational control center. It contains the display CRT, 44—pushbuttoninteractive keyboard and four—wideNIM enclosure and power supply.
The CRTprovides display of four separate pages of alphanumeric data simultaneously with spectral data. Each page contains parameter data pertinent to basic operational functions of the ND600. Page 1 contains parameters normally associated with visually monitoring spectral data. Page 2 contains parameters relating to set—upand performance of data acquisition. Page 3 contains the data manipulation parameters. Page 4 contains the parameters available for set—upof an auto—jobsequence.
The 44—pushbuttoninteractive keyboard is functionally grouped for ease of operation. An eight—pushbuttonarray controls data display, a 16—pushbuttonarray allows quick selection of data acquisition, manipulation and input/output functions, a four—pushbutton array selects and controls status display, and another 16—pushbuttonsarray permits numerical entry, mode selection and mathematical manipulation.
The 4—wideNIM enclosure and power supply houses and powers the ADC and other front— end signal conditioning modules and places them in close proximity to the CRTdisplay and pushbutton keyboard.
4-7
for
procedures, and
mode,
The
ND520
of BNC
selected
a. The Initial to
System storage
be
pulses
During sequential
Analysis
counted
radiation pulse
can
1. indexed A
is
DATA
Pulse
brief
able
routine
the
acquired.
PHA
following
alphanumeric
following
be
Control
CONV
THRESHO
Set
ND575ADC
ULD
ACQ/OFF/STRB
ZERO
DC/AC
COIN/OFF/ANTI
cables
height
Height
System
directly
address
ACQUISITION
is
amplitude expressed
AMP
to
Included
address
definition
spectrum
ADC
storage
by
by
of
ready
intensity
accept
before
listing.
the
signals
the
between
the
GAIN
OUT
analysis
Analysis
and
operating
Set-Up
procedures
register
In
LD(LLD)
proportional
channel
in
for
experimenter.
Nal
channel,
are
certain
operating
storage
by
and
Module
status
analysis,
PAD
the
of
BNC
on
as
normal
detector
number
initial
the
data
and (amplitude
a
accumulate
memory. an
in
controls
function
and
scaler
page procedures
applications,
NAI
for the
amplitude
provide
Spectrum
depending
acquisition
operation.
the
set—up
the
to
the
of
a
Data
selection
and
detector
the
preset
in
counts
ND600
converter
to
ND575
A
of
analysis),
the
step—by
new
ND520
initial
procedures
count amplitude
Handling
describe
either
basis
Storage
upon
ADC
clock
is
or
information.
These
additional
and
Analyzer
and
SIGNAL
that
of
sampling
enables
positions
generates
PAD
step
energy
whether
4-8
and
the
multichannel
one
time.
parameter
data
Unit.
AC fully
mode
2K procedures
OFF
OFF Fully
Fully
Fully Initial of
for
instructions
are
the
ND520
an
is
(down System.
BNC.
or
acquisition the
PHA
external
then
per
clockwise
When
connected
in
as
counterclockwise. clockwise
counterclockwise.
add
analyzed
resultant
This
a
velocity.
Position
The
acquisition
which
follows:
train
entry.
unit
spectrum
PREAMP
or
added
position)
address
should
performing
three
scaling
subtract
to
of
equipment
of
the
number
input
at
in
ensure
(if voltage
to
to,
pulses
Also
acquisition
Other
be
the
storage,
the
is
IN
ND600
the
internal,
(time
of
or
then
performed
operation
signal.
included
factory). BNC
pulse
data
the
ADC
is
the
subtracted
with
relationships
amplitude
may
then
analysis)
used
Analyzer
pulse
ND600
energy which
and
the
by
height
it
be
modes
The
transferred
to
is
is
has
connecting
as
between
required.
number
height
a
preset
index
from,
pulses
represents
a
Analyzer
and
calibration
can
been
procedure analysis
are
System
matter
that
also
analysis
the
of
a
the are ______
b. ND520 PAD Module
Control Initial Position COARSE GAIN 4 FINE GAIN Mid range. DISC 10.0
2. After the ADC and PAD controls have been initially set, initiate acquisition as follows: a. Set the POWERrocker switches on ND600 Electronics Enclosure rear panel and ND600 terminal keyboard to POWERON. b. Adjust the INTENSITY control on the ND600 Terminal until the display is visible on the CRTscreen. Then adjust the FOCUS control for the desired display sharpness.
NOTE: When power is applied, the display is initialized to Status Page 1 and 2048 data channels with the left and right markers positioned at channels 1 and 2047, respectively. c. Simultaneously depress both ERASEpushbuttons to clear the contents of all data channels to zero. d. Depress the SHIFTpushbutton to select the left (<<)direction and then depress the INT/bEL pushbutton to delete any intensified channels.
_FAGE 1 TOTL C CiGRP C ALGRF 1 i:iRF C 21i4e, C’GPF C 3 F.:F S 1 C:G F I 1 F:r1F::: 2C47 L C:HT C F:C:NT C LE 1.0CC FE 2047.000 CFS LOG
H FELL 0
Initial display of Status Page 1 and 2048 data channels with the left and right markers
positioned at channel 1 and 2047, respectively. e. Disconnect the BNC cable from the ND575 SIGNAL BNC and set the ND575 ACQ/OFF/STRB switch to STRB. f. Depress the ACQ pushbutton.
NOTE: When power is applied, the acquisition mode (MODE parameter, Status Page 2) is initialized to PHA Live Time (PHAL)and acquisition time is initialized to infinity seconds, i.e., the PTIMand TMULTparameters (Status Page 2) are set to zero (0) and one second (iS), respectively. 4-9 g. Adjust the ND575 ZERO control until storage is observed in channel one (1). C _FAGE A TOTL e CIGPP e AG P P 06 P F’ ‘33 I Z 2cj48 013 P F’ I1 GPP S 06 PP LMRK P riP : 2Fi47 LC:N T It PC.NT LE 1 PE 2047. 000 C:F S 512
2048 channel display showing storage in channel 1.
h. Set ND575 ACQ/O FE/STROBEswitch to ACQ.
i. Re—connectthe BNC cable from the ND520 AMP OUT BNC to the ND575 SIGNAL BNC.
I. Adjust the ND575 THRESHOLD(LLD)control clockwise until storage of a spectrum is C observed. The system is now in operation and the ND575 ADC is properly zeroed.
FAG E A T CITL 28830 CIGPP 0 AG PP 06 P F’ 0 1381 Z 2048 06 P F’ ‘3P P8 06 PP L IIPK p ri R: 204? L C NT 0 F.:CNT 0 LE i.ct RE 2047.000 C:F S
fr%.J I 2048 channel display showing storage of a Cs137 spectrum.
NOTE: If acquired data is never to be directly compared with other data runs, i.e., channel by channel comparison or spectrum stripping, ADC zero can be set at the highest value which ensures a positive intercept for all conversion gains. If data is to be compared C directly or stripped from other data, such as reference standards, precise front—endcalibra tion as described in the following paragraphs is required. 4-10
br
data
6.
peak 5.
4.
channels
2.
This
to NOTE: pushbutton,
3.
source.
1.
exemplatory
This
calibration proper the
linear
ZERO
ing System
Using _GSIZ ______CFS LE GRPS RGRP
LCNT LMRK PAGE
TOTL
1
Adjust
Depress
accumulation
is
Initial
falls
Using selects
Set Depress
when
Position
procedure
the
a
over
control,
system
Calibration
typical
ND575
The
32
at
power
the
ND600 ND520
32.
System
ACQ
accuracy the
a
and
channel
enter
display minus
purposes
the
1C24
storage
operation,
CCC MPOS
512
also 0
32
the
CONV
procedure 662,
C
display
2 rt
1
I is
pushbutton.
to
time
COARSE 1024
marker
(—)
Set—Up
applied.
system
assumes
groui
662 1
apd
group
could
respectively.
a
pushbutton
MeV
RE RCNT DGRP
RMRF( OGRP OGRF
OGRP
to
at
Gain Nat
cursor
(right
i.e.,
determine MSPN
pushbuttons,
the
for
and
can
(DGRP)
size
and
be
range.
the
detector
switch
operand
system obtained
662.
be
Spectrum
to
marker).
power
front
FINE
of
pushbuttons,
and
the
calibrated
and
1024 662
CCC
Since
peak
to
calibration
will
end then
C C C
C
GAIN
GSIZ
1
is
pushbutton
the
the
1024.
using
channels.
on,
Storage
4-11
After
position
equipment
suffice.
Nal
ACQ
acquire
ND520
parameter
controls
and
for
respectively.
markers position
a
1024
detectors
each
solid
direct
pushbutton.
procedure
at
all
array
and
amplifier
group
channel
Cs137
1
(particularly
controls
gain
so
state
keV/channel.
positioned
the
then
(Status
reading
and
that
are
(AGRP)
will
adjustment
left
GeLi
has
depress
display
depress
not
gain
0.662
are
Page
and
be
been
in
very
detector,
at
set
parameters
controls
the
used
keV/channel.
right
both
MeV
showing
channels
1)
the
to
performed
This
allow
linear,
detector)
Using
as
initial
ENTER
markers
ERASE
Cs137
the
procedure
and
but
sufficient
the
left
32
are
better
calibration
positions.
the
for
pushbutton.
to
pushbuttons.
photo
is
CRSR
and
and
at
initialized
The
fairly
verify
ND575
662,
assumes
right follow 7. 0.032
pushbutton locations.
8.
NOTE:
for
GAIN
GAIN Any simultaneous
parameter
completely Alphanumeric
alphanumeric
pages Pages particular options desires
the The
displayed
- _GSIZ 1.
PAGE
AGRP TOTL GRPS CFS LE LMRK LCNT
energy
Adjust
After
CRSR
of
procedure
Depress
MeV
5,
are
switch
Switch
eight
to
or
The
6
satisfactory
pushbutton
available further data
status
calibration
experiment, and
for
ND575 The
32.000
X—ray
and
blank
procedure
13698
status
with
the
settings 1024
setting
data
user
Status
206
512
then
for
system
pertinent
7
32
page.
2
1 minus 1
are
identify
and
peak
spectral
status
ZERO
entry
pages is
the
for
of Page to
not
also
of
is of calibration
is
OGRP DGRP OGRP for DGRP RMRK RCNT RE
(—)
and such
alphanumeric ACQ
set
1024
used 256,
now
of
4, page
A to
desired control
can
blank
a and an
data.
pushbutton
special
the the
basic
2,
particular
as
calibrated
primarily energy was
be
pushbutton ______
512,
selection
Parameter
0.5,
662.000
dates,
display 0.662
except
selected
or and
operational
Status described
is
alphanumeric
2048,
662
when
112
achieved,
0.25
calibration
the
parameter
0 0 0
at
1
MeV titles
experiment.
during
cursor
for
is
for
Pages
the
again.
Entry
ND520
outputting
for
4096
and
as
the
4-12
Cs137
1 above.
or
operand
follows:
display
keV/channel. functions
to
acquisition 0.125
X—ray tory peak respectively, 1,
1024
other
depress
PAGE
and
data
of
the
parameter
FINE
2,
photopeak
calibration.
1
8192.
falling channel
A
to PAGE
alphanumeric 3
keV/channel of
pushbutton keV/channel peak
associated
parameter.
and
similar
the
GAIN
on
of
alphanumeric
and
the
S—Y
and
ACQ
4
parameter
at
data
display
after
each
fall
system.
readout
control
procedure
left
662
plotter.
with
array
pushbutton,
appliable
at
achieving
The
contain
and with
with information
keY
the
showing
certain
of
parameter
so
when
and
blank
right
Status
respective
Cs137
a
proper
the
Status
that
can
CONV
alphanumeric
then
to
display
currently markers,
satisfac—
status
32
be
the
firmware
both
a
Page
photo—
a
channel
depress
keV
performed
data
user
minus(—)
the
CONV
0
of
is 2. If the status page desired is a higher numbered page than the current status page, depress the NXTV pushbutton until the desired status page is displayed.
3. If the status page desired iS a lower numbered page (or a higher numbered page) than the current status page, enter the number of the desired page at the operand pushbutton array and then depress the ENTERpushbutton. When the ENTERpushbutton is depressed, the selected status page ‘is displayed. If the ENTERpushbutton is depressed without an entry at the operand pushbutton array, Status Page 0 (no status display) is selected.
When power is applied to the ND600 System, the display is initialized to Status Page 1 with each of its parameters set to an initial value. When power is applied, the parameters of Status Pages 2, 3 and 4 are also set to initial values. The initialized state of Status Pages 1, 2, 3 and 4 is shown below:
_FFIGE 1 — FAGE TOTL i OGF.:F MODE PHAL. TOG 0 FIGPF 1 OGRF AG PP DGRP GSIZ 2i148 UGRF TBASE T MUL T GRPS 1 DGRF FT I M LT Lr1RK 1 PMRK PT 0 T e CT LCNT e RCNT P LE V e BUSY t. oee LE l.i3 RE 247.1iO DUFF €1 RATE oet CFS LOG TOTL e
Status Page 1 Status Page 2
— F AGE 4 << E/CH i. E( El. ElCIEl CYCLES 1 Fl AGR P D’O a. ElE1EI CTOGO e F2 A RE A a D/O 0. 030 STEP1 F3 BGND DO 3. ElEIEI STEP2 F4 TO Tt a D G R P STEP3 101 TTY F WHM a. aae S F 1 . ‘33El STEF4 MODE EICDO PEAK ‘3. aae STEP5 DATA ALL STEP6 102 STEP? MODE STEPS DATA AUTG 1 STRIP DGF:P 1 I,JGRF e AGRP 1
Status Page 3 Status Page 4 4-13 Parameter data on Status Page 1, 2, 3 and 4 which varies with operational functions, such as elapsed time, channel contents or count totals, is periodically updated by the system. Parameter data which is user selected, such as an operational mode, numerical value or mathematical manipulation is altered as follows:
1. Position the display cursor to the desired parameter. a. If the status parameter to be altered is near the top of the current status page, depress the SHIFTpushbutton to select the left (<< ) direction and depress the CRSRpushbutton until the display cursor is adjacent to the desired parameter. Each time the CRSRpushbutton is depressed, the display cursor will move to the next parameter to the right or down, line by line. After selection of the last parameter of the current status page, selection reverts to the first (PAGE) parameter. b. If the status parameter to be altered is near the bottom of the current status page, depress the SHIFTpushbutton to select the right (>>) direction and depress the CRSRpushbutton until the display cursor is adjacent to the desired parameter. Each time the CRSRpushbutton is depressed, the display cursor will move to the next parameter to the left or up, line by line. After selection of the first (PAGE) parameter, selection reverts to the last parameter of the current status page.
2. Enter the new value for the selected parameter. a. If the parameter value to be altered is a numerical value, sequentially enter the digits of the number at the operand pushbutton array, preceded by a minus (—)if the value is negative, insert a decimal point (.) where required if the value is a decimal fraction, and then depress the ENTERpushbutton. Entries at the operand pushbutton array are displayed as they are entered in the line following the last line of the current status page for veri fication of their correctness prior to depressing the ENTERpushbutton. For most numerical entries, the number can be up to 6 digits, exclusive of sign and decimal point. For decimal entries, at least one digit must precede the decimal paint (e.g. 0.436). b. If the parameter value to be altered is for a parameter which is defined by a list of alphanumeric codes (such as an acquisition mode, time multiplier, I/O device, etc.) or by a list of integer values (such as, a status page number, group size, acquire or display group number, etc.), it may be selected by depressing the NXTV pushbutton until the desired value is displayed for the parameter selected by the display cursor. Holding the NXTV pushbutton depressed sequentially displays the list of parameter value for the parameter selected by the display cursor. After the last parameter value in the list is displayed, selection reverts to the first parameter value (except for the PAGE parameter).
Entering minus (—)at the operand pushbutton array and then momentarily depressing the NXTV pushbutton permits backing up display of the list by one parameter value. However, if the NXTV pushbutton is held depressed, display of the list is again sequentially advanced.
NOTE: The telephone format alpha characters on number pushbuttons 2—9of the operand pushbutton array permit entry of functions in understandable mnemonic codes. For example, PHAClock Time Acquisition is specified for the MODE parameter (Status Page 2) by sequentially depressing the number pushbuttons containing the alpha characters PHAC and then depressing the ENTERpushbutton. The numerical equivalent of the mnemonic code (i .e. the numbers of the pushbuttons corresponding to the alpha characters) is displayed in the line following the last line of the current status page for verification of its correctness prior to depressing the ENTERpushbutton. 4-14 PHA Spectrum Storage for a Preset Clock Time
The following is a typical procedure for acquiring 1024 channels of data in the pulse height analysis mode for a preset clock time of 60 seconds. Memory group 2 will be selected for data storage. This procedure assumes the Initial System Set—upand Spectrum Storage procedure has been performed to verify proper system operation, i .e., power is on and all controls are set to initial positions.
1. Enter Stop Mode by depressing the ND600 STOP pushbutton.
NOTE: If system is still in the acquire mode as indicated by display of a flashing “A”, depress the ACQ pushbutton, the minus (—)pushbutton and then depress the ACQ pushbutton again. If a static “A” is displayed, depress the minus () pushbutton and then the ACQ pushbutton.
2. Select an ADC conversion gain of 1024 channels by setting the ND575 CONV GAIN switch to 1024.
3. Select memorystorage group size of 1024 channels. a. Select Status Page 1. b. Set the display cursor to GSIZ parameter using the CRSRpushbutton. c. Enter 1024 at the operand pushbutton array and depress the ENTERpushbutton.
4. Select group 2 as the acquire and display group. a. Select Status Page 2. b. Set the display cursor to the AGRP parameter using the CRSRpushbutton. c. Enter 2 at the operand pushbutton array and depress the ENTERpushbutton. d. Set the display cursor to the DGRP parameter using the CRSRpushbutton. e. Enter 2 at the operand pushbutton array and depress the ENTERpushbutton.
5. Erase the selected memory group by simultaneously depressing both ND600 ERASE pushbuttons.
6. Select the PHA Clock Time Mode of Acquisition. a. Set the display cursor to the MODE parameter using the CRSRpushbutton. b. Depress the NXTV pushbutton until PHAC is displayed for the MODE parameter.
4-15
7.
b. a.
c.
scaling
d.
performing data
appropriate
accumulation
The Analsis
The counts can radiation
can
acquire
Multichannel acquisition 8. Multichannel — P AG MCI TCITL C’ F’ P F’ T AGE Cl L T E:
T
other
following
be
either
Select
Depress
Set
Set
Start Enter F E A P UT E:’
I for ii SE P E F
U
can
expressed
mode.
mode.
the
the
60
of
intensity
data
is
60
be
be
these
a
signals
seconds
the external
1
display
display
a the
8703ci
preset
at
Scaling
scaling
advanced in
P
two
totalized
procedure acquisition
HA
One
character the
6
each
NXTV
multichannel by C Ij
cJ
operating
on
as
(clock acquisition
cursor
cursor
operand
the
is
equipment
a
k
channel
a
a pushbutton LT RATE T [:6
CT T
function
by
time
and
comparable number CI MIJ
LI
for procedure
S PP 6 “A”
to
to
time) by L Ci
Y the
T
stored
performing
procedures
pushbutton
basis
the
the
depressing is
3224.
scaling
for
internal time
______
is
of
of
flashed
and
TMULT
PTIM
employed.
a
enables
until
in counts
for
time.
fixed to
655 333
of then 58
6 each
15 procedures,
€1
performing
counting
parameter
60
or
recurrent
describe
array
on
iS
the
parameter
per
period
automatically
an Data
seconds.
the
4-16
channel
is
the
ACQ
external
displayed
unit
and
acquisition
Display
60
Counts
channel
display
which
in
data
of
multichannel
using
seconds
a
depress
of
pushbutton.
the
a
using
time
of
single
series
time
acquisition
time
full
represents
the
Nal
of
to
the
Cs137
for
stop
(dwell
the
Status
ENTER
indicate
of
can in
scale
memory.
multichannel
of
detector
base
CRSR
the
data
the
acquiring
CRSR
scalers.
spectrum
also
scaling
TMULT
time).
The
Page
generator
is
other
PHA
pushbutton.
pushbutton.
in
which
4K.
the
pushbutton.
be
the
and ND600
The
2
clock
acquired
passes.
relationships
ND600
parameter.
Up
data.
after
and
scaling
multichannel
represents
ND520
address
to
to
will
time
resultant
acquiring
one
enable
During
is
When
when
pass.
PAD
now
register
in
mode.
million
the
that
data
acquire
are
1024
for C connected to the ND600 unit by connecting BNC cables between the Nal detector and the ND520 PREAMPIN BNC and between the ND520 DISC OUT BNC and the ND600 Ji (MSINP) BNC (rear panel). These procedures assume the Initial System Set—Upand Spectrum Storage Procedure has been performed to verify proper system operation, i.e., power is on and all controls are set to initial positions.
Multichannel Scaling (Single Pass)
The following is a typical procedure for performing a single multichannel scaling pass in a 1024 channel memory group at a dwell time of 10 msec per channel. The multichannel scaling pass is initiated by a +3 to OVstart pulse applied to the ND600 J2 (MSSTA*)BNC (rear panel) from the external equipment.
NOTE: Each multichannel scaling pass can be initiated simply by depressing the ACQ pushbutton rather than applying an external start pulse if a shorting BNC k inserted in the ND600 J2 (MSSTA*)BNC.
1. Enter the Stop Mode by depressing the ND600 STOP pushbutton.
2. Select a memory storage group of 1024 channels. a. Select Status Page 1. b. Set the display cursor to the GSIZ parameter using the CRSRpushbutton.
c. Enter 1024 at the operand pushbutton array and depress the ENTERpushbutton.
NOTE: The display group (DGRP) and acquire group (AGRP) parameters are initialized to 1 when power is applied.
3. Erase selected memory group by simultaneously depressing both ND600 ERASEpushbuttons.
4. Select the Multichannel Scaling Mode.
a. Select Status Page 2 b. Set the display cursor to MODE parameter using the CRSRpushbutton.
c. Select the MCS mode using the NXTV pushbutton.
5. Select a dwell time per channel of 10 msec. a. Set the display cursor to the TBASEparameter using the CRSRpushbutton. b. Enter 1 at operand pushbutton array and depress the ENTERpushbutton.
4-17 d. 6. c. 7. b. a. pass the to automatically 8. passes scaling Multichannel The in the shorting (rear NOTE: 1. _pTIr1 MODE PAGE PTOT AGPP PLE’.) TE:ASE DOFF TOTL the each display ACQ Set Select Select will Set following Enter Start When Enter panel) desired in pass the the subsequent A BNC begin a data pushbutton 1 the multichannel preset a a CRT. 1024 227654 display display at from is time single Scaling stop viewing is is STOP the acquisition initiated MC3 when a inserted channel 2 €1 C C the 1 1 1 number multiplier typical operand acquiring pass cursor MCS cursor mode the (Preset external rather level TcIGCI LT Tr1IJLT DGF.:P PATE EIIJf3Y C:T by scaling is start pass. in of memory to to by procedure added by pushbutton a the than multichannel using of Recurrent data. the the +3 depressing depressing pulse equipment. 1OMS ND600 pass to TMULT to PTIM applying group C. 0.000 the OV I the is CiS CCC is for using applied. CFS C C C start array 1 parameter completed, Passes) J2 data at performing ND600 parameter the scaling a a pushbutton 4-18 (MSSTA*) the pulse dwell and separate ND600 stored Display channel scaling NXTV ACQ When depress using applied passes time set using in a STOP start preset BNC. pushbutton. the pushbutton. and the the pass. of the spectrum of can the the to Status previous pass view CFS pulse pushbutton. CRSR 10 number the be ENTER CRSR Counts msec parameter is initiated the to ND600 Page after pushbutton. completed, pushbutton. pass. initiate per The pushbutton. resultant of full 2 a recurrent channel. multichannel and J2 single simply scale Each (Status each (MSSTA*) resultant spectrum the mulfichannel multichannel is by multichannel pass Page ND600 1 Data K. depressing scaling if BNC 1024 on 1) acquired a will
C
C 2. Select a memory storage group of 1024 channels.
a. Select Status Page 1.
b. Set the display cursor to the GSIZ parameter using the CRSRpushbutton.
c. Enter 1024 at the operand pushbutton array and depress the ENTERpushbutton.
NOTE: The display group (DGRP) and acquire group (AGRP) parameters are initialized to 1 when power is applied
3. Erase selected memory group by simultaneously depressing both ND600 ERASEpushbuttons.
4. Select the Multichannel Scaling Mode.
a. Select Status Page 2.
b. Set the display cursor to the MODE parameter using the CRSRpushbutton.
c. Select the MCS mode using the NXTV pushbutton.
5. Select a dwell time per channel of 10 msec.
a. Set the display cursor to the TBASEparameter using the CRSRpushbutton.
b. Enter 1 at the operand pushbutton array and depress the ENTERpushbutton.
c. Set the display cursor to the TMULTparameter using the CRSRpushbutton.
d. Select a’time multiplier of 1OMSusing the NXTV pushbutton.
6. Select 10 recurrent passes.
a. Set the display cursor to the PTIMparameter using the CRSRpushbutton.
b. Enter 10 at the operand pushbutton array and depress the ENTERpushbutton.
7. Start data acquisition by depressing the ND600 ACQ pushbutton. The first multichannel scaling pass is initiated when the start pulse is applied. Upon completion of the first pass, the ND600 awaits the arrival of the next start pulse. Each subsequent pass is initiated when another start pulse is applied. The counts obtained on each subsequent pass are added to those stored in the selected memory group on the previous passes.
8. Observe and count the number of passes on the oscilloscope. When the last (10th) of the preset number of passes is completed, the ND600 will automatically stop acquiring y data. Set the CFS parameter (Status Page 1) to the desired viewing level using the CFS pushbutton and view the resultant spectrum on the display CRT.
4-19 second Sequential During
rate in varying
an The which the Data number of spectrum. NOTE:
for DATA Data The ground another spectrum in Page
Data subtraction
This FAGE AG ricE:’ PTI1 DOFF FLE’J FTCIT TEIASE TC1TL
sequential
one
external
7,500
list display
List R
of
resultant
is P E
subtraction
can
2)
subtraction
is
sequential
SUBTRACTION in memory
100 accomplished entry
is
at
ana
which spectrum
Mode
If
stored
samples
from
be
channel
stored 2261149
the
the
Listing
kHz.
This
cursor
digital
process
og
subtracted
memory
can
spectrum
operand
of
another ADC PlC
is
group,
inputs,
in
is 10
in 2 C C C
from 1
Acquisition 1
from
initialized be
per
analysis
listing,
to one,
memory
accomplished
computer a
removes
is
control
the
second
by
second.
locations,
a
previous used
and as C:’G T LT TMIJLT E:USY CT PATE
pushbutton
represents
from
etc.
It Ci
cleared
subtracting
AGRP PP GO
any
events
a
process
group.
then
to
led
so
the
to memory
a or
provides
The
channel
sample
cleared
permits
0, stored
by
parameter,
magnetic
transferring
identifying by i.e.,
memory
(words) C. C.
the
12—bit
is
array
prevents
the I
The
first OMS 000 CCC
a
performed.
group,
desired slowly
data
known 0 C C
precise 1
reaching ADC the
use
memory
subtraction
and acquiring
group
data from
tape.
first
of 4-20
can
entering
underflows
peaks. internal
this
there
then
varying
spectrum
t
spectrum
the words
amplitude
scaling
Display
channel
can
event
group
e
be
0
information
memory
depressing
terminates
ADC
is
the
used
be
operation
can
The minus
no
autostrobe
analog
or
is
passes.
background, used
of and
spectrum from
less
are
need to
stored
from
be
versus
preset
Status
as
identify
(—) observing
background.
stored
to
accepted
occurring
a
inputs,
the
to
acquisition
to
previously
is
buffer
and
remove
in
Counts
time
level
a
circuitry
re—acquire
Page accomplished
after
ENTER
channel
second
as
the
an
storing
the
digitization
12—bit whether
in
(PLEV
2
up
ten
when
background
unknown
full
acquire
and
conlunction
digitized
pushbutton.
accumulated
and
to
memory at
Since
zero, multichannel
scale
this
a it
digital a
subtracting resultant parameter,
prohibits
maximum
or each
nominal
by
group
spectrum.
information
the
the
not
is
of
group.
setting
data
from
8K.
time
words
back
slowly
with
the
1024
data
rate
restart.
a
Status
one
(- ______
SPECTRUM COMPARISON
Data stored in up to four memory groups can be overlapped and displayed either at fixed vertical displacements (stacked) or with a common baseline (superimposed) for spectral comparison. The procedure for overlapping two memory groups affixed vertical displace ment is as follows:
1. Select group 4 as the current display group (memory group to which another memory group is to be compared). a. Select Status Page 1. b. Set the display cursor to the DGRP parameter using the CRSRpushbutton. c. Enter 4 at the operand pushbutton array and depress the ENTERpushbutton.
2. Select group 3 as the overlap group (memory group to be displayed at fixed vertical displacement to the current display group). a. Set the display cursor to the first OGRP parameter (right hand column, top line). b. Enter 3 at the operand pushbutton array and depress the ENTERpushbutton.
3. Observe the two overlapped spectra at the display CRT. Display of the selected overlap group can be distinguished from the current display group as it has no visible markers or intensified regions.
_PAGE TOTL 185826 OGRP 3 AGRP 4 OGRP 0 GSIZ 512 OGRP 0 GRPS 4 DGRP 4 LFIRK 151 RFIRK 18? LCNT 3692 PONT 38?? LE 6O • 948 RE 745.552 CFS 16K
Display of Status Page 1 with 512 channel overlapped spectral data display of CoóO spectrum in overlap group 3 vertically displaced relative to Cs137 and Co60 composite spectrum in current display group 4.
NOTE: Overlapped display with a common baseline is selected by setting the display cursor to the DGRP parameter, entering minus (—)at the operand pushbutton array and then depressing the ENTERpushbutton. When overlapped display with a common baseline is selected, an is displayed following the DGRP parameter to indicate suppression of the display offset. Return to overlapped display at fixed vertical displacement is selected by setting the display cursor to the DGRP parameter, entering minus (—)at the operand push button array and then depressing the ENTERpushbutton. 4-21 4.
only
(right the ______
(total and NOTE: the
or
Data
SPECTRUM
‘as b. a. memory
1. c. 2.
CRSR a. b. _PAGE A’3RP E’CH
TCITL GGND AREA
FUHM PEAK
subtracted
markers the
overlap
Select
then
updated
Select
Select Set
Enter Select
Set
Enter
hand
stored
counts
pushbutton.
strip —.
group The
the
the
depress
673.250
4
Status column,
-1
in
95.408
185826 135720
group
group Status
factor.
—1 in
value 4.017 50106 1 display
when at
display
minus STRIPPING
from /
the /\______
at
is
one
as
the
to
the 4 3
the
Page
the 4
current
by
Page
displayed the the
background
memory
operand
be
second
as
cursor
operand cursor AREA
depressing
strip
AREA
the data
added/subtracted). E(0’ D/0 D.”J D/0 SF D’3RP
3
3.
and
display
current
factor.
to
line
group to BGND
in
pushbutton
for
BGND
observe
pushbutton ______
the
the
any
counts)
from —5.583 —1.000
the
the 0.000 0.990 0.000
group
can
DGRP
strip
display
pushbutton. other
The
minus D/O pushbutton
top).
the
4
be
factor between
array
and
minus
parameter
memory
array
multiplied
value
parameter
group
(—)
4-22
This
the
and
(SF)
pushbutton
(—)
Display spectrum displaced overlapped
composite
and
displayed
is
overlap
the
value
(memory
group.
depress specifies
depressed.
parameter
depress
using
by
markers
can
of is
a
in
group.
be
relative
the
selected
spectrum The
the
the
at
group Status
for
spectral
overlap
the
subtractive
changed
the
in
ratio
CRSR (Status the
ENTER procedure
ENTER
the
to/from
operand
Page
The
first
to
strip
of
in
data
group
current
pushbutton.
Cs137
Page
pushbutton.
to
D/O
gross
current
3
D/O
pushbutton.
stripping
factor
with
the
display which
is
pushbutton
3
3)
as
parameters
counts
display and
vertically
parameter
ratio
512
Using
follows:
display
and
another
CoóO
of
with
of channel
between
added
the CoóO
group
net
array
group
one
are
counts
to
and
(1)
4. ( 0..
4.
the
data strip 3.
pus
NOTE: _PAGE _PAGE PEAK AGRP FWHM E/CH BGND AREA AI3RP TOTL CFS I3RPS LE LCNT ‘351Z TUTL LMRK
hbutton
STRP/PLOT
Select Enter
stored
factor
Subtractive
3 600.948
array.
the
or
in 185826 132116
at 0.000 4.017 0.000 3632
by current
the 512
right 16K 1
pushbutton. 5
0 entering 0 4 4 3 4 1 1
operand <<
spectrum
(>>)
display SF D D/0 E<0) DGRP D/0 RCNT OGRP RE D’3RP OGRP OGRP PFIRK /0
a
direction
pushbutton
minus
Data ______
stripping group 745.552 —5.583 —1 0.000 0.000 0.000
stored 387? (—)
• 000 1
4.
using 87 4 0 0 3 4
and
array
can
in
4-23
then
the
either
strip
to
group spectrum
SHIFT subtracting
Display overlapped
spectrum overlapped displayed Display
group composite
select
the
group
be
strip
3
pushbutton. specified
4.
group
from
of
of
3
in
group
in
is
relative
spectrum
Status
Status
spectral
current CoóO
spectral
overlap
multiplied
Cs
3
as
137
number
by
spectrum
Page
Page
the
to
entering
and display
data
in
group data
Cs137
strip
current 3
by 1 at
CoóO
with
with
display
display
the
—1
3
in
group
group
a
and
vertically
overlap
composite
and
512
operand negative 512
display
CoóO
after
and of
4.
added
channel
channel
Co60
depress
(strip)
(—)
to
the
region,
respectively,
9.
region, to
respectively,
left NOTE:
8.
number
pushbutton.
7.
MSPN 6.
the
channel
4.
channel 5. REGION
number
be
current
marker 3.
2.
follows:
last selected
A
interest,
1.
facilitate
specific
1
desired
limit.
If
If
channels
Depress
Hold
Depress
Hold
Depress
Depress
Select
and
the
the
pushbuttons,
of
channel
depress
depress
display
of
After
number
number
region
the
OF
totalized
the
the
channels
right
left channels
region
region
Status
the
the
the
the
the
channel
and
INTEREST
and
of
MSPN
the MPOS
marker
the
the
group.
marker
numbers.
(RMRK of
(LMRK
fine
the
SHIFT
SHIFT
SHIFT
RST/ADV
depress
depress
desired
of
of
Page
interest
SHIFT and/or
SHIFT
to
the
in
current
pushbutton
pushbutton
adjustment
interest
interest,
marker
be
is
the
pushbutton
is
pushbutton
parameter).
pushbutton
parameter).
XPND
1.
positioned
SELECTION,
contained
the
positioned
the
region
pushbutton
pushbutton
current
The
readout.
pushbutton
can
display
can
of
MSPN
MPOS
release
pushbutton
channel
then
the
depressed
depressed
of
of
be
display
to
to
to
the
to
interest
right
group.
in
to
until be
selected
pushbutton
When
When
A
select
to
select
to
select
the
to
the
the
left
the
specific
number
entered
INTENSIFICATION,
select
select
4-24
position
marker
the
group
left
may
and
and
MPOS
desired
its
the
left
and
is
the
the
the
Observe
using
right
coarsely
channel
or
observe
observe
the be
the
left
of
or
right
region
as
left
right
until
right
minus
(RMRK)
right
pushbutton.
the
depressed
the
right
region
one
right
right
the
marker
marker
(<<
the
limits
the
(>>)
(>>)
left
left
of
one
number
the
of
the
of
bracketed
MPOS
of
(>>)
(>>)
status
parameter
left
of
)
the the
the
and
marker
the
status
status
coincides
coincides
or
direction.
in
direction.
direction.
to
interest,
display
TOTALIZATION
multiple
left
marker
the
steps
right
right
and
is
expand
or
or
dkplay
display
approximately
display
using
(LMRK
last
limit
left
left
MSPN
8
markers
limit
should
with
with
coincides
can
and
release
channel
(<<
(<<)
assigned
the
of
of
the
of
of
parameter)
of
be
pushbuttons.
9.
the
the
the
the
bracketed
be
the
MPOS
)
the
the at
direction,
selected
direction,
the
desired
left
right
left
equal
in
the
with
right
regions
left
equal
desired
AND
the
MSPN
and
and limit
first
limit.
marker
the
should
to
marker
region
as
READOUT
to
right
and
of
the
of
The
the C; PAGE 1 TOTL 719044 OGRF C AGRP 1 OGRF C i3f:IZ 1024 OGRP C GPPS 2 DGP.P LFIPK 297 RMRK 367 LCNT 3075 RCNT 2987 LE 297.000 RE 367.000 CFS 64K
: Display of Status Page 1 and 1024 channel Cs137 and CoóO composite spectrum after positioning left and right markers at the left and right limits of Cs137 photopeak, respectively.
NOTE: The left and right markers can be set directly to any specified channel or energy value by positioning the display cursor to the respective marker channel (LMRKor RMRK parameter) or marker energy (LEand REparameters), entering the desired channel number or energy value at the operand pushbutton array, and then depressing the ENTEP,,ishbutton. ,1 The selected region of interest can be entered as one of the multiple assigned regions of interest as follows:
1. Depress the SHIFTpushbutton to select the right (>>) direction.
2. Depress the INT/tEL pushbutton. This intensifies the display of the channels within the selected region of interest (between the markers), assigning the channels as a region of interest. The channels will remain assigned as a region (intensified) even though the markers are subsequently moved.
• PAGE 1 TCJTL 719044 OGRP C AGRP 1 OGRP C GSIZ 1024 UGRP C GRPS 2 DGP.P 1 LMRK 297 _RMRK 367 LC:NT 3075 RCNT 2987 LE 297.000 RE 367.000 • CFS 64K
Display of Status Page 1 and 1024 channel Csl 37 and CoóO composite spectrum after selecting and intensifying the first region of interest (Cs137 photopeak).
4-25
NOTE:
the
of
2.
bracketed
FWHM area
as
(<<) The
half
in
markers
pushbutton.
pushbutton, selecting
of
SHIFT Cs137
Display
1.
SHIFT
markers,
lNT/tEL
3.
interest
each
markers
interest
CF
LE
L 6
L 13S
T
AG PAGE
full
total
CNT
PP
MR
CIT
Depress
Select
maximum
To
(total
S
P
I
direction,
pushbutton S
K Z
L
pushbutton
F
and
cid
remove
width
region
are
of
AREA
depress
counts
pushbutton.
and
by
currently
are
CoóO
Status
(first
counts
551
PEAK
Status
displayed
or
2C8472
the
the
at
intensifying
amplitude
+
advanced
1447
1
sequentially
is
the
64
551 Fi24
CoóO
AREA
BGND
in
composite
depressing
half
the
quickly
markers
Page
parameters
to
to
Page
minus
:
the
intensified
bracketed
select
select
SHIFT
maximum
for
photopeak).
BGND
The
channels 1
3.
P
RE
C: o
P
Ci
Ci
background
to
and
and
CNT
i
6
6 6
6FF
determined the
can
TOTL
the
PP
F
P PP
the spectrum
the
markers
each
K:
pushbutton F
the
advanced
to
the
1024
TOTL
be
pushbutton.
second
channels
by
right
left
amplitude
reflect
RST/ADV
if
621
within
obtained
peak
assigned
the
acquisition
channel
(<<) can
parameter
counts),
after
(>>)
CCC
947
621
by
region
to
markers.
channel
to
the
C C
C
the
be
from
depressing
bracket
direction
select
and
region
pushbutton
4-26
as
set
direction
net
This
region
follows:
the
the
the
is
(Status to
total
energy
updates
the
not
of selecting
Cs137
Display
in bracket display,
any
background
peak
of
and
the
interest
ascending
C:FS
LE
LCNT
LMRK
AGRP TC1TL
FAi3E
3PFS
left
3812
counts
in
and
single
and
interest
Page
within
progress
SHIFT
and
channel
then
the
(<<)
then
of
all
observing
bracket
and
1,
(net
CoóO
(second
Status
region
display
E.32CC0
depressing
regions
the
counts,
currently
162487
pushbutton
depressing
2,
energy
direction
intensifying
and
1C24
energy
area),
64K
537
632
region or
composite
the
Page
by
2
I
1
the
CoóO
the
of
3).
by
sequence.
the
depressing
channels
the
background
bracketed
within
the
depressing
TOTL
markers
1
_RMRK
of
and
the
The
to
RE
PONT
06FF
OGRP
OGRP 06FF
full—width
photopeok).
and
AREA,
the
interest
RST/ADV
spectrum
select
depress
RST/ADV
total
parameter
1024
the
third
with
are
the
The
7C2.CCC
by
BGND,
region
the
the
counts
counts,
channel
not
the
at
the
region
the
after
net
653
7C2
left
moved.
C
C C
1 C ______
• PAGE _E/CH 1 . E (0) 0.000 AG P F’ D / CI 0.000 AREA 506769 CI., 0 0.000 E:GHC’ 212275 Cl/Cl 0.000 T CITL 719044 CIGP F’ F (.IHM 23. 774 S F 1 - 000 FE A K 335. oee
Display of Status Page 3 and 1024 channel Cs 137 and Co60 composite spectrum showing area, background, FWHMand peak energy of first intensified region (Cs 137 photopeak).
3. To update the status display to reflect the net total counts (AREAparameter), the background counts (BGND parameter), the full width at half maximumamplitude (FWHM parameter) and the peak channel energy (PEAKparameter) in the next sequential region (if more than one is assigned), depress the SHIFTpushbutton to select the left (<< ) direction, depress the RST/ADVpushbutton to advance the markers to the next sequential region and then depress the AREABGND pushbutton to update the display of the AREA, BGND, FWHMand PEAKparameters to reflect the net area, background, FWHMand peak energy within the region bracketed by the markers.
• PAGE _E/CH 1.000 E(0) AGRP I 0v0 0.000 AREA 121917 0/0 0.000 E:GND 6555 C-U TCITL 208472 C’GRP 1 FWHr1 35.661 SF 1.000 PEAK 587. 000
Display of Status Page 3 and 1024 channel Cs 137 and CoóO composite spectrum showing area, background, FWHMand peak energy of second intensified region (first CoóO photopeak).
The region of interest bracketed by the markers can be readout as follows:
1. Select Status Page 4. 4-27 2. Select the input/output device, mode and data for 101 as follows:
NOTE: If 102 is desired, substitute 102 for 101 in the following steps. a. Set the display cursor to the 101 parameter using the CRSRpushbutton and depress NXTV pushbutton to select desired input/output device code (TTYfor Teletype, MAGT for 7 or 9—trackmagnetic tape, LP for line printer or PT for high speed paper tape punch). b. Set the display cursor to the 10 1/MODE parameter using the CRSRpushbutton and depress NXTV pushbutton to select BCDO (BCDformatted output) or BINO (binary formatted output) as desired. c. Set the display cursor to the lol/bATA parameter using the CRSRpushbutton and depress NXTV pushbutton to select MRKS(Content of channels between the markers).
NOTE: The content of channels in each region (if more than one is assigned) or the total counts in the channels in each region can be selected by setting the lol/bATA parameter to ROl or TOT, respectively.
3. Depress the 101 pushbutton. The content of each channel in the region of interest bracketed by the markers is readout to the I/O device specified for 101.
DISPLAY EXPANSION AND POSITIONING
Display expansion is useful to permit closer examination of narrow spectral peaks such as encountered in spectra acquired using a solid state detector. It also helps in visually resolving multiple peaks of similar energies and in precisely setting regions of interest for peak integration and peak data readout.
ND600 provides two flexible methods of expanding selected segments of the spectral data display. One method uses the MPOS and MSPN pushbuttons to bracket the desired segment and the XPND pushbutton to expand the selected segment to horizontal full scale.
1. Using the MPOS and MSPN pushbuttons, bracket a desired segment of the display.
_FRI3E 1 TOTL 202337 QGRF C RGRF 1 CIGRF C I3SIZ 1024 OGRP C 13RPS 2 C’3RF 1 LMRK 302 RF1RK 36E. .LCNT 93 RCNT 9:E, LE 302.000 RE 3E..000 C:FS 16K
1024 channel display of Cs137 and CoóO composite spectrum after positioning the left and right markers at the left and right limits ji of the Csl 37 photopeak, respectively. 4-28
peak,
and
composite
right
1024
2.
WIDTH
full
across
XPND
The 3.
The 1. _PAGE AGRP TOTL GRPS GSIZ LCNT LMRK CFS LE GSIZ AGRP TOTL CFS LMRK GRPS LE
LCNT
right
other
scale
display
Depress
Depress
Return
channel
markers
respectively.
the pushbutton
......
pushbutton
limits
spectrum
and method entire 302.000 302.000
202337 the
202337
can
the
the
positioned display 1024
1024 the 893 302 32K 302
893 of
16K
expanded
be
XPND
SHIFT display 2 1 1 2 1
1
uses
the
a
MOTN
depressed
with expanded
<<
second
of
Cs137 the OGRP OGRP RMRK DGRP OGRP RCNT
RE pushbutton OGRP OGRP OGRP RMRK RE DGRP
RCNT
pushbutton
Cs137
at
the
group.
display
pushbutton
WDTH
the
time.
left photo—
......
until
to
and left 366.000
366000
display
and
pushbutton
to
the
to
to CoóO 366
986 normal 366
986
select
to expand 0
0 0 desired 1 Li 0 0
1
position
as
4-29
few
(display
the
to
the
degree
as
expand
photopeak.
right
Full
pushbutton.
photopeak Expanded
has
the
bracketed two _PA6E LNRK GRPS GSIZ AGRP LCNT TQTL
CFS LE
of
caused
scale
expanded
(>>)
of
channels
the
the
display
horizontal
display
full
display
to direction
302.000
the segment
202337
Note
move
segment group)
1024
full
marker expansion 302 893
32K after 2 1
1
to
that
scale.
off
to
and
expansion
as
by
bracketed
horizontal
in
the
depressing
display few RMRK OGRP DGRP OGRP OGRP RCNT
RE
depressing
then
either
is
display.
as
attained.
hold
two
of
expansion direction
366.000
Cs137
full
Cs137
WIDTH
the
channels the 366
986 scale. Li Li Li 1 pushbutton
2.
across segment direction display of selected
4. select for 3.
pushbutton.
Both independently, SCROLL markers
of The channels, select up contents
and can (Status _PAGE AGRP GRPS GSIZ LMRK TOTL LE LCNT CFS
the
the
totalization
to
Depress
Closely
Scroll Return
region
also
methods
the
CRT
a 12
spectrum.
another
group.
Page is
for
specific by
is of
consecutive be
face
DISPLAY
brought 302000
to
starting
Display
selected 202337
the the
totals precise
the
the
selected. examine
4).
select
allow 1024
of 893 302 32K
portion
Depressing display SHIFT
or
or
channels
MOTN
region 2 1 1
the
are
The
The
readout
into
concurrently,
with
region mode
close
an
by
the CRT
intensified
changing. pushbutton,
numeric
procedure
view.
of OGRP DGRP QGRP OGRP RCNT RMRK RE
to expanded
the Scroll
pushbutton of
the
provides
in
expanded
examination
the
normal
to
of
the using interest.
SHIFT
up
left
select
interest
spectrum
display
Depressing
MOTN
to
display 366.000
marker
the
such
regions
for
segment
(display
Spectral
six
pushbutton,
static
moves
depressed
display
an 366 986
markers.
selecting
The
selection.
consecutive
mode
as 0 0 0
pushbutton of
expanded
or
is
channel.
CRT
which using
selected the
any
periodically
during
the of
to
data
4-30
to
data
the
the
expanded
display
until segment
MOTN
visually
the
moves photopeak Expanded
on
are
display
full
left
data segment
is
when
expanded
intensified region
scroll It
the
selected
within
also
group) on
of
the
pushbutton
acquisition of
updated
desired resolve
display
simultaneous
the
the
the
display
display
the
of
expanded
provides
to
into
to
the
left
numeric
by
interest
display current
the by
bring spectrum
regions
view.
segment any current
as depressing
to
the
(<<)
right
after mode
when
the
when
the
numeric
the
multiple
display
lOl/IDATA
to display
can
contents
with
or
on markers
right
depressing
direction and
marker
expanded is position
the
of
channel
the
then
the
as
the scroll
the
can
right
display
to across
follows:
group.
peaks
count
current
of
be
defined
are expanded XPND the
be
the parameter
is up
display contents
(>>)
defined
Cs137
the
moved the
used
left totals or
of
to
to
MOTN
the
face
56
portion
in
to
(
) ______
1. Select the desired display group for scroll display as follows: a. Select Status Page 1. b. Set the display cursor to the DGRP parameter using the CRSRpushbutton. c. Enter the desired display group number at the operand pushbutton array and depress the ENTERpushbutton.
2. Select up to 56 marker channels, the channels within up to six consecutive intensified regions within the marker defined portion of the spectrum, or the count totals in up to 12 consecutive intensified regions within the marker defined portion of the spectrum for scoll display as follows: a. Select Status Page 4. b. Set the display cursor to the lO1/tATA parameter using the CRSRpushbutton. c. Depress the NXTV pushbutton to select MRKS, ROl or TOT as desired. MRKRspecifies up to 56 marker channels, ROI specifies the region channels and TOT specifies the region totals.
3. Depress the SCRLpushbutton. This provides display of the numeric contents of either the marker channels, region channels or region totals as selected for the IC 1/DATA parameter.
4. If spectral data display simultaneous with scroll display of numeric data is desired, momentarily depress the WIDTHpushbutton.
5. Depress the SCRLpushbutton a second time to terminate the scroll display and return to normal display.
@632 829 79.3 782 823 748 776 722 781 720 711 701 749 770 762 693 750 728 68? 734 693 738 696 747 790 750 789 924 2503 12839 13777 1937 666 638 649 637 641 642 646 616 644 627 628 648 603 619 632 625 648 630 666 620 556 609 589 604 647
Scroll display of the numeric contents of the first 56 channels within the current marker defined portion of the spectrum. The number I L______. preceded by @ is the left marker channel number.
4-31 ______
@632 @658 924 2503 12839 13777 1937 666 @664 @830 761 893 2011 8190 11219 2744 668 837 ‘1 1111 522 718 1794 4278 3216 796 370 @1118 @1168 453 746 2380 9515 17767 8442 896 230 @1176 @1195 Scroll display of the numeric contents of four intensified regions within the current marker defined portion of the spectrum. The numbers preceded by @ are channel numbers (left marker, first and last channel of each region, right marker).
@632 32646 @664 1830 26486 @837 @1111 11694 @1118 @1168 40429 @1176 @1195
Scroll display of the total counts in four intensified regions within the current marker defined portion of the spectrum. The numbers preceded by @ are channel numbers (left marker, I right L______first and last channel of each region, marker).
AUTOMATIC ENERGY CALIBRATION
The built—inenergy calibrate function permits precise calibration of any acquired gamma energy spectrum over any energy scale. The system is initially calibrated at 1 keV per channel and automatically computes and displays the energy values of the marker channels. Thus, by selectively positioning the markers, the energy value of any peak or channel can be read directly from the display.
NOTE: The energy calibration function may be used for any calibration units, i .e, energy, time, mass, wavelength, etc.
The calibrated energy scale is based upon the known energy values for two known reference energy peaks. The known energy can be obtained from a calibration source such as Cs137 acquired before or concurrent with the unknown spectrum.
Cal ibration of the system for any energy scale can be performed either by selecting the energy calibrate mode or by changing the values of the E/CH and E(O)calibration parameters (Status Page 3). The energy calibrate mode is selected by depressing the 4-32 ECALpushbutton. In this mode, calibration is performed by positioning the left and right markers at the known low and high reference energy peaks in the spectrum and then entering the known energy values for the LE and REparameters (Status Page 1), respectively. After entry of the two known reference energies, the system computes the energy per channel (slope) and zero energy intercept (offset) and updates the display of the E/CH and E (0) parameters (Status Page 3) to the respective computed values.
The following is a procedure for energy calibration. This procedure assumes that a spectrum with several identifiable peaks has been acquired using Nuclear Spectroscopic Standards (in this case, Cs137 and Co60) and that the detector, amplifier and ADC are accurate and linear over the observed energy range. In this procedure, the 661 .2 keV photopeak of Cs137 and the 1332 keV photopeak of Co60 will be used as the low and high energy reference peaks, respectively.
1. Select Status Page 1. -
2. Using the MPOS and MSPN pushbuttons, position the left number at the low energy reference peak (661.2 keV) and the right marker at the high energy reference peak (1332 keV).
3. Depress the ECALpushbutton. This causes the system to enter the energy calibrate mode as indicated by the character “E” being flashed on the display.
4. Set the display cursor to select the LEparameter using the CRSRpushbutton.
5. Enter the low energy reference value (661.2) at the operand pushbutton array and then depress the ENTERpushbutton.
6. Set the display cursor to select the REparameter using the CRSRpushbutton.
7. Enter the high energy reference value (1332) at the operand pushbutton array and then depress the ENTERpushbutton.
PAGE 1 -: E T’JTL 26G652 D’3RP El AI3RF 1 ‘:“3RP El 3S I 2Ei4R 013F:P 0 GRF3 1 [:I3P I LMRK 661 Pi1PI:. 1332 LCHT 1E”316 RI::[-IT 5993 LE 661 2190 _F:E 1332’9’30 CFS 32k
Display of Status Page 1 and 2048 channel Cs137 and CoóO composite spectrum after positioning the left and right markers at the respective low and high energy reference peaks and then entering the low (661.2 keV) and = high (1332 keV) energy reference values for — the LEand REparameters, respectively.
4-33 ______
8. Depress the ECALpushbutton again. This exits the energy calibrate mode as indicated by removal of the flashing “E” from the display, computes the energy per channel (slope) and the zero energy intercept (offset) and updates the display of the E/CH and E (0) parameters (Status Page 3) to the respective computed values.
FAGE 3 E-’CH 1.000 E(IJ) 0397 1 DCI 0.000 AREA 0 t..’: 0.000 E:13N[: 0 [:1:1 U. 000 TOTL 2613652 DI3RP 1 FWR[1 0.000 SF 0.000 PEAK 0.000
Display of Status Page 3 showing the values computed for the E/CH and E (0) parameters after performing the energy calibration procedure.
NOTE: Although the display of the E/CH and E(O)parameter only shows three digits below t e decima points, t e system internally maintains seven significant digits above and below the decimal point.
9. By positioning the left or right marker to any channel in the spectrum, the energy value of that channel is computed and displayed as a Page 1 Status Parameter (LEfor the left marker and REfor the right marker). The energy values computed are displayed in the energy units of the energy reference values entered. For example, if the energy reference values entered ore in keV as they were in the above procedure (661 .2 keV and 1332 keV), the values for the LEand REparameter (Status Page 1) and the E/CH and E (0) parameters (Status Page 3) are displayed in keV. The energy values computed for the left and right markers are also adjusted for the digital offset selected for the DOFF parameter (Status Page 2), i.e. the digital offset is added to the respective marker channel number prior to computing its energy value.
NOTE: The left or right marker can be positioned to any channel either by using the MPOS and MSPN pushbuttons or by setting the display cursor to select either the LMRKor RMRK parameter (Status Page 1), entering the desired channel number at the operand pushbutton array and then depressing the ENTERpushbutton. The left or right marker can also be positioned to any energy value by setting the display cursor to select either the LEor RE parameter (Status Page 1), entering the desired energy value at the operand pushbutton array and then depressing the ENTERpushbutton.
The microcomputer logic automatically computes the energy per channel (slope) and the zero energy intercept (offset) based upon the values entered for the low and high energy reference peaks. The formula for calculation of the slope is as follows: 4-34 ___
= E2-El E/CH LX X2-Xl where = E/CH = energy per channel (slope) El = energy value entered for the low energy reference peak (LEparameter) E2 = energy value entered for the high energy reference peak (REparameter) Xl = channel number of the left marker (LMRKparameter) X2 = channel number of the right marker (RMRKparameter)
The formula for calculation of the offset is as follows:
E (0) = E2-E/CH (X2 + D)
where E (0) = zero energy intercept (offset), i.e., energy at channel zero. E2 = energy value entered for the high energy reference peak (REparameter) E/CH = energy per channel (slope) calculated above X2 = channel number of the right marker (RMRKparameter) D = digital offset selected for the DOFF parameter (Status Page 2)
The formula for calculation of the left or right marker channel energy (LEor REparameter) is as follows:
E = (X+D) (E/CH) + E (0)
where E = energy calculated for the LEor REparameter X = channel number of the left or right marker D = digital offset selected for the DOFF parameter (Status Page 2) E/CH = energy per channel (slope) calculated above E (0) = zero energy intercept (offset) calculated above
AUTO JOB
The Auto Job routine permits entry and execution of up to eight separate operations which can be automatically repeated from 1 to 65,535 times. Operations which can be included in the sequence are ERASE,acquire (ACR), spectrum strip (STRP), PLOT, next group (NXTG), the operational functions (Fl, F2, F3, F4) or the input/output operations (101, 102). The auto group, strip factor, work group, the operational functions, erase, acquire, spectrum strip, plot, next group and input/output operations, and the preset number-of auto job cycles are entered using the NXTV pushbutton or via the operand pushbutton array and displayed as status parameters (Status Page 4). Execution of an auto job sequence is accomplished by depressing the AUTO pushbutton. During auto job, the system automatically displays the preset number of cycles remaining. A typical procedure for set—upand execution of an auto job sequence is as follows:
1. Select a group size of 1024 channels.
a. Select Status Page 1.
b. Set the display cursor to the GSIZ parameter using the CRSRpushbutton. 4—35 ______
_PFIOE 4 Display of Status Page 4 showing auto job set—upparameters. c. Enter 1024 at the operand pushbutton array and then depress the ENTERpushbutton. This select two groups of 1024 channels each for a basic system memory of 2048 channels. 2. Acquire the work group spectrum in group 2 for a preset live time of 600 seconds. This spectrum will be multiplied by —0.1and added to the spectrum in auto group 1 when the strip operation (STEP3) is performed in the auto lob sequence. NOTE: This spectrum could represent the ambient background radiation in the absence of samples acquired at 10 times the counting time for each sample (600 seconds versus 60 seconds which will be used for auto job). a. Select Status Page 2. b. Set the display cursor to the MODE parameter using the CRSRpushbutton. c. Depress the N XTV pushbutton to select PHAL. d. Set the display cursor to the AGRP parameter using the CRSRpushbutton. e. Depress the NXTV pushbutton to select 2 as the acquire group number. f. Set the display cursor to the DGRP parameter using the CRSRpushbutton. g. Depress the NXTV pushbutton to select group 2 as the display group number. h. S the display cursor to the TMULTparameter using the CRSRpushbutton. i. Depress the NXTV pushbutton to select 15 (one second). . Set the display cursor to the PTIM parameter using the CRSRpushbutton. k. Enter the preset time (in this case, 600) at the operand pushbutton array and then depress the ENTERpushbutton. 4-36 I. Depress the ACQ pushbutton to acquire a spectrum in group 2 for a preset live time of 600 seconds. Upon completion of 600 seconds (live time) acquisition automatically terminates. m. Upon completion of acquisition in group 2, select a preset live time of 60 seconds for the auto job acquire (ACR)operation by entering 60 at the opercrid pushbutton array and then depressing the ENTERpushbutton. 3. Select Status Page 4. 4. Set the display cursor to the CYCLESparameter using the CRSRpushbutton. 5. Enter the number of auto job cycles (in this case, 50) at the operand pushbutton array and depress the ENTERpushbutton. 6. Set the display cursor to the STEP1 parameter using the CRSRpushbutton. 7. Depress the NXTV pushbutton to select the operations to be performed for step 1 of the auto lob sequence (in this case, ERASE). 8. Set the display cursor to the STEP2 parameter using the CRSRpushbutton. 9. Depress the NXTV pushbutton to select the operation to be performed for step 2 of the auto job sequence (in this case, ACR). NOTE: Data acquisition during auto job is performed in the mode currently selected for the MODE parameter (Status Page 2). 10. Set the display cursor to the STEP3 parameter using the CRSRpushbutton. 11. Depress the NXTV pushbutton to select the operation to be performed for step 3 of the auto job sequence (in this case, STRP). 12.. Set the display cursor to the STEP4 parameter using the CRSRpushbutton. 13. Depress the NXTV pushbutton to select the operation to be performed for step 4 of the auto job sequence (in this case, 102). 14. Set the display cursor to the STEP5 parameter using the CRSRpushbutton. 15. Depress the NXTV pushbutton to select the operation to be performed for step 5 of the auto job sequence (in this case, F2). 16. Set the display cursor to the STEP6 parameter using the CRSRpushbutton. 17. Depress the NXTV pushbutton to select the operation to be performed for step 6 of the auto job sequence (in this case, 101). NOTE: No operations are to be performed for step 7 and 8 of the auto job sequence, therefore the STEP7 and STEP8 parameters are left blank. 18. Set the display cursor to the AUTG parameter using the CRSRpushbutton. 4-37 19. Enter the auto group number (in this case, 1) at the operand pushbutton array and then depress the ENTERpushbutton. NOTE: The auto group is the group in which all input/output and data processing operations of the auto job sequence are performed. The auto group can be entered prior to executing ( the auto job sequence, irregardless of the current status page, by entering the desired group V number at the operand pushbutton array and then depressing the AUTO pushbutton. The auto group can also be incremented by one during execution of the auto job sequence by entering NXTG as an operation in the sequence. 20. Select peak search intensify (PSINT) as the operational function for F2. a. Set the display cursor to the F2 parameter using the CRSRpushbutton. b. Enter the function select code for PSINT (in this case, 502) at the operand pushbutton array and depress the ENTERpushbutton. 21 . - Select readout of totals in BCDformat to the Teletype for 101. a. Set the display cursor to the 101 parameter using the CRSRpushbutton. b. Depress the NXTV pushbutton to select TTY. c. Set the display cursor to the 10 1/MODE parameter using the CRSRpushbutton. d. Depress the NXTV pushbutton to select BCDO. e. Set the display cursor to the 101/1DATAparameter using the CRSRpushbutton. f. Depress the NXTV pushbutton to select TOT. 22. Select readout of all data in binary format to magnetic tape for 102. a. Set the display cursor to the 102 parameter using the CRSRpushbutton. b. Deprss the NXTV pushbutton to select MAGT. c. Set the display cursor to the 102/MODE parameter using the CRSRpushbutton. d. Depress the NXTV pushbutton to select BIN0. e. Set the display cursor to the 102/DATA parameter using the CRSRpushbutton. f. Depress the NXTV pushbutton to select ALL. 23. Set the display cursor to the SF parameter using the CRSRpushbutton. 24. Enter the strip factor (in this case, —0.1)at the operand pushbutton array and then depress the ENTERpushbutton. 25. Set the display cursor to the WGRP parameter using the CRSRpushbutton. 4-38 describes operating X—Y Refer i.e. described Set—up The the require g. f. PLOTTER NOTE: and e. d. Plotter b. of 29. a. of c. in at 28. operand group and 27. group then 26. group the any auto system ND600 printing depressing all Plotter depress to Acquire Repeat Perform Readout Erase Depress Readout Multiply Set Set Enter 1 50th 1 time and before that job Chapter power as (which pushbutton The 1 its characteristics. prior the the to in the READOUT Spectrum sequence, operations is is by auto the the use input/output the the order steps obtain capable display display normal a properly the the the for is acquire depressing the to the is work with peak corresponding peak Il on EN group the also a AUTO total spectrum for a ENTER for spectrum array TER and preset to a Storage the operation group search cursor normal cursor search of interconnection auto and the this background group interconnected 1. f counts pushbutton. all 50 driving HP7O41A pushbutton. and and the pushbutton. auto automatically live auto job number controls in times. to to on stored report for procedure operating depressing STOP functional auto input/output in the the time automatically group) can the job auto several each corrected AGRP DGRP X—Y in spectrum (in group at be sequence pushbutton. are of job work the The for to and this performed. 60 intensified procedure. has set Plotter. the types operations repeat the 4-39 by parameter parameter display 1 seconds Teletype. system the case, group been to to interfaces ENTER entering spectrum. in ND600, to terminates. of initial magnetic X—Y auto the be performed X—Y 2) 2 It will during region in performed Therefore, by pushbutton. specified Plotter These is sequence using using cit group group position. 1 set—up first and Plotters. now 0.1 the at tape. auto of the the procedures the firmware Auto operand necessary and perform 1, Instruction to 1. auto for in 50 CRSR CRSR lob as intensifying verify operand the add They job this The described. point times. group by calibration the pushbutton it pushbutton pushbutton options can following auto proper entering to further assume to plotting Manual pushbutton following ito calibrate be the Upon job each terminated be system the spectrum the assume sequence 1 procedure completion for procedure array included and and and at Teletype. peak Initial sequence the array its the operation, select select inked. the and X—Y region stored System in is Calibration Procedure 1. Set controls at the 7041A X—YPlotter as follows: a. Set the NULL DETECTORON/OFF switch to ON. b. Set the NULL DETECTORRECORDERswitch to NO MUTE. c. Set the NULL DETECTORPLOT RATEswitch to EXT. d. Set the LINE switch to ON. e. Place a sheet of 8.5 —in.x il—in, or il—in. x i7—in. plotter paper (as desired) on the X—YPlotter. f. When the sheet is properly aligned, set the CHARTswitch to HOLD. g. Set the SCALEswitch to 8.5 x 11 or ii x 17 according to the plotter paper size being used. h. Set the PEN switch to LIFT. 2. Select the display group to be plotted as follows: a. Select Status Page 1. b. Set the display cursor to the DGRP parameter using the CRSRpushbutton. c. Enter the desired display group number at the operand pushbutton array and depress the ENTERpushbutton. 3. Depress the SHIFTpushbutton to select the left (<<) direction. 4. Depress the minus (—)pushbutton at the operand pushbutton array and then depress the STRP/PLOTpushbutton. This alternately supplies (0,0) and full scale X,Y calibration voltages to the X—YPlotter. 5. Adjust the plotter X and Y ZERO SETand SENSITIVITYcontrols to position the pen cartridge at the desired (0,0) and full scale X,Y points on the recorder paper, respectively. 6. Repeat step 5 as often as necessary to attain satisfactory calibration. When satisfactory calibration is attained, depress the STRP/1’LOTpushbutton again, or depress the STOP pushbutton. Readout Procedure 1. Repeat step 2 of the Calibration Procedure to select the display group to be plotted. EZI 2. Select the desired Status Page to be plotted with the spectral data in the current display group. If no alphanumeric status data is to be plotted, select Status Page 0. 4-40 NOTE: The numeric scroll display specified for the lOl/bATA parameter (Status Page 4) maybe selected for plotting by depressing the SCRLpushbutton. Plots of both the numeric scroll display and the spectral data in the current display group can be attained by momentarily depressing the WIDTHpushbutton after depressing the SCRLpushbutton. 3. Depress the SHIFTpushbutton to select the left (<<) direction. 4. Depress the STRP/PLOTpushbutton. The current alphanumeric parameter display (current status page or scroll display) and the current spectral data display are plotted at the X—YPlotter. Output to the X—Yplotter can be terminated at any time by depressing the STRPA’LOTpushbutton a second time. NOTE: During plotter readout of spectral data, a marker is displayed at the channel currently being plotted. STATUS DISPLAY INPUT/OUTPUT Up to 36 characters of user selected information can be entered at the operand pushbutton array and displayed on any of the eight available status pages. The 36 characters can be any special parameter data which can be defined using the number (0—9)and special character (/1 , +1 —, ., or &)pushbuttons of the operand pushbutton array and the ENTER pushbutton to specify a space, such as a date, time, or other numerical information the user desires to identify or label a particular experiment. The procedure for entry of information from the operand pushbutton array is as follows: 1. Select Status Page 4. 2. Set the display cursor to the 101 parameter using the CRSRpushbutton. 3. Depress the ENTERpushbutton to “blank” the parameter value for 101, i.e. to select the ND600 Terminal operand pushbutton array/CRT display as the input/output device for 101. 4. Set the display cursor to the 10 1/MODE parameter using the CRSRpushbutton. 5. Depress the NXTV pushbutton to select BCDI. 6. Set the display cursor to the lOl/bATA parameter using the CRSRpushbutton. 7. Depress the NXTV pushbutton to select STAT. 8. Select the Status Page on which the information entered iS to be displayed (in this case, Status Page 4). 9. Depress the 101 pushbutton. This selects the BCDreadin mode to the CRTstatus display from the operand pushbutton array. This mode is indicated by a colon (:) and a caret (< ) being flashed on the display in the two lines below the last line of alphanumeric data contained on the selected status page. After entry into this mode any sequence of pushbutton characters available on the operand pushbutton array maybe entered using the ENTER 4-41 4. 5. 2. 3. channel information The the 1. plot the starting pushbutton pushbutton. entered such readout operand NOTE: 36 lines. 10/30/76< 10/30/76: AGRP STEP STEP A STEP STE STEP PAGE STEP STEP5 STEP4 C: C: DG characters YC TOG IJ ND600 operand line R TG operation as Depress Depress Set Set Select P P7 L 6 S 0 3 2 ES 1 Up or 10/30/76, to with characters to pushbutton The the the any an to Terminal from shift where pushbutton Status two display display the If the the 36 X—Y are sequential as the off the characters first fines 0 4 1 1 NXTV this ENTER entered, desired, with plotter, Page sequentially << information the array. operand operand cursor cursor will — character can STRIP F4 F3 F2 Fl 102 101 array display excess DATA MODE WGRF DATA MODE 4. pushbutton pushbutton group require be to the to to avoid can The pushbutton pushbutton can provide removed the the excess character entered to of of be depress information also 0000 depressing re—entry the 101 101/MODE data the BCDI STAT entered to to a be 0 characters left. select line. parameter from “blank” and channels. the space. array array/CRT entries used 4-42 of and displayed the 1, is the BCDI. The the is to displayed parameter 0, array. Display lines (10/30/76) displayed the display For as STOP causing will enter using second /, information follows: The display parameter example, after 3, overlap in pushbutton numerical of the procedure at 0, as the the line using entry Status in any displayed as /, entered CRSR the two first displays the those into value to 7 time the at first and Page enter pushbutton. lines information character for input/output before the the CRSR in by previously for 6 in line. inputting 4 operand up the status is pushbuttons and depressing two showing 101, to pushbutton. performing to two display be entries redundant If 27 display. into i.e. more redundant retained pushbutton entered, device of numerical the the the any at to a in than date the date, the select STOP for data for 101. C; C: the entered. the simultaneously removes selected 8. enter flashed 7. are 9. 6. at marker channels information 10, 10. 10 A AGRP PAGE D’GRP STEPS STEP? STEP6 STEPS STEP3 CTOGO CYCLES STE STEP STEP4 the IJ values selected displayed 20, 20 T 30, G P12 Depress Depress Sequentially Select Set operand 1 channel, on 30 the 30, status from depress This the entered the 40 is flashing status 40 Status as display to the the the display mode pushbutton depressed. page. 50 and entered depressing be 1 1 1 ENTER; operand 101 NXTV < page into enter Page 50 entered. can caret cursor in pushbutton. into STRIP F4 F3 F2 Ft the IC’ 102 and LuG DATA MODE DATA MODE be in the the pushbutton 1 enter array (<) pushbutton P and data the exited the the F to also numerical line l01/tATA and set line 40, first ENTER and channels as below 0. at the MR BCD line a below depress This 000 depress five to KR any display array. 0 I left pushbutton select value of the selects marker 4-43 will time the parameter numerical marker ENTER; the last point for MRKR. This remain last display Display numerical by markers. the ENTER defined line each depressing after to mode line in enter BCD of the using entries until the of data of of pushbutton; each alphanumeric is channels read—in first value the Status 50 alphanumeric channel indicated the the channel from the and data value. channel CRSR ERASE entries Page stop depress mode the respectively, channels in enter starting by pushbutton. pushbutton. which For 4 display. data pushbuttons into and to showing a data ENTER. 20, example, the caret which contained the between they with contained depress marker resultant However, (< enter the are the numerical are The This to ) five the being ENTER; on left 10 enter values on the BCD ______ The status display can also be specified as the output device for BCDreadout of contents of all channels, the contents of the channels between the markers, the contents of the channels in each intensified region or the region totals. The procedure for selecting the status display as the BCDreadout device is as follows: ( NOTE: Use of the Scroll display mode is preferred to this method of BCDreadout as the data presentation is more clearly formatted. However, if the user desires to visually scan through the contents of a selected group of data channels, this method is appropriate. 1. Select Status Page 4. 2. Set the display cursor to the 101 parameter using the cursor pushbutton. 3. Depress the ENTERpushbutton to “blank” the parameter value for 101, i.e. to select the CRTdisplay as the input/output device for 01. 4. Se.t the display cursor to the 10 1/MODE parameter using the CRSRpushbutton. 5. Depress the NXTV pushbutton to select BCDO. 6. Set the display cursor to the lOl/bATA parameter using the CRSRpushbutton. 7. Depress the NXTV pushbutton to select the desired readout data (ALL, MRKR, ROI or TOT). 8. Depress the 101 pushbutton. The contents of the data channels selected is sequentially displayed in up to six lines on the CRTwith channel identification for the first channel, every 100th channel, and the last channel. After six lines are displayed, the data displayed on the first line is rolled off the CRTwhile the data in subsequent channels appears in the sixth line. This method of display continues until all specified data has been displayed. The CRTreadout mode can be paused by depressing the minus (—)pushbutton, and then allowed to continue by depressing the minus (—)pushbutton again. The CRTreadout mode can be terminated at any time by depressing the STOP pushbutton. .PAI3E 5 << 3153 2707 7 2605 7 2332 7 2075 7 19 40 7 1815 7 1615 7 1521 7 1446 7 1266 1275 1188 7 1090 7 1047 7 10 33 7 946 7 @366 readout to CRTdisplay of marker channel contents. 4-44 CHAPTERV ND600 DATAMANIPULATION PACKAGE (47-0054) DESCRIPTION The ND600 Data Manipulation Package provides the ND600 System with the following firmware controlled operational functions: Addition of a constant to, or subtraction of a constant from the data spectrum, integration, differentiation, data transfer, data smooth, square root calculation, relative error calculation, and spectrum compression. Any of the data manipulation functions can be assigned to either the Fl, F2, F3 or F4 parameter (Status Page 4) by positioning the display cursor to the desired “F” parameter, entering the 3—digitselect code of the selected functon at the operand pushbutton array and then depressing the ENTERpushbutton. When the ENTERpushbutton is depressed, the mnemonic code of the selected function is displayed for the selected “F” parameter (Status Page 4). When any one of the data manipulation functions is assigned to a particular “F” parameter, each of the other data manipulation functions can be sequentially selected for that parameter by depressing the NXTV pushbutton. The 3—digitselect code and mnemonic code for each of the data manipulation functions are as follows: Select Code Mnemonic Code Function 200 ADD Add a constant to, or subtract a constant from .e •, add a negative constant to) each channel in the current display group. 201 INTEG Integrate the area defined by the left and right markers in the current display group and store the integral curve in the marker defined area. 202 DIFF Differentiate the area defined by the left and right markers in the current display group and store the differential curve in the marker defined area. 5—1 __ 203 Select 204 205 206 207 All depressing depressing and sequence ADD requires depressing group than first INSTALLATION NOTE: pair) The the XFER ND600 transferred the function which by Code data entry The current first are Functions the the the Data must manipulation REL always entering requires of corresponding “F” corresponding to display the ERR be Manipulation the pushbutton, require installed ___ source performed XFER Mnemonic SMOOTH function SQRT COMPRESS REL current entry the group. ERR functions desired entry group of “F” “F” on display can and on a package Code the pushbutton positive pushbutton. of number. the group also therefore except a Firmware group value data be consists number or performed 5—2 _ data group Transfer Function Calculate Perform data Calculate Compress display in ADD spectrum Functions and or negative at cannot the Option The the as spectrum spectrum then at of and into current steps data group operand a the the two be on in the XFER five—point the the the the selected (—) board operand data the in 512 performed the spectrum data by square display in constant. relative in REL current an can current pushbutton data x the the a spectrum (70—2434). auto spectrum ERR 8 factor as be pushbutton EPROM’s coefficient current current root spectrum group. in display steps function counting during performed job acquisition the The of of from sequence. array in in two. display the specified display XFER group. auto (one an the in any array is error smooth data either prior auto any performed. current function job. firmware group specified group. group. spectrum of and specified group The job to on by the The rather then ADD the is ( ( l\D XFER SMOOTH ADD Tel: 01FF Boston, Sales spectrum Transfers Tel: Atlanta, INTEG the selected United each functions Any from The entering assigned data Addition differential Adds pushbutton. into integral markers relative Performs markers Integrates Differentiates (i.e., ND600 (47-0054) ND600 T S E 617/535-5665 404/284-1747 PECI current and the ND600 of transfer, adds of States the Function a Function C Mass. Georgia Function the Service constant Function error the curve System current for in in its of H to data the NUCLEAR a is in Data a and the data the Function the curve five-point a other select display any assigned negative that the N Data Facilities constant calculation, Canada FICATION data data the spectrum, in area current current I with manipulation of (200) (202) current display the to, parameter CA (203) Manipulation in functions Manipulation area (201) code spectrum the smooth, group. defined the or marker the constant to (204) coefficient “F” Tel: to, Tel: Tel: Cleveland, subtracts Denver, defined Los display display L (20X). group. marker a display DATA following integration, and particular Angeles, or 714/898-7760 303/755-6607 216/331-5145 status by can square by defined from subtraction Colorado functions spectrum to) the group group When depressing Ohio by Package defined group. be smooth Calif. a parameters, INC each the S any left constant capabilities: sequentially root Package “F” area. differentiation, and and any left and specified channel Tel: Schaumburg, can Tel: San area. Tel: New compression. calculation, parameter, provides of on stores stores one and the right 312/884-3600 Francisco, 415/483-9200 212/962-3666 a York, be from the constant by of right NXTV in group data the the New the the Illinois Calif. York COMPRESS the REL SQRT group spectrum The the Calculates the THE The data current two corresponding Compresses Calculates display XFER analysis number. corresponding in All performed. performed analysis installation. require require requires Tel: Frankfurt, Washington, Europe Tel: the the current specified desired XFER N ND600 512 spectrum ERR 529952 REL 301/345-6766 current U can by Schaumburg, Function data Telephone group the entry display CLEAR sequence sequence. Golf entry Functions x a Germany ERR in Function function the be the 8 during D.C. factor group Firmware display manipulation the Data the and EPROM’s group of performed Function and acquisition square relative of function in “F” “F” group. current a data Meacham (312) (205) a any DATA Manipulation of value are Tel: Tel: then number auto Uppsala, London, Illinois The pushbutton. pushbutton positive requires selected group. Specifications Printed is two. (206) spectrum specified Option 22733, performed (018) first root counting 884-3621 (one the ADD analysis. can and display (207) either Sweden England 60196 functions group Roads in INC transferred 15-25-15 and of REL or 25357 entry also as firmware therefore U. and board the negative steps then group or S. by package in The group. error subject rather ERR The be on rfJ data XFER A. of the as depressing throughout your Schaumburg, Other representatIve. Please Representatives except performed (70-2434) the the depressing data 10/77 in ADD steps function of by current pair) spectrum cannot to to than local an (—) Sales Functions data source write the consists entering the spectrum change. PS auto function ADD in which constant. and the the data or spectrum current 1033 an Illinois the be display call is world. for on Service located group the auto and in of 2.5 the for in ) ) output function spectrum by or Fl rather The auto The the entering code background F4 The and by counts), the number number at Upon intensified DESCRIPTION The as pushbutton the depressing parameter the ENTER following XTRCT capability the intensified ND600 job a (XTRCT) determining than of input/output area), step of ND600 (from peak was sequence, the its with the channels pushbutton. the function region 3—digit counts in Intensified percent assigned intensified to (Status the left the with five is is of an current region INTENSIFIED background an displayed determining STOP counts to auto of the previously the in example it select device in can right), error Page interest the to is peak peak the display line job Region pushbutton. performed When region the be per region, 4) code region, (square for sequence. selected printer performed channel extraction the ratio of Fl second by between assigned REGION the the the group. Peak performing peak parameter (100) channel positioning the (peak peak selected root ENTER the on (LP) for (area in Extraction extraction at area the the either CHAPTER peak When peak function of each The channel, PEAK assigned the channel the location the data pushbutton divided (Status left the 6—1 (total “F” XTRCT 101 the channel regions operand region, by the area EXTRACTION and XTRCT spectrum Package parameter display can report. depressing parameter VI height to XTRCT counts FWHM of Page by plus function right the of be the energy, the pushbutton is current function interest. 4) assigned two 101 depressed, cursor divided function in left in provkles markers following and and (Status the the the (Status times can parameter limit PACKAGE intensity elapsed the performed to on region current corresponding by be to array, in In the the FWHM is Page the of a Page information the either the the terminated this selected 2048—channel the desired ND600 background, live minus information 4). acquisition (Status function’s background current and 4): example, (47-0055) by region, in the time energy, then depressing the the as “F” System “F” Fl, Page at display is a in background peak depressing the parameter, any step outputted mnemonic pushbutton seconds), F2, the group for GeLi divided height). 4) the with time XTRCT each in F3 for the group. on or F t N 41745 2 5 3 1 firmware The of dkplay, 1983 INSTALLATION LEFT NOTE: 17:3 2i2 9:313 the Intensified current P1.1 14175:flu 13 113 : 14 the pair) When 19 intensified 2137. j35• 9913. status which Region PEAK the cni 1313 1313 page. 101 must Peak region parameter be :E17 4. 3:. 3. FNHN Extraction installed 552 1357 i22 391 peak (Status extraction on Package 6-2 the 22113 4914 E:GN’ Page ii2 Firmware 5:3 report consists 4) is blanked is Option of displayed 22117 two 3:493 55713 AREA 7135 .4 to board 512 select following :*i. 1. 4. 2. x i. (70—2434). 8 135 55 34 :3j EPROM’s output j:34:. 291. 547. C:TS/SEC the 5:3. TO-: to last (one :33:3 51313 Ø: II;3: the line CRT Ff::.,.ECiND 31 513. 19. 4 547 917 :374 755 ( ( ( N U C LEAR DATA IN C TECHNICAL Golf and Meacham Roads Schaumburg, Illinois :: 60196 S PECI FICATIGNS Telephone (312) 884-3621 ND600 Intensified Region Peak The intensified region peak extraction (XTRCT) Extraction Package (47-0055) function can be assigned to any of the “F” status parameters by entering its select code (100). The The ND600 Intensified Region Peak Extraction XTRCT function can be performed either by Package provides the ND600 System with the depressing the corresponding “F” pushbutton or as capability of determining the peak channel, FWHM a step in an auto analysis sequence. When the and intensity information for each intensified region XTRCT function is selected as a step on an auto of interest between the left and right markers in the analysis sequence, it is performed on the data current display group. Upon determining the peak spectrum in the current acquisition group rather channel in each region, the following information is than the current display group. outputted at the 101 device: the peak number (from left to right), the channel location of the left limit of The Intensified Region Peak Extraction Package the region, the number of channels in the region, the consists of four 512 x 8 EPROM’s (two firmware peak channel energy, the FWHM in energy, the back pairs) which require the Firmware Option board ground counts in the region, the area (total counts in (70-2434) for installation. the region minus the background counts), the percent error (square root of the area plus two times the background, divided by the area), the counts per second (area divided by current elapsed live time in seconds), and the peak to background ratio (peak channel height divided by the background height). Sample Printout of Peak Extraction Report on a 2048-channel GeLi spectrum with five previously assigned peak regions of interest. PN LM MW F’KE FNHM EGNC’ AREA ER c:Ts,-sEc: PK/E:GN[:’ I 178 14 j::5. ii 3. it22 4914 22117 0. :31 j:343. 0:3]: 19. 765 2 202 10 207. iZjl3 3. 057 2210 349]: 2. 55 291. 083 4. :374 3 981.3 1:3 990. 1.30 3. 391 612 6570 j. 3:4 547. 500 50. 917 4 1745 14 1753. 00 3, :317 126 :347 3. 91 70. 583 21. 28:3 5 1983 13 1990. 00 4. 552 58 706 4. 06 58. 633 31. 547 Specifications subject to change NUCLEAR DATA INC Printed in U.S.A. 10/77 PS 1034 2.5 Sales and Service Facilities cleveland, Ohio New York, New York Washington, D.C. London, England Other Sales and Service United States and Canada Tel: 216/331-5145 Tel: 212/962-3666 Tel: 301/345-6766 Tel: 22733, 25357 Representatives located throughout the world. Atlanta, Geprgia Denver, Colorado San Francisco, Calif. Uppsala, Sweden Tel: 303/755-6607 Please write or call Tel: 404/284-1747 Tel: 415/483-9200 Euroie Tel: (018) 15-25-15 Schaumburg, Illinois for Boston, Mass. Los Angeles, Calif. Schaumburg, Illinois Frankfurt, Germany your local Tel: 617/535-5665 Tel: 714/898-7760 Tel: 312/884-3600 Tel: 529952 representative. 0 C C C CHAPTERVII ND600 INTENSIFIEDREGION ISOTOPE IDENTIFICATION PACKAGE (47-0056) DESCRIPTION The ND600 intensified Region Isotope identification Package provides a report identifying the isotope, half—life, energy and percent abundance for each peak determined during the intensified region peak extraction process. Each isotope is identified on the basis of finding an energy line which corresponds to the isotope in the isotope library. The intensified region isotope identification package requires that the ND600 System include the ND600 intensified Region Peak Extraction Package (47—0055)and either the Standard or Special Isotope Library Firmware. The Intensified Region Isotope Identification Package provides three firmware controlled operational functions: isotope identification setup, output isotope identification report, and list isotope library table. Any of the intensified region isotope identification functions can be assigned to either the Fl, F2, F3 or F4 parameter (Status Page 4) by positioning the display cursor to the desired “F” parameter, entering the 3—digitselect code of the selected function at the operand pushbutton array and then depressing the ENTERpushbutton. When the ENTERpushbutton is depressed, the mnemonic code of the selected function is displayed for the selected “F” parameter (Status Page 4). When anyone of the intensified region isotope identification functions is assigned to a particular “F” parameter, each of the other intensified region isotope identification functions can be sequentially selected for that parameter by depressing the NXTV pushbutton. The 3—digitselect code and mnemonic code for each of the intensified region isotope identification functions are as follows: Select Code Mnemonic Code Function 400 SETUPID Permits entering a value in keV which represents an acceptable tolerance (+) between the calculated energy and the actual energy listed in the isotope library when generating an isotope identification report. 7-1 Select Code Mnemonic Code Function 401 ID Outputs the intensified region pea extraction report and then the intensified region isotope identification report at the input/output device selected for the 101 parameter (Status Page 4). 402 LISTTAB Lists the isotope library table at the input/output device selected for the 101 parameter (Status Page 4). The SETUPID function is selected for the Fl parameter (Status Page 4) and performed as follows: 1. Select Status Page 4. 2. Set the display cursor to the Fl parameter using the CRSRpushbutton. 3. Enter 400 at the operand pushbutton array and depress the ENTERpushbutton. SETUPID is displayed for the Fl parameter. 4. Set the display cursor to the PAGE parameter using the CRSRpushbutton. 5. Enter 7 at the operand pushbutton array and depress the ENTERpushbutton. Status Page 7 is displayed. 6. Depress the SHIFTpushbutton to select the right (>>)direction and depress the F1/F2 pushbutton. The set—upintensified region isotope identification parameters are displayed as follows: _PAGE IRID TOL 2. NOTE: The energy tolerance is initialized to 2.000 keV when power is applied, but can be changed to any value desired. For example, to change the energy tolerance to 1.5 keV perform the following: 7. Set the display cursor to the TOL parameter using the CRSRpushbutton. 8. Enter 1.5 at the operand pushbutton array and depress the ENTERpushbutton. 1.500 is displayed for the TOL parameter. NOTE: After entering the desired energy tolerance, the system is ready to perform the ID function. The ID function can be selected for the Fl parameter by depressing the NXTV pushbutton or for any other “F” parameter by entering its 3 digit select code at the operand pushbutton array and then depressing the ENTERpushbutton. ( 7-2 PN c:O—57 co—so c:s—i37 SE—75 EU—152 ISOTOPE 5 4 1. - the with The The LIST two output NOTE: function depressing spectrum or isotope rather Fl The auto The LEFT .1745 19:33 :02 j7:: as pushbutton LIST printout LIST reports the following ID job TAB a than of step function identification line TAB When TAB was sequence, with F’W the io 14 13 14 function the are the of in HL. function printer function assigned intensified 1332. 11-: 272. 1213, with five is the the STOP an i: 122. displayed 30 12. current IFE can an s. auto PEAK standard 101 can previously the 26Y 40D 40D OOY ?O’T’ example it (LP) be 55 : :1 cm i0 pushbutton 0 to report. to is is be job parameter display line performed the performed performed assigned the region following terminated 1173. 1332. sequence. library : . : ENER’3’T’ 2. : printer 136. :122. 1:.:5. 121.. 661. Fl of Fl FWHM assigned :o: 915 group. parameter c: performing parameter peak 100 200 400 500 600 000 800 to (Status either table on by (L.P) the the extraction at depressing the When peak AE:UND 100. 100. The last assigned any 101 99. ii. 85. 57. 37. on by Page data (Status 7-3 (Status the ID line the depressing regions time E:GND the :w:1 5937 90 10 60 00 00 00 00 parameter 1: 104 4) function ID spectrum following report of ID to the is Page by function Page the blanked the function of depressing corresponding 4) and the interest. current 4) (Status 101 can in and pages and on 3t6j2 corresponding then the be AF.:E:Fi to 44E parameter 1 -I,: is 975 depressing 1c,3 a performed status select terminated selected Page current the 2048—channel the was In STOP “F” this intensified 4). obtained : i. - 3. 1 page. the EF: (Status acquisition i 59 - 53 15 pushbutton. example, as the by - CRT UFiI pushbutton. at a j. depressing step Fl CTS/SE’: any zs :4 pushbutton by display, Page GeLi ‘- 57. region pushbutton - assigning time in the group u l 41; 7e.35 ijmi 4) an The ID for by the the FK/E:GNE:’ 19 :. 1 4’: 4 7i I’: 55: : ISOTOPE HLIFE ENERGY XABUND BE—? 53. 313D 477. 5ii 10. 30 NA—22 2. SOY 1274. 5130 99. 95 NFI—24 15. 1.313H 1368. 500 IflO 00 ( 2754. 1130 99. 85 C:L—3:3 37. 30M 1642. 400 32. 80 216?. 5013 44. 00 FIR—41 1. 83H 1293. 60i3 99. 00 1. 26001E+09Y 1460 700 10. 70 K—42 12. 40H 1524. 700 1?. 90 SC—46 :33. 90D 1389. :oo 100. 00 1120. 500 100. 00 C:R—51 27. 8.OD 3213. ioo 9. 90 MN—54 314. OOE:’ 834. 8013 1130. 00 MN—SE 2. 5?H 846. 600 99. 00 1811. 200 30. 00 2112. 61313 15. 50 FE—59 44. SOD 1i.99 3cici 56. ‘30 142. 5013 0. 80 192. 2013 2. 80 1291. 5130 44. 00 CO—5? 270. OUt:’ 122. 100 85. 60 136. 41.30 10. 60 CO—58 71. 30D 810. 000 99. 40 CO—SO 5. 26Y 1173. 200 99. 90 1332. 500 100. 00 CU—ES 5. IOM 11339. 200 9. 00 ZN—ES 244. 0O[:’ 1115. 400 50. 60 AS—76 26. 40H 559. 2130 43. 00 1215. 801.3 5. 00 ( SE—?5 120. 40E:’ 264. 600 59. •10 136. 000 55. 60 279. 600 25. 00 E:R—82 35. 40H 775. 700 83. 013 554. 3130 72. 00 619. 100 43. 00 KR—8:3 2. 80H 196. 100 37. :313 166. 0013 6. 80 834. 700 13. 00 1529. 800 11. 30 REI—:39 14. 91.3M 1030. 700 60. 00 658. 800 10. 70 94:3. 500 10. 00 1246. 400 46. 60 SR—85 64. 00[:’ 514. 1300 99. 30 SR—91 9. 70H 1024. 2013 33. 00 653. 000 12. 00 749. 800 24. 00 106. ?0D 898. 000 93. 40 1836. 100 99. 40 ZR—95 55. 00D 756. 900 54. 80 724. 2130 43. 60 NB—94 20000. 30Y 871. 0130 1130. 00 702. 000 100. 00 NB—95 IOD 765. 800 99. 80 ( 7-4 o . 0 .0•11 r w n in tnintnn in i i w wwzv ccc I i ii i 1’ I liii ii I ph W W W W I& II’ I 4 4 WW W (1W N ia N NNPS IA® 5 S S WN 4 (1 4NWW W 4 IA W N S N NO N S N CD N SN(fiS ON N N NO IA NW W S N 4CDNS OS N W OS S S S S a N 0000 55 V <-C -C XX X V -C VVVV IA phfhphA jA WCDÔW(IWIACflWWN wwwmmma NIAwNwSmWwSNCDcImsaWNcnmWNWNNcnNWNmW CDWSSNNSWWCDSCDWCDONIAW NCDWmmWWWIAIA4ONOhNWWWmLIW(RmW(ILMmNmNSWUIIACDNUINWmSSNCDSNLRNCDNWS 555SS555555S505000555555055500550(INNI’tOCJI5505005505050 05555500500505505555550050500555050555555055555555555 IA IAIA N4NW NIAWIAIOCDWIACDIAIAWIAIAN CDIANIAIA%fl CDIA IAIA NW4O%OSIANWNNW & WIASSmCINWNmSSSmIAOSWSWO4CD4SWWS4NWCD4NNoSWthNW0050IA4I.hmawao 55555555555555555555555555555555555555fl5555555555555 CE—139 140. OOD 165. 9 :30. i::E—141 32. 40D 145. 500 49. 00 CE—144 284. OUD 133. 500 10. 80 696. 500 1. 50 SM—153 46. 80H 103. 200 28. 40 EU—152 14. 0@Y 1407. 900 24. 30 121. 800 33. 20 344. 200 31. 40 778. :300 15. 20 964. 000 17. 30 1086. 000 10. 00 1112. 000 16. 40 EU—154 7. 84Y 1274. 800 33. 60 123. 100 40. 50 723. 300 19. 10 873. 200 11. 30 996. 300 10. 70 1004. 800 17. 60 EU—155 5. OOY 105. 300 22. 40 86. 500 33. 50 HF—181 42. 50c:’ 482. 200 83. 00 133. 100 41. 00 345. 700 12. 00 W—187 23. 90H 685. 700 32. 00 134. 200 10. 10 479. 300 26. 60 AU—198 2. 70D 411. 800 95. 50 HG—203 46. 60D 279. 200 81. 50 B 1—214 16. 02Y 609. 300 47. 00 1120. 400 17. 00 1238. 300 6. 00 1764. 000 17. 00 RA—226 1600. 02Y 609. 400 43. 00 295. 200 18. 00 000 35. 00 1120. 400 14. 00 1764. 700 16. 60 PFI—233 27. 40t:’ 311. 900 38. 00 98. 400 13. 50 300. 100 6. 60 NP—239 2. 35[:’ 277. 900 12. 10 99. 500 11. 00 103. 700 18. 00 106. 400 22. 80 228. 100 9. 50 ( 7-6 INSTALLATION The Intensified Region Isotope Identification Package consists of two 512 x 8 EPROM’s (one firmware pair) which must be installed on the Firmware Option board (70—2434). The Standard Isotope Library consists of four 512 x 8 EPROM’s(two firmware pairs) which must be installed on the Firmware Option board (70—2434). NOTE: The Intensified Region Isotope Identification Package requires that the Intensified Region Peak Extraction Package (47—0055)and either the Standard or Special Isotope Library Firmware be installed on the Firmware Option board (70—2434). 7-7 / ( C CHAPTERVIII ND600 AUTOMATIC PEAKSEARCHPACKAGE (47-0057) The ND600 Automatic Peak Search Package automatically determines the centroid FWHM and intensity information for each peak in the marker defined portion of the data spectrum stored in the current display group. The values are determined using a peak extraction process which is based on the values entered for the full width half maximumand sensitivity parameters. Upon extraction of each peak the following information is outputted at the input/output device selected for the 101 parameter (Status Page 4): the peak number from left to right, the channel location of the left limit of the peak, the peak width in channels, the peak centroid energy, the FWHMin energy, the background counts in the peak, the peak area (total counts in the peak minus the background counts), the percent error in the area calculation (square root of the area plus two times the background, divided by the area), and the counts per second (area divided by the current elapsed live time in seconds). In addition to output of the peak search information, the spectral display of each peak can be automatically intensified as the peak is extracted to permit visual identification of each extracted peak on the spectral display. The Automatic Peak Search Package provides four firmware controlled operational functions: set up peak search, peak search, peak search intensify and calculate variable FWHMcurve coefficients. Any of the automatic peak search functions can be assigned to either the F], F2, F3 or F4 parameter (Status Page 4) by positioning the display cursor to the desired “F” parameter, entering the 3—digitselect code of the selected function at the operand pushbuttons array and then depressing the ENTERpushbutton. When the ENTERpushbutton is depressed, the mnemonic code of the selected function is displayed for the selected “F” parameter (Status Page 4). When anyone of the automatic peak search functions s assigned to a particular “F” parameter, each of the other automatic peak search functions can be sequentially selected for that parameter by depressing the NXTV pushbutton. The 3—digitselect code and mnemonic code for each automatic peak search function are as follows: 8—1 Select Code Mnemonic Code Function ( 500 SETPS Permits entry and display of the setup peak search parameters (Status Page 7). Included are the coefficients of the variable FWHMcurve, the run number, the sensitivity level, and two energy versus FWHMvalues for defining the variable FWHMcurve. 501 PSRCH Automatically determines the centroid, FWHM and intensity information for each peak in the marker defined portion of the data spectrum and outputs the peak search information at the input/output device selected for the 101 parameter (Status Page 4). 502 PSINT Automatically determines the centroid, FWHM and intensity information for each peak in the marker defined portion of the data spectrum, intensifies the spectral display of each peak, and outputs the peak search information at the input/output device selected for the 101 parameter (Status Page 4). ( 503 VFWHM Calculates the coefficients of the variable FWHM curve based on the values entered for the energy versus FWHMparameter (Status Page 7). This curve is used to improve performance when processing Nal spectral peaks. Setup Peak Search Function The SETPSfunction is selected for the Fl parameter (Status Page 4) and performed as follows: 1. Select Status Page 4. 2. Set the display cursor to the Fl parameter using the CRSRpushbutton. 3. Enter 500 at the operand pushbutton array and depress the Fl pushbutton. SETPS is displayed for the Fl parameter. 4. Set the display cursor to the PAGE parameter using the CRSRpushbutton. 5. Enter 7 at the operand pushbutton array and depress the ENTERpushbutton. Status Page 7 is displayed. ( 8—2 APS 6. HW(E) Parameter APS HW(0) pushbutton. .PAGE EN2 HW(O) ENi RLIN Status Depress Status Parameter Parameter the The a a 3. 000 000 000 SHIFT setup 7 3 variable the spectral spectral peaks, of peaks function expanded When can average the Nal full can curve). parameters average Description The can The Descriptions Display the peak pushbutton number GeLi be be width be HW(E) HW(0) peaks with HW/E HW2 HW1 processing SENS number the used changed changed number peaks, peaks, number search FWHM can peaks displayed, half at. respect parameter can parameter HW(E) of to be channel of channels to determine maximum be parameters the to the to curve). for used to of channels GeLi select parameter be obtained 0. 0. 3. 3. to any any channels the calculate calculate to actually 000 000 000 APS 000 determined the is is 0 8—3 spectral value value at HW(0) the or determine initialized initialized points square the the at the are right by at is the desired. desired. HW(E) variable variable full counting zero parameter. displayed set observing the of peaks, root full (>>) during the width the equal full to to intercept parameter width of 0.000 5.000 GeLI HW(0) FWHM an FWHM When width The direction the energy the to half as several estimation When 0. number half HW(0) follows: peaks peak when when of processing maximum parameter half curve curve (the When or the maximum GeLi and processing extraction the and maximum power parameter power of rate variable coefficients coefficients of depress processing slope channels entering peaks points the (an of GeLi is is points change applied HW(0) applied of estimate points Nat process. sets FWHM in the of spectral the the at an of Nd Nat function the F1/F2 the of in but but Parameter Description ( RUN The run number (RUN) parameter is initially set to 0 but can be set to any number from 0 to 65,535. The currently displayed run number is incremented by one whenever the PSRCHor PSINT function is performed. SENS The SENS parameter is initialized to a value of 7.500 when power is applied but can be changed to any value desired. The SENS parameters sets the sensitivity level of the peak extraction process with respect to background. To increase sensitivity, i .e., to extract peaks that slightly exceed the average background content, decrease the value of the SENS parameter. Maximum sensitivity k obtained by a SENS parameter value of 1.000. To decrease sensitivity, i.e., to extract only large peaks, increase the value of the SENS parameter. EN1, EN2 The energy (EN 1, EN2) versus Full width half maximum (HW1, HW2) HW1, HW2 parameters, except the HW1 parameter, are initially set to 0. The HW1 parameter is initialized to the value of the HW(0) parameter (5.000). Values entered for these parameters define two points (EN, HW)on the variable FWHMcurve. A value for any of the APS status parameters is entered as follows: ( 1. Set the display cursor to the desired parameter using the CRSRpushbutton. 2. Enter an appropriate value for the selected parameter at the operand pushbutton array and depress the ENTERpushbutton. The value entered is displayed for the selected parameter. Peak Search Function The PSRCHfunction can be selected for the Fl parameter by depressing the NXTV pushbutton or for any other “F” parameter by entering its 3—digitselect code (501) at the operand pushbutton array and then depressing the ENTERpushbutton. The PSRCHfunction can be performed by depressing the corresponding “F’ pushbutton or as a step in an auto job sequence. When the PSRCHfunction is selected as a step in i auto lob sequence, it is performed on the data spectrum in the current auto group rather than the current display group. The PSRCHfunction can be terminated at any time by depressing the STOP pushbutton. The following is an example of performing the PSRCHFunction on the marker defined portion (from 21.737 to 2040 .460 keV) of a 2048—channel GeLi spectrum and finding 17 peaks. In this example, the PSRCHfunction was assigned to the Fl parameter 8—4 PEAK RUN#= LT HW(0) SENS display, SRCH value assigned NOTE: Peak page. The (Status 17 15 ±6 13 14 12 11 10 PN 9 8 7 5 6 4 3 2 1 HW(0) 1460 1836 1331 1274 1171 Search LEFT of SEARCH 895 812 658 508 387 308 251 275 161 131 117 FRM Page = = 82 = When the to 3.000. 1000. 3. 3. parameter the 4) peak Report 11 12 11 10 11 10 14 10 10 11 00000000 00000000 PW the 8 8 5 8 9 8 9 and 101 DONE 21. 1836. 1460. 1332. 1274. 1172. 00000 search 101 897. 661. 813. 512. 391. 254. 310. 278. 165. 136. 121. performed parameter 87. 73? was CENT parameter 3 21 10 71 29 88 40 65 27 42 78 76 33 81 73 34 94 83 report set CT HW/E TO to by (Status 2. . 2. 2. 1. 2. 1. is 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. a depressing FWHM (Status displayed value 078 751 346 524 285 843 565 928 643 305 659 334 407 918 144 740 865 = = Page 0. 1017. of Page 00000000 2040. 8-5 3.000. 4) following the 11440 00000 11858 17259 BKGND for 4) 1062 2469 5950 6190 4120 8687 7535 4130 7576 9671 7176 Fl 198 656 611 460 is output pushbutton blanked The the SENS of last the 28046 32474 11614 23901 32210 34958 to 5539 1731 6801 8483 3905 AREA parameter with line ±29 427 237 586 437 select peak 32114. of the 28. 21. 21. 38. 27. search output 0. 1. 0. 1. 0. 2. 7. 4. the 1. 0. 0. XER line 59 62 39 56 60 33 80 79 99 41 17 89 83 97 19 is 73 75 current set report. printer to 28. 5. 0. 0. 32. 0. 11. 23. 1. 6. 0. 0. 0. 8. 3. 32. 34. to the 539000000 128500000 032000000 427000000 801000000 731000000 586000000 237000000 437000000 482500000 905000000 CTS.”SEC a status 04550000 61400000 47350000 90100000 20950000 95800000 CRT (LP) Peak Search Report Parameter Descriptions ( Parameter Description RUN# Current run number. SRCH FRM/TO Energy in keV of the left/right marker channels. LT Current elapsed live time in seconds. CT Current elapsed clock time in seconds. HW(O) Average number of channels at the full width half maximum points of GeLi peak or an estimate of the number of channels at the full width half maximum points of Nal peaks at channel 0 (zero intercept of the variable FWHMcurve). HW/E Rate of change in the number of channels at the full width half maximum points of Nal peaks with respect to the square root of energy (slope of the variable FWHMcurve; equals 0 for GeLi peaks). SENS Sensitivity level of peak extraction process with respect to background. PN Sequential number of peak (from left to right) within marker defined area. ( LEFT Channel location of the left limit of the peak. PW Peak width in channels. CENT Energy of peak centroid in keV. FWHM Full width half maximum of peak in keV. BKGND Background counts within peak area. AREA Net area (total counts minus background counts) of peak. %ER Percent error in area calculation determined by taking the square root of the area plus two times the background, divided by the area. CTS/SEC Counts per second calculated by dividing the area by the current elapsed live time in seconds. ( 8-6 pairs) The where: INSTALLATION EN HW(0) HW/E HW HW entered the The (Status The (HW(0), array button Calculate of The NOTE: RGN Thus, When manner STOP a The current pushbutton job or Peak The step each for VFWHM Automatic formula = sequence, VFWHM VFWHM PSINT PSINT which and ADV Search HW/E the pushbutton. PSINT or in any Page as for display peak The = = HW/E) = = an for then start Variable the other pushbutton. the function function array for must 7). function auto PSINT function function any function Intensify * 1 Energy as Full Full PSRCH Peak depressing it channel energy variable group. HW/ parameters it “F” be is and “F” job Jj width width is performed function FWH Search can installed c extracted in parameter sequence. then parameter is function. is can is Function (EN /N of keV. The + performed, performed half half M performed, be FWHM be the be each depressing 1, Curve HW(0) Package (Status performed selected PS1NT (rate de—intensifies maximum maximum selected EN2) on ENTER on by by peak curve by the In When the of Coefficients automatically by Page entering function entering versus addition, t it consists change for Firmware data pushbutton. (including the depressing calculates by is: for outputs at in the 7) the depressing ENTER channel channels. the spectrum 8-7 full of the PSINT its can Fl its in of the the Fl the width Option Function. 3—digit channel HW parameter twelve 3—digit dublets) be intensifying and the pushbutton. parameter variable PSINT 0. automatic function with terminated in the half corresponding displays the board select 512 code preceding corresponding respect function can maximum by current FWHM x by is (70—2434). (503) peak depressing be 8 each code the selected depressing at EPROM’s readily to provides values any curve auto the search at peak the (502) (HW1, “F” the time left as square “F” group pushbutton. the on identified based for (six at operand report a the visual limit HW2) by pushbutton the step the NXTV the firmware rather NXTV root depressing on spectral operand of coefficient in in parameters identification the pushbutton using each of the an pushbutton than push When EN). values auto or same dsplay. peak. the the the as NUCLEAR DATA INC TECHNICAL Golf and Meacham Roads Schaumburg, Illinois 60196 S PECI FICATIDNS Telephone (312) 884-3621 : ND600 Automatic Peak Search Package (47-0057) The ND600 Automatic Peak Search Package auto SETPS Function (500) matically determines the centroid FWHM and intensity Permits entering values for the HW and SENS information for each peak in the marker defined parameters (Status Page 7). The HW parameter sets portion of the data spectrum stored in the current the average number of channels at the full width display group. The values are determined using a half maximum points of the peaks to be determined peak extraction process which is based on the values during the peak extraction process. The SENS entered for the full width half maximum and sensitivity parameter sets the sensitivity level of the peak parameters. Upon extraction of each peak the extraction process with respect to background. following information is outputted at the 101 device: the peak number from left to right, the channel PSRCH Function (501) location of the left limit of the peak, the peak width Automatically centroid, FWHM and in channels, the peak centroid energy, the FWHM determines the information peak in marker in energy, the background counts in the peak, the intensity for each the portion of and peak area (total counts in the peak minus the back defined the data spectrum outputs the bround counts), the percent error in the area peak search information at the 101 device. calculation (square root of the area plus two times PSINT Function (502) the background, divided by the area), and the counts per second (area divided by the current elapsed live Automatically determines the centroid, FWHM and time in seconds). In addition to output of the peak intensity information for each peak in the marker search information, the spectral display of each peak defined portion of the data spectrum, intensifies the can be automatically intensified as the peak is spectral display of each peak, and outputs the peak extracted to permit visual identification of each search information at the 101 device. extracted peak on the spectral display. The Automatic Peak Search Package consists of twelve 512 x 8 EPROM’s (six firmware pairs) which The Automatic Peak Search Package provides three Option Board (70-2434) for functions: set up peak search, peak search and peak require the Firmware installation. search intensify. Any of the functions can be assigned to any of the “F” status parameters by entering its select code (50X) and performed by depressing the corresponding “F” pushbutton. The PSRCH and the PSINT functions can also be performed as steps in an auto analysis sequence. Functions selected as steps in an auto analysis sequence are performed on the data spectrum in the current acquisition group rather than the current display group. When anyone of the functions is assigned to a particular “F” parameter, each of the other functions can be sequentially selected for that parameter by depressing the NXTVpushbutton. Peak Search Report SEARCH FROM 55. ‘352 TO 186:3. 9713 LT = 2i’3’3. 1313’3 i::T = 21351. E31313 C HN = 5. 131313 SENS = 4. _31313 PN LEFT P[’.l ,::ENT FNHM E*:::,]N[:i AREA ER C:TS,”SEC: 1 158 31 87. 65 1. ‘.3:3 43832 725313 a ss 264813131313 2 236 11 121. :35 1. 1.35 12998 64’.359 a 47 32. 13296131.31313 3 266 9 136. 31 1. 12 89713 7:317 2. 135 3. 9138661.3131313 4 324 113 165. 66 1. ‘33 :395:3 178132 1. ‘36 :3. 9131131313131313 5 5134 7 255. 134 1. 23 52:32 1215 8. 93 ‘3. 613743:313013 6 551 9 278. 92 1. 1:3 7046 892 13. 72 1.3.445969131313 7 614 :3 ]jj3. 14 •1. ‘i 5622 509 21. ::l a 25433913013 E -5 ii :.‘i 4 .t :;- 7::1 i:.i I 1 E 55.ouoo 9 1fl1 113 5 5? 1 4 55( 949 90 1. 4945613L1’.j1.j 10 1314 13 661. 18 1. 49 65138 48248 13. 5j 24. 12390000 11 IE:O 11.3 El: 1 451: ‘1 ii r o 445 E713013 12 17:36 14 :397. 52 1. 71 :3002 231359 ‘.3.:36 11. 529500013 i: .4 i. 117’: -i : 4..E1 E4OIE o 4: :: 14 2541.3 12 1274. 22 2. 18 756 197 21. 01 13. 0983751300 15 2620 53 1331. :39 2. 13 4106 56961 13. 45 2:3. 48030000 IE :i 11 14E’3 ‘35 1 ES 55E 17’ J3 73 13 OEEI7’5’XlO 17 3660 20 1835. :34 2. 53 90 11412 0. 94 5. 7060000013 TOTAL NE:R FEAKS = 17 Peak Search Report Parameter Descriptions C SEARCH FROM/TO—Energy in keV of left/right CENT—Energy of peak centroid in keV. marker channel. FWHM—Full width half maximum of peak in keV. LT—Current elapsed live time in seconds. BKGND — Background counts within peak area. CT—Current elapsed clock time in seconds. AREA—Net area (total counts minus background HW—Average number of channels at full width half counts) of peak. maximum points of peaks to be determined during error in area calculation determined peak extraction process. %ER—Percent by taking the square root of the area plus two times SENS—Sensitivity level of peak extraction process the background, divided by the area. with respect to background. CTS/SEC—Counts per second calculated by dividing PN—Sequential number of peak (from left to right) the area by the current elapsed live time in seconds. within marker defined area. TOTAL NBR PEAKS—Total number of peaks found LEFT—Channel location of the left limit of the peak. during automatic peak search process. PW—Peak width in channels. Specifications subject to change. NUCLEAR DATA INC Printed in U.S.A. 10/77 PS 1036 2.5 Sales and Service Facilities cleveland, Ohio New York, New York Washington, D.C. London, England Other Sales and Service United States and Canada Tel: 216/331-5145 Tel: 212/962-3666 Tel: 301/345-6766 Tel: 22733, 25357 Representatives located throughout the world. Atlanta, Georgia Denver, Colorado San Francisco, Calif. Uppsala, Sweden Please write or call Tel: 404/284-1747 Tel: 303/755-6607 Tel: 415/483-9200 Europe Tel: (018) 15-25-15 Schaumburg, Illinois for Boston, Mass. Los Angeles, Calif. Schaumburg, Illinois Frankfurt, Germany your local Tel: 617/535-5665 Tel: 714/898-7760 Tel: 312/884-3600 Tel: 529952 representative. 600 selected functions Select operand the pushbutton either isotope identification operational NXTV efficiency report, fication The for Search to DESCRIPTION isotope, The an each desired Automatic ND600 energy the Code pushbutton. Package identification list pushbutton package peak “F” half—life, ND600 is Fl, curve. is isotope “F” assigned functions: Automatic parameter line depressed, functions determined F2, Isotope parameter, (47—0057) AUTOMATIC requires of Any F3 library decay, array AID Mnemonic The an to functions or Identification Isotope automatic a of (Status isotope can 3—digit the F4 particular and that during the table, and energy, entering parameter be mnemonic then automatic the Identification Code Page ISOTOPE either sequentially are in select the calculate isotope the ND600 depressing as percent “F” 4). the automatic Package the follows: (Status isotope code code CHAPTER parameter, 3—digit isotope When IDENTIFICATION identification Standard the detector are the cation efficiency energy Permits Function System 9-1 efficiency selected abundance, and of Package dual the hold the Page provides library. the anyone peak select mnemonic identification set—up break display entry ENTER include IX time parabola efficiency or 4) selected each values extraction for Special by provides code curve of five and point The and parameters setup, percent that pushbutton. positioning and of the the code display for firmware automatic the PACKAGE of curve, the function coefficients, parameter and curve, acquire automatic ND600 Isotope the functions output a defining process sample other for efficiency report six selected (Status of the each the the energy is controlled Automatic Library group automatic isotope the When isotope energy displayed units. (47-0058) which by identifying a isotope display can coefficients of dual isotope Page and depressing and function numbers, the versus the be Firmware. identification corresponds ident— tolerance, graph parabola 7). activity automatic identification assigned isotope ENTER cursor Peak for identifi the Included at the of the the to the to pushbutton. 6. 4. 5. Page 2. is 3. The Automatic 604 1. 603 602 601 Select displayed AID Depress Enter Set Enter Set Select 7 is Code the the function displayed. 7 600 Isotope Status display at for display the The at the the SHIFT automatic the is Page operand Identification Fl cursor cursor selected GRAPH COEFFS LIST Mnemonic ISO operand parameter. pushbutton 4. ID TAB to to pushbutton isotope for the the pushbutton Code the Setup PAGE Fl to identification parameter Fl select array Function parameter parameter array 4096. where Calculates efficiency Displays detector entered (Status device Page Lists parameter then Outputs at Function 9—2 the and the and using the the right 4). depress N input/output selected Page set (Status for using depress a efficiency isotope the automatic is the (>>) curve graph (Status the up the any 7). automatic the the parameters CRSR coefficients Page energy number for the direction library of in CRSR Page ENTER spectral isotope the curve the device pushbutton. 4) ENTER versus 4). and dual peak pushbutton. of 101 table pushbutton. are based channels and selected of identification performed pushbutton. data parameter parabola search efficiency displayed at the depress upon the channels dual from report for input/output the detector as the Status parabola (Status as the parameters follows: AID 1 values report follows: F1/F2 and to 1—N 101 ( EF1—EF6 EN1—EN6 EBP DGRP, AID ETOL Parameter AID _PAGE HT Bi Cl Al EN5 EN2 DGRP EN6 EN4 ENI EN3 ETOL Status Status AGRP 350. 6. —0. —17. 1173. Parameter Parameter 661. 165. 279. 391. 486250 87. 5000D 71066 2. 8747 200 600 8013 9013 700 2013 0013 I 7 Descriptions Display SAM C2 B2 F12 EF5 EFE EF2 EF4 EFI EBP AGRP EF3 three efficiency define ascending having are upper keV The The current corresponding are calculated keV changed The Description NOTE: lbrary in sequence. The the initially initialized energy energy display energy and and points parabola current six the when acquire —3. 0. 113. 276. The defines to represents energy points 180465 curve. highest energy (EN1-EN6) break tolerance any 1. 55073 group 38780 0. 0. 3. 4. 1. 2. (EN set ISO generating 0000 display “F” 0013 9—3 337 634 254 733 053 595 AID to occurs. group valid to 1, the (EN, values ID point 1 group (DGRP) pushbutton 0. and efficiency The EF1; an point function group (ETOL) when group acceptable Values EF) the six versus (EBP) EN2, 1 the with when at and on points actual performed number isotope when which parameter the parameter the of or entered efficiency s EF2; acquire performed power the on should second dual energy tolerance initiated EN3, transition the desired. identification first for as is parabola group data is be is applied. three. entry (EF1—EF6) a listed EF3) these on initialized initially step entered by (+) spectrum (AGRP) the from depressing define (EN2, in parameter between in detector The data report. the an the Either set for parameters first parameters to auto the EF2) in isotope spectrum lower to 350.0000 the the the 2.000 can lower job to be Parameter Description ( parabola and therefore must be below the value of the EBP parameter. The second three entries (EN4, EF4; EN5, EF5; EN6, EF6) define the upper parabola and therefore must be above the EBPparameter (preferably above 500 keV). Al, Bi, Cl The coefficient (Al, Bi, Cl, A2, B2, B2, C2) parameters are A2, B2, C2 initially set to 0•2 If the coefficients of the lower (Al + Blx + Cl x ) and upper (A2 + B2x + 2C2x parabolas are known, the dual parabola detector efficiency) curve can be defined by entering the known coefficient values for the corresponding Al, Bi, Cl, A2, B2 and C2 parameters. The coefficients of the dual parabola detector efficiency curve can be determined based on the values entered for the energy (EN1—EN6)versus efficiency (EF1—EF6)parameters by performing the COEFFS function. HT The hold time (HT) parameter is initially set to 0. The value entered for the HT parameter is the time differential in seconds (S), minutes (M), hours (H), days (D) or years (Y) between the time the analysis sample was collected and the time that data acquisition on the analysis sample was performed with the time unit (S, M, H, D or Y) selected by depressing the ( NXTV pushbutton. This value is converted to seconds and used in calculation of the decay listed for the identified isotopes in the isotope identification report. SAM The sample size (SAM) parameter is initially set to 1. The value entered for the SAM parameter is the sample size in units and must be greater than 0. This value is used in calculation of the activity in microcuries per unit of sample volume listed for the identified isotopes in the isotope identification report. A value for any of the AID status parameters is entered as follows: 1. Set the display cursor to the desired parameter using the CRSRpushbutton. 2. Enter an appropriate value for the selected parameter at the operand pushbutton array and depress the ENTERpushbutton. The value entered is displayed for the selected parameter. ( 9-4 Output Isotope Identification Report Function The ISO ID function can be selected for the Fl parameter by depressing the NXTV pushbutton or for any “F” parameter by entering its 3—digit select code (601) at the operand pushbutton array and then depressing the ENTERpushbutton. The ISO ID function can be performed either by depressing the corresponding “F” pushbutton or as a step in an auto lob sequence. When the ISO ID function is selected as a step in an auto lob sequence, it is performed on the data spectrum in the current acquisition group rather than the current display group. The ISO ID function can be terminated at any time by depressing the STOP pushbutton. The following is an example of performing the ISO ID function on the marker defined portion (from 21.737 to 2040 .460 keV) of a 2048—channel GeLi spectrum. In this example, the ISO ID function was assigned to the Fl parameter (Status Page 4) and performed by depressing the Fl pushbutton with the line printer (LP) assigned to the 101 parameter (Status Page 4) for output of the peak search report and then the isotope identification report. NOTE: When the 101 parameter (Status Page 4) is blanked to select the CRT display, the two reports are displayed following the last line of the current status page. Peak Search and Isotope Identification Reports RUN * = SRCH FRM 21. 737 TO 2040. 46i LT = 1000. CT = 1017. 00000 HW(0’ = 3. 00000000 HW/E = 0. 000000 SENS = 000000 PN LEFT PW CENT FWHM BKGND AREA XER CTS/SEC 1 82 11 :37. :33 1. 865 17259 3495:3 a 75 34. 95800000 2 117 9 121. 94 1. 740 11858 32210 0. 73 32. 20950000 3 131 10 136. 34 1. 144 11440 3905 4. 19 3. 905000000 4 161 9 165. 73 1. 918 9671 8483 1. 97 8. 482500000 5 251 8 254. 76 a..334 7576 586 21. 41 0. 586000000 6 275 8 278. 81 1. 407 7176 437 27. 83 a 437000000 7 308 5 310. 33 1. 659 4130 237 38. 89 0. 237000000 8 387 10 391. 42 1. 305 7535 6801 2. 17 6. 801000000 9 508 14 512. 78 1. 643 8687 1731 7. 99 1. 731000000 10 658 10 661. 27 1. 565 5950 23901 0. 79 23. 90100000 11 812 $ 813. 40 1. 928 4120 427 21. 80 0. 427000000 12 895 10 897. 65 1. 843 6190 11614 1. 33 11. 61400000 13 1171 11 1172. 88 2. 285 2469 32474 0. 60 32. 47350000 14 1274 8 1274. 29 2. 524 656 32114. 56 0. 032000000 15 1331 11 1332. 21 2. 346 1062 28046 0. 62 28. 04550000 16 1460 11. 1460. 71 3. 078 611 129 28. 59 0. 128500000 17 1836 12 1836. 10 2. 751 198 5539 1. 39 5. 539000000 PEAK SEARCH DONE 9-5 ml ISOTOF’E HLIFE ENERGY AE:UND X EFF LIC:.’LIS ( NA—22 2. SOY 7. 74133E—01 1274. 600 99. 95 0. 31057:30 0. 000360497 K—40 1. 26001E+09Y 1. 00000E-i-O0 1460. 700 10. 70 0. 2730350 0. 011887700 CO—57 270. OOD 4. 05641E—01 122. 100 85. 60 4. 43:2700 0. 056520600 136. 400 10. 60 CO—SO 5. 26Y :3. 81132E—01 1173. 200 99. 90 0. 3369990 0. 292979000 1332. 500 100. 00 SE—75 120. 40E:’ 136. 000 55. 60 279. 600 25. 00 KR—88 2. 80H •155 000 6. 80 EP—5 64 OOE’ 2 24574E—02 514 000 93 0 0 EE3E340 0 .411100O Y—88 106. 70D I. 02592E—O1 898. 000 93. 40 0. 4459740 0. 735042000 1836. 100 99. 40 CE’—103 450 ooc s E2602E—01 EO0 100 00 4 5343700 0 o:s:o:ioo SN—113 115. 20D 1. 21360E—01 391. 700 100. 00 1. 2540000 0. 120804000 c—i: :o 0ü’ 3 7aO57E—01 EEl :io 4 EO 0 E:.3330 0 12E..7EOOci CE—139 140. OOD 1. 76334E—01 165. 900 80. 00 3. 7330000 0. 043523000 EU—i52 14. OUY 121. :300 33. 20 EU—154 7. 84Y 9. 18602E—01 1274. 800 33. 60 0. 3105310 0. 000899244 123. 100 40. 50 ELI—155 5. 00Y 86. 500 33. 50 HG—203 46. SOD 5. 44182E—03 279. 200 81. 50 2. 0536000 0. 129651000 FA—::: 27 40D 1 40353E—04 11 900 : 00 1 7:9E500 E ‘E7:100000 NP—239 2. 35D 0. 00000E+00 277. 900 12. 10 2. 0682100 > E+37 Al = -17. 8747000000 A2 = 10. 38780000000 B’1 = 6. 486250000000 B2 = -3. 55073i00000 Cl = —0. 71066300000 0. 1:30455000000 EE:P = 276. 000 ENTCIL = 2. 000 HT I M = 30283200. 00000 SAM = 1. 000000000000 NOTE: The DECAY, %EFF and UC/US parameters are only computed for the prime line of each isotope, i.e., the first lihe entered in the library for the isotope. The upper and lower limits of computed values listed in the output report are iO and 7iO respectively. Values above or below these limits are listed as >E+37or ( 9-6 Peak Search Report Parameter Descriptions Parameter Description RUN # Current run number. SRCHFRM/TO Energy in keV of left/right marker channels. LT Current elapsed live time in seconds. CT Current elapsed clock time in seconds. HW(O) Average number of channels at the full width half maximum points of GeLi peaks or an estimate of the number of channels at the full width half maximumpoints of the Nat peaks at channel 0 (zero intercept of the variable FWHMcurve). HW/E Rate of change in the number of channels at the full width half maximum points of Nal peaks with respect to the square root of energy (slope of the available FWHMcurve; equals 0 for GeLi peaks). SENS Sensitivity level of peak extraction process with respect to background. PN Sequential number of peak (from left to right) within marker defined area. LEFT Channel location of the left limit of the peak. PW Peak width in channels. CENT Energy of peak centroid in keV. FWHM Full width half maximumof peak in keV. BKGND Background counts within peak area. AREA Net area (total counts minus background counts) of peak. %ER Percent error in area calculation determined by taking the square root of the area plus two times the background, divided by the area. CTS/SEC Counts per second calculated by dividing the area by the current elapsed live time in seconds. 9-7 Parameter DECAY Isotope %EFF HLIFE %ABUND ISOTOPE ENERGY Identification Report Parameter Calculated where where HL C D decay of T H Description or K detector (Eff minutes Energy Isotope Percent Percent listed Half i.e., equation In Eff Eff atoms billions = Eff = = life Descriptions A/A 0 eA = = = = = A based Eff (D) = A line identified. efficiency abundance (M), + 9—8 remaining. efficiency 2 curve. +B of is: = A is + Bx of decay In of identified at Half Elapsed Number Radioactive Hold H+C. Number +B(ln on = as (In Bx years hours Eff + the identified eT follows: a Cx x) + life fit time and of end x) of + of (B) (H), Cx 2 ) clock to of of identified The of +C(In the are x energy isotope in from of the radoactive radioactive (In = identified days decay seconds. isotope equation detector parabolas the In or x) 2 predetermined The Isotope x) 2 x. real line (D), total in constant isotope efficiency The from seconds time from years at for isotope collection nuclei nuclei Library. on derivation the isotope calculation of log in isotope = (Y), energy (S), the acquisition dual ln2/HL at remaining in log curves seconds. time fraction library. time scale, parabola library. of line of the (T): to in 0. decay seconds. ( ( ( SAM HTIM ENTOL A2, EBP Al, UC/US B2, B], C2 Cl on sample Sample and Hold Energy curve detector Energy Coefficients (A2 calculate V Y NOTE: G L N Ap C where H HL K of Calculated per the activity actual + unit time in B2x analysis = = = = = = = = was = tolerance = size break 9-9 keV. efficiency. If of in activity + energy collected KC in sample (oL) C2 ApeK/LYNGV activity seconds of Abundance Sample Conversion Elapsed Efficiency Hold counts. Radioactive Half C Elapsed Net point units < sample lo’er x’) A io8, (+) area Tisted is life time (o): of Ke volume. parabolas of as size in between of live and clock (Al dual of was volume. of follows: K(C+H)/LYNGV the keY in (% identified factor (% in identified or decay the peak time + seconds. performed. parabola the following EFF/100) or volume between ABUND/lOO). Bix The lime the used real of (total isotope = factor + 3.7 equation acquisition time C1x 2 ) that isotope for time isotope in detector the of counts x approximation determining units. the library. data io detector of (e-1) and ln2/HL. calculated in analysis acquisition for in disintegrations/sec/pC. acquisition minus upper efficiency in C seconds. calculation seconds. at background centroid energy is in used seconds. to energy. BR—82 SE—75 FIS—?6 ZN—ES CLI—SE 00—58 CO—SO 00—5? FE—59 MN—SE ‘DR—Si MN—54 K—42 Ec—4E K—40 IRR—41 CL—38 NA—24 BE—? NFI—22 assigning pushbutton The LIST button The Fl List ISOTOPE The pushbutton printout LIST LIST Isotope TAB or TAB TAB 1260011520. the function for array Library of any LIST function function with HLIFE the 120. 244. 270. 314. and 35. 26. 71. “F” 44. 27. 9: 12. 3?. 15. 53. TAB can 5. 5. 2. the standard I. 2. Table then 4L3H 40E:’ 00c:’ 40H parameter IOM 26Y 30E:’ 0€iE:’ EOE:’ 8i3[:’ 5?H 013[:’ 40H 3Oc 83H 30I1 OOH EOY 30D be is can function line Y performed terminated Function depressing be printer isotope 1215. 1115. 1039. 1332. 1173. 1291. 2112. 1811. 1099. 1120. 1293. 1524. 1460. 216?. 1642. 1368. 2754. 1274. 776. 554. 279. 619. 264. 136. 559. 810. selected 136. 122. 192. 142. 846. 320. 834. 4??. ENERGY to by the (LP) entering 700 300 600 by 100 000 600 800 2013 400 200 500 200 000 400 jj313 200 500 500 6013 3013 200 600 1013 800 500 :oo EJ30 700 500 700 library 400 100 500 600 600 the at depressing Fl for assigned any ENTER 100. 9-10 1013. 100. 100 ioa parameter XFIE:UND 83. 72. 25. 43. 59. 55. the 43. 50. 99. 99. 113. 85. 44. 15. 30. 56. 99. 17. 10. 99. 44. 32. 99. ia 99. table 5. time 9. 2. 0. its 9 Fl 00 00 00 ‘30 60 10 00 00 60 00 00 90 40 60 60 00 80 50 80 00 00 00 9 130 130 oo 00 70 00 80 00 85 3—digit 95 30 pushbutton. to on by the parameter the the depressing (Status corresponding select 101 following Page parameter by code the depressing 4) pages STOP (602) and “F” (Status depressing pushbutton. was at pushbutton. the the obtained Page NXTV operand the 4). push The by tLI ( ( ( KR—88 2. 80H 196. 100 37. 80 166. 000 6. 80 834. 700 13. 00 1529. 800 11. 30 RB—89 14. 90M 1030. 700 60. 00 658. 800 10. 70 948. 500 10. 00 1246. 400 46. 60 SR—85 64. 00D 514. 000 99. 30 SR—91 9. 70H 1024. 200 33. 00 653. 000 12. 00 749. 800 24. 00 Y—88 106. 70D 898. 000 93. 40 1836. 100 99. 40 ZR—95 ES. 00D 756. 900 54. 80 724. 200 43. 60 NB—94 20000. 25Y 871. 000 100. 00 702. 000 100. 00 N8—95 35. 10D 765. 800 99. 80 PU—103 39. EOD 496. 900 89. 00 610. 000 5. 40 RU—i06 367. OOD 621. 800 9. 80 AG—110M 260. OOD 657. 700 94. 40 763. 800 22. 60 884. 700 75. 10 937. 500 34. 40 1384. 200 26. 10 1505. 000 14. 00 CD—109 450. OOD 87. 800 100. 00 SN—113 115. 20E:’ 391. 700 100. 00 58—122 2. 80D 564. 000 63. 00 58—124 60. 40D 1691. 000 48. 30 602. 600 98. 20 58—125 2. 77Y 427. 950 29. 60 176. 290 6. 30 463. 510 10. 00 600. 770 18. 40 606. 820 5. 20 636. 150 11. 20 1—131 8. 04D 364. 500 82. 40 284. 300 5. 80 637. 000 6. 90 1—132 2. 30H 667. 700 99. 20 522. 600 16. 40 630. 200 14. 00 772. 600 75. 90 954. 500 17. 90 1—133 20. 30H 529. 500 89. 00 875. 300 4. 40 1—135 6. 70H 1131. 600 26. 80 526. 500 16. 40 1038. 800 10. 00 1260. 500 34. 90 1457. 600 10. 00 1678. 300 11. 80 9-11 :: CS—134 BA—133 I::5—j37 BA—140 LA—14@ CE—139 CE—141 EU—152 SH—153 CE—144 EU—154 HF—181 EU—155 W—187 HG—203 AU—198 BI—214 RA—226 1600. 140. 284. 30. 40. 12. 46. 32. 14. 42. 23. 46. 16. 2. 7. 7. 5. 2. 20Y IOY OOY 22H 79D OOc:. OOD 81.3H 40E:. OOY :34y 00Y SOD 90H EOD 7OD 02Y 02Y 1596. 1407. 1274. 1086. 1112. 1004. 1120. 1238. 1764. 1120. 1764. 604. 569. 661. 795. 537. 356. 486. 162. 303. 925. 815. 328. 304. 384. 276. 165. 145. 103. 133. 696. 344. 121. 964. 778. 123. 723. 873. 996. 105. 482. 133. 685. 345. 134. 479. 411. 279. 609. 609. 295. 352. 81. 86. 800 600 300 200 900 400 000 300 200 600 900 100 700 900 :30i3 600 100 500 800 200 500 900 500 800 000 200 800 000 000 800 100 300 800 200 300 300 200 500 200 700 200 300 700 800 300 400 200 000 000 400 400 700 100. 9—12 16. 86. :34. 98. 23. 14. 12. 80. 45. 95. 30. 55. 23. 21. 49. 28. 10. 24. 33. 31. 15. 16. 17. 33. 10. 40. 19. 17. 11. 10. 22. 83. ::. 41 32. 12. 10. 81. 26. 47. 95. j7 17. 18. 35. 43. 14 16. 6. 4. 6. 1. 6. 10 00 00 20 60 00 00 00 60 80 60 00 90 0i 50 20 00 00 10 40 80 30 50 20 20 40 @0 30 40 60 30 50 10 60 40 70 00 50 00 00 00 10 50 50 60 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 60 An _PAGE versus the and operand NP—239 (Al, The pushbutton Calcu PFs—233 The HT CI 81 Al ENE ENS EN4 EN3 EN2 ENI ETOL DGRP example COEFFS COEFFS upper COEFFS B], late efficiency 350. pushbutton —0. 6. —17. 1173. Cl, (A2 Efficiency 661. 391. 279. 165. or 486250 of 87. function function function 5000D 71066 2. for A2, + 8747 Status 600 200 700 200 900 800 000 B2x (EF1—EF6) any 27. B2, I 7 2. array + Curve Page is “F” can is :o 35D 40D C2) C2 performed, performed and parameter SAM C2 82 A2 EF5 EF6 EF4 EF3 EF2 EF1 EBP be AGRP 7 x 2 ) parameters parameters Coefficients showing selected then 228. 106. 103. : 277. 311. parabolas 99. 98. 0. —3. 10. 276. by depressing it 100 400 700 500 100 by 900 400 900 180465 the calculates depressing for 1. 55073 38780 (Status 0. 0. 1. 2. 3. 4. (Status entering 0000 Function 9—13 entered based 000 634 337 254 053 733 595 AID the 22. ii. 18. 12. 13. 38. I 9. 6. the Fl Page Page 50 80 00 00 on 60 10 50 ‘30 its the and parameter and ENTER values 7) 3—digit 7). corresponding displays calculated of the pushbutton. entered select by lower the depressing values values for code (Al “F” the and pushbutton. (603) is for energy the as B] the at NXTV follows: x coefficnt the (EN1-EN6) + Cl When x ) versus 256 of or data display represents the to pushbutton array compression channel number compression The Graph For The NOTE: is plotted which for the example, “F” channels GRAPH GRAPH channels and any efficiency energy Efficiency and from pushbutton spectrum For the then in energy “F” array the an function ratio function ratio the 1 GRAPH of entering to to parameter depressing versus expanded graph the first be and 4096 on on of Curve is (4096/16 is spectral used automatically the 16:1 the 256 function then can is efficiency not display, and 16 performed vertical Function horizontal for by display data selected, be required. selects the depressing represents = entering display display selected 256) ENTER is channels i.e., curve. assigned. (1,000,000 of a by selected; and 16:1 a (each the with of The the pushbutton. entering its 1 graph the for is = the energy starting compression 3—digit When compression adequate the the “F” 1:1, ratio point 9-14 graph The of therefore, counts Fl markers pushbutton 2=2:1, a the the between versus equalling compression select at parameter compression of dual to channel GRAPH vertical the ratio ratio and provide efficiency code entry 3 parabola the energy corresponding = depress 16 or by number function 3:1, 1. energy ratio (604) ratio times of a = a depressing 256—point versus Each good a 44:4, 100%). curve, detector the number 1 at number selects the scale prior is point the graphic XPND efficiency performed energy to bracket the operand to of etc. graph can efficiency the the at displayed data depressing pushbutton. the NXTV representation be number “F” per A for the operand with spectrum curve. any pushbutton 1:1 channel) parameter a pushbutton first curve 4096— of a ( which Firmware firmware Peak NOTE: The The INSTALLATION Automatic Standard Search must The pairs) be be Automatic Package installed Isotope installed Isotope which Library (47—0057) on must Identification Isotope on the the be Firmware consists installed Firmware Identification and either of Package Option on four Option 9-15 the the 512 Package consists board Firmware Standard board x 8 (70—2434). EPROM’s of requires (70—2434). or Option six Special 512 (two that board x 8 Isotope firmware the EPROM’s (70—2434). Automatic Library pairs) (three The Package AID ND600 to decay, table, five The output and graph automatic provides entering Tr’H assigned each functions depressing selected an ISO S values set-up the pushbutton. ISO the display curve, Permits COEFFS LIST the units. Outputs GRAPH for 101 detector efficiency Calculates Lists Page Displays N I an LL, is auto PEC energy the functions: Automatic energy automatic activity ND600 ID device. Function ID any of the energy TAB calculate 7). efficiency for paramters energy, the isotope function and energy Function analysis the entry for the its a to number Function efficiency isotope Automatic a is Function peak defining curve report coefficients Function break the the tolerance, graph (47-0058) any select for I I acquire I MV’ assigned other Automatic that automatic line F N and automatic isotope identification Isotope efficiency percent (600) corresponding versus coefficients each I extraction of can curve. sequence. ‘,rL... CAT parameter in of library point identifying of (Status of code the functions (601) display a spectral curve an Al (604) group also channels (603) dual the peak to (602) “F” the efficiency identification Identification isotope of and Any Isotope abundance, peak (60X) a Isotope table dual be isotope curve parabola Page the status particular based hold of process determined numbers, Q six When of of by data performed report, can the search the dual from at parabola the and the energy “F” N I in time depressing 7). coefficients, Identification N the parameters the isotope, I isotope be identification parameters channels the s functions any which dual parabola pushbutton. detector performed Included Identification 1 list percent sequentially and report “F” report values 101 Package the isotope to versus one during isotope as detector parabola 4096. parameter, the device. identification run corresponds half-life, a the of 1-N and at entered efficiency can curve, are efficiency and sample step by efficiency number, (Status Package library. the provides the the by setup, NXTV where library The then the be in AID The which for of AID of require installation. efficiency curve. (EN, point DGRP, Al, RUN—Current parabola EBP—Energy EN1-EN6, c:’i3RP calculated parabolas (Al RUN days isotope sample identification ENI EN: SAM—Sample on ETOL—Energy EN5 ENS EN2 EN4 ftJ HT—Hold Cl E:I SAM ETOL six four NUCLEAR installation. the Automatic Bi, Status + Status EF) 512 Schaumburg, (D) at Telephone require 512 Blx analysis Golf the AGRP—Current was Cl, library which or on occurs. 117::. —‘3. x (EF1-EF6) used time EF1-EF6—Energy energy Firmware 155. 391. 279. 551. j7 x 8 + and years A2, Parameter collected the Parameter 87. 8 EPROM’s the report. Cl 7. 71065 1. 1. break Isotope The transition EPROM’s when sample Meacham size run in :3745 for tolerance (312) dual B2, DATA 0130 800 200 600 7013 200 9130 x2) ‘3130 ‘3013 Firmware Illinois (Y) seconds and Standard determing number. in 7 I C2—Coefficients point and values parabola Option between 884-3621 generating and units Identification the was (three 60196 display Roads Display Descriptions from (two iNC upper the (±) in actual (5), performed. Option of which A’3RP EE:F EF1 EF3 EF5 EF4 EF2 F12 EFS C2 82 HT board keV Isotope (EN1-EN6) time firmware firmware the in detector detector the volume. minutes (A2 and the keV which energy time lower that define (70-2434) board 350. + Package acquire isotope Library between 3513. —: 10. ‘3. of the B2x data (M), efficiency. efficiency pairs) pairs) defines to 180465 the versus listed (70-2434) six 4. 1. 2. 13 0. 3:37:313 551373 513130[:’ analysis upper + 00130 acquisitior hours group. consists lower points AID consists 595 254 ‘353 337 534 which for C2x2) the in the I the (H), Standard N Sales Tel: United Atlanta, Boston, Tel: 617/535-5665 404/284-1747 and States Mass. Georgia Service Isotope E:E—7 NA—22 NA—24 cL—:.s K—40 AR—41 a K—42 ISOTOPE C.F?—51 [*4—54 FE—C--’ HN—56 co—5? co—so I NUCLEAR ZN—ES cu—ss SE—75 BR—82 f\R—88 95—76 RE:—89 SR—S’S SR—91 ZR—9S and RU—103 NE:—9S NE t—° FIJ—1ii- AG—lION cc SN—1-13 58—124 :s—i 1—13:1 I—=• —4’- —44 —IM Facilities Canada i. Library 2’GOOIE+09Y HLIFE :14. 270. 244. 120. 1M’- Tel: 5::. 3t.’’ 15. 250. :3.7. Tel: Cleveland, Tel: :1.2. 27. Denver, 49.1 1-15. 44 Los 25. 3.5. 14. 64. 55. 39. 35. 2. •1. : 2. 50. i S. S. DATA 2. 9. 8. OCH 0D :33H :.o 40H 50Y :33[ 57H O0[:’ Angeles, frl[ —‘ME 714/898-7760 COD :M[ ion 25Y 303/755-6607 000 400 40H 216/331-5145 40H SOH 90N 00[:’ Table 70H 000 500 100 : 000 Mu[ ‘ni[. 400 200 04D ‘M[ -i, M Colorado i268. ±274. 21E7. Ohio 254. 1460. 1292. 1642. 1120. 1524. j:3j1. jji-’-- 2112. 129i. II?::. 1115. 13:3:2’. -1215. 1039. 1529. 103:0. 1245. 1024. ENERGY 1:335, 477. 220. 1505. :346. :3::4. 13:34, i42. 1691. i92. I i::6. 559. 264. 1: 279. 775. 196. 619. 554. :334, 156. 65:3, 514. 94:3. Calif. 749. 653.. 756. 724. 495. 702’. 765. -‘‘- i 610. 657. :3:34, 937, 763. (47-0082) 9-4 3:91. INC 3.54. 284. 502. 22. 11.1 537, “l —4 — 600 600 500 400 100 600 500 700 700 500 100 : 900 600 :uki 200 600 500 500 200 100 200 Mliii 400 400 500 :300 200 200 600 500 inn-i 700 100 3.00 700 000 100 800 500 :300 700 000 200 400 LiMO :300 000 900 100 200 000 900 800 11MM 000 700 500 800 700 iiii 200 000 i-n-ni 700 000 500 3.00 600 000 MM Schaumburg, Tel: San Tel: Tel: New AE:UND 100. 100. 1ni 100. 100. 10. 1MM 99. 100. :2. 99. 44. 99. i0 17’. 99. :0. 1MM r- 15. 100. :35. iO. 44. 99. 50. 59. 43. 25. —‘ 83. -1::. 37. 43:. 72’. 11. 10. 50. 10. 3:3:, 99. 45. 0: -12’. 24. 54. 43, 99. 89. 99. 94. 34. 22. 75. 9. 14. 26. 0. 4:3, 98. 2’. :32. 9. 5. -: Francisco, 5. -1 312/884-3600 415/483-9200 212/962-3666 5. York, 5. 5. :0 95 :30 00 :35 00 00 90 l:jkl 70 00 90 00 00 00 :30 Ull 50 60 :30 00 90 4ii 60 60 00 00 00 00 10 00 00 00 00 80 00 80 30 00 70 00 30 00 50 4u 00 00 80 40 50 00 00 :30 Mu 40 40 10 50 00 40 si 10 MM ni 30 00 20 40 80 90 ii New Illinois Calif. York Tel: Washington, Frankfurt, Tel: Europe 1—1:2’ CS—n4 1—135 i—i:.:. cs—i::? BA—133 E:A—i40 LA—140 cE—139 cE—141 I SN—153 EU—iSa’ EU—154 EU—iSS HF—1:31 529952 U—i AU—19:3 SI—14 H’3—2’03 301/345-6766 RA—2’2’5 -—.,:: E—144 NP—2’39 — Germany D.C. . 1500. 140. 3 a’o. :0. ia. 40. 32. 45 -14. 2 6. 2 Tel: 42. Tel: Uppsala, London, 7. —: 46. i ,.— 4 7. S. 2’. 2’ ::OH FOH Specifications 10? Printed COY 20Y 790 2’2H 000 400 in-ic 80H OOY OH :34y OOY SOc: 600 700 Id 4MH 02Y 22733, 4Mc (018) 350 Sweden England 12’EO 1131. ±028 14’ 167:3 1596. 1407. 10:35. 1112’. 1274’.300 c:a 657 522. 975 529. 954 772 526 1004. 795 569 604 SEi. :56. 15-25-15 276 :0::. :84. 1120. 527 i62’. 1764. :ii4 12’3::3 32:3. 4:35 :315 11ri 1754 92’S 145. 155. 595 103 1:: 121 344 778, 964. in •i’’’ 72’:: :373 995 lOS. 25357 4:32’. 3:45. 1:: 479 •j34 n- 279. -i- 411. 509. 295 3:52’. :ii 3:00. 2’?? 105. 103:. 228’. 1 9:3, 99. U.S.A. 200 600 500 600 600 500 200 700 500 900 500 :oo 500 :oo — 600 700 nhii 400 200 ice 100 900 600 600 800 :300 200 -MM 900 500 MlI 200 500 a’oo 900 :300 000 800 000 000 ‘100 300 200 i.ii.i 300 :300 3:00 On-ni 200 700 too 200 ini 300 800 :i-ni 200 000 400 3:00 400 200 000 4MM 700 400 900 100 500 700 -n-ni 400 100 subject 100. Other Schaumburg, throughout your Please Representatives representative. 17 15. 14 99 26. 99 75 10 IM 15 ii. :35 is 9:3 :34. - i2’ :0. 10/77 22 14 95 45 23. 21 :30. 49. lii 28 33 31. 24. 15 10. 17. 15 3:3 40. ‘j9 4 ii 10 4 22’. 17. :33. 41 12’. : 25 95. 10 :31. 17. 4 5 17. 4 43. 14 1:3 15 : 5 12’ 13 1 11 22’. 18. 5 5. 9. 20 90 00 40 90 90 :3i 00 00 40 40 HM so 00 00 •1o 60 00 00 60 20 local 80 20 60 M 00 00 10 00 00 90 50 40 40 20 :0 00 20 3:0 40 Sales 50 50 10 70 to :0 50 40 write 00 00 00 50 MM 10 50 50 MM 00 00 00 00 LIM 00 MM 00 50 50 10 50 [I 00 00 :30 50 PS change. and the or 1037 Illinois call world. Service located 2.5 for a a ( ( ( of depressing 300 selected Select the any by digital ratios denominator code ENTER report monitoring bracketed DESCRIPTION The net The lapping the positioning other areas, one Digital ND600 of functions dgital at Code pushbutton. ratios the regions of function an digital by the gross the live selected Digital Ratios optional for setup, the ratios the NXTV digital during can in any areas ratios left is display any Package functions Ratios displayed be When output of function ND600 hardcopy DIGITAL pushbutton. Mnemonic and or ratios data memory functions the assigned combinations right cursor Package the 12 digital provides acquisition. functions DIGITAL are at for digital ENTER peripheral group. RATIOS markers to Code the to can as the The either ratios permits the follows: operand three be selected ratios. pushbutton is of RATIOS CHAPTER 3—digit Either desired can sequentially assigned list, net the The device. 10-1 firmware denominator one markers of of monitoring Activates markers to Function be pushbutton and Fl, the package any The any permit and “F” select specified PACKAGE or “F” X is gross to F2, net all of ratios region freeze parameter as to depressed, parameter, controlled a the specifying selected the code or defined F3 bracket either particular up also areas region array gross are as or 12 bracketed status DIG to (47-0071) and permits either digital F4 dynamically 12 the in (Status area for and the operational RATIO ratios the parameter of mnemonic entering digital overlapping update. either numerator “F” that any the numerator then mnemonic of generating ratios, by Page or parameter, any status numerator ratio. parameter the ratios the depressing restoring the Any computed (Status code region 4). functions: net deleting left or display or 3—digit or code between of denominator or a When non—over and for the summary or by each Page the gross the each of for right any select (PAGE digital the 4) of area 7) Select Code Mnemonic Code Function ( 301 RATIO LIST Outputs the digital ratios list at the input/output device selected for the 101 parameter (Status Page 4). 302 FREEZE Permits visual monitoring of digital ratios during accumulation by freezing the periodic update of the status display. INSTALLATION The Digital Ratios Packages consists of four 512 x 8 EPROM’s(two firmware pairs) which must be installed on the Firmware Option board (70—2434). OPERATION DIGITAL RATIOSFunction The DIGITAL RATIOSfunction is selected for the Fl parameter (Status Page 4) and performed as follows: 1. Select Status Page 4. 2. Set the display cursor to the Fl parameter using the CRSRpushbutton. 3. Enter 300 at the operand pushbutton array and depress the ENTERpushbutton. DIGITAL RATIOSis displayed for the Fl parameter. 4. Set the display cursor to the PAGE parameter using the CRSRpushbutton. 5. Enter 7 at the operand pushbutton array and depress the ENTERpushbutton. Status Page 7 is displayed. 6. Depress the SHIFTpushbutton to select the right (>>) direction and depress the F1/F2 pushbutton. The DIGITAL RATIOSparameters as shown and described below are displayed on Status Page 7. ( 10-2 DIGITAL RATIOS Status Parameter Display - FA‘3E [‘IG PATh:’ NO PATIO LMFK NUll AREA LMF:K DEN AREA 1 0. :318 17:3N 221:17 178’3 270:1 2 0. 612 2L32N 3493 20213 57Il3 381 980G 71:32 :174513 973 4 0. 129 1745N :347 980N 6570 8 i. 325 98013 7182 1:N 11 7 0. 266 9806 ( 17813 27’31 :3 297 980N 6570 ±78N 22117 10 ‘:3.‘:336 174513 97 17813 2703± 1:1 0. 532 202N 3493 9:3’ZIN 6570 12 L3.325 98013 7182 ±78N 22117 Lt1RK PMF:K 2047 D‘3P P ± DIGITAL RATIOS Status Parameter Descriptions Parameter Description NO Ratio number 1 — 12. RATIO Ratio value in fixed decimal notation (0.000 to 99999). LMRK Numerator region left marker channel number and N or G for net or gross area; respectively. NUM AREA Numerator region area (1 to 108_i). A value of 108 will displace N or G character. LMRK Denominator region left marker channel number and N or G for net or gross area, respectively. DEN AREA Denominator region area (1 to 108_i). A value of io8 will displace N or G character. 10-3 d. the the 4. b. c. ratio. a. ratio. codes 5. numerator array parameter, depress 2. MSPN 3. NOTE: any After DIGITAL DGRP either RMRK Parameter LMRK 1. spectral ratio. overlapping and selecting Enter Enter at Enter Define Set Enter Bracket Set Enter as pushbutton; the The the the RATIOS depressing the the or entering ENTER ND NN GN the region. GD operand markers denominator the numerator display display the and desired (63) (43) (46) (66) or net desired Set—up or pushbutton. non—overlapping entering the to the can to to pushbutton or to cursor by cursor Current Current Current Description define display define define define or gross respective setting ENTER be of spectral denominator to positioned to the the area display right left the the the the the the group the pushbutton array, selected DIGITAL net of marker region gross gross desired net DGRP left marker display region the number group area area to and for and area area spectral 10-4 ratio with parameter channel bracket RATIOS ratio any channel of after of in then right number. cursor of of at the any the the by of the the NO the depressing each channel region spectral entering the any spectral number. group markers. first function number. spectral spectral operand using parameter 12 spectral marker to bracketed can ratios number the the region one region the as region region pushbutton be channel CRSR LMRK described region as of using ENTER selected as at as the follows: by as as pushbutton. the the the and the following using the the the number pushbutton. array denominator operand numerator above, CRSR then and denominator numerator markers the and entered entry. the pushbutton. MPOS two—letter pushbutton RMRK as of of of the the and of the ( summary the parameter and NOTE: The In However, b. The The a. operand desired RATiO 9. depressing used 7. and parameter, 8. array, group, as 6. performed the NOTE: regions regions this the summary performed following RATIO RATIO right then to Enter Enter Restore Delete Delete Repeat example, gross and LIST repeat ratio define of to When pushbutton report if depressing marker due (Status one each in the the then LIST LIST depressing RD RN Function numerator report NO any all any steps the is to the by steps the minus spectral will channel (73) (76) ratio depressing function an function the in the defined depressing order Page parameter, markers defined 101 numerator is 3, example the array, be to the 1 to RATIO number (—) displayed desired. and 4 the restore 4) (GN) in parameter restore regions width, adlacent desired. ENTER and pushbutton ratios can is an for to 2 ratio minus and the performed whenever LIST the of 5 bracket overlapped of or or output entering be the the to then i.e., the to ENTER by following pushbutton. Up by characters gross denominator Fl terminated (—) channel. function define Peak (Status be markers markers setting setting to summary and depressing of pushbutton pushbutton the defined denominator by 12 a by either pushbutton. ratios the entering change setting the and ratios spectral Page 10-5 depressing the the was the to per to RATIO However, report at net of staggered bracket of can are bracket last display display 4) assigned line any the can any with and the the in or A located be is region line (GD) LIST display generated gross ENTER time limitation be blanked (2) following ratio left entering the obtained line the the cursor cursor these defined of at array. summary to of marker by corresponding areas in denominator by within the printer the numerator the pushbutton. group a any depressing to setting regions to to ratio. R current by operand of by two—letter Fl of and select (7) any the at group the report. more the setting (LP) is numerator parameter the at the desired. desired ratio the region must CRT RATiO status the the assigned which than region peak pushbutton the definitions “F” display the display, codes operand NO be CRT STOP one ratio pushbutton. of page. and channel LIST (Status defined was markers of parameter, the display, to at memory cursor the denominator pushbutton. NO originally function. the array, pushbutton the ratio. the can Page ratio. and to either 101 to be select 4) the Summary Report ( DIGITAL RATI’:’s NLIMERAT CiP C’EN i:iN I NAT OR NC RATIO GRP LMRK MN PEAK N/G AREA GRP LNRK [IN PEAK N/G AREA I 0. 131 2 42 14 51. 000N 53:E 2 42 14 51. 000G 40995 2 Ci. g:3j 2 59 12 ES. OOCIN 2295 2 59 12 65. ØOiJi3 o : Ln:n:IN : i: I.Illij j-4_ : E1 to i: 5 t::.i i :EE46 4 0 57’S 4 10 10 15 UIION 4 iii in i LIn0I 5 0 E.9E i i :‘i ,.1uI’IN 4::4 i :‘‘ ,.uni,, 5017’ 6 ü :s 17’ ..t : OflflN 17’ 16 ‘.i’.iu’ 7n ni-InN 7w Liw1Ii 57’E1 ‘ o .3tE :1 5 i i ‘ .1 LI i.iwIN 14 E i2 :1 .i i.i 4. ‘I . 2: uS i :2 IE :n uwwi- wI7’ 1 wi-InN :10 3S. 37 3 50 13 57. OUUU 14.’E; 31 59 21 70. 01-JON 5293 t 2 59 65. 030G 28323 Ii 0. 204 31 59 2:1 70. 0006 5781 12 :12 0. 001 2 59 12 65 Oi-JON 2295 :1 1.2046 185. 00i-3G 2126195 Summary Report Parameter Descriptions Parameter Description ( NO Ratio number 1 — 12. RATIOS Ratio value in fixed decimal notation (0.000 - 99999). N UMERATOR/G RP Numerator region group number. NUMERATOR/LMRK Numerator region left marker channel number. NUMERATOR/MW Numerator region marker channel width in number of channels. NUMERATOR/PEAK Numerator region peak channel location in fixed decimal notation (0.001 — 9999.999). NUMERATOR N/G Numerator region net (N) or gross (G) area indicator. NUMERATOR AREA Numerator region area (1 to 1o—1). A value of 10 will displace N or G indicator. ( 10—6 Parameter Description DENOMINATOR/GRP Denominator region group number. DENOMINATOR/LMRK Denominator region left marker channel number. DENOMINATOR/Mw Denominator region marker channel width in number of channels. DENOMINATOR/PEAK Denominator region peak channel location in fixed decimal notation (0.001 - 9999.999.) DENOMINATOR N/G Denominator region net (N) or gross (G) area indicator. DENOMINATOR AREA Denominator region area (1 to iO—i). A value of io will displace N or G indicator. FREEZEFunction The FREEZEFunction is performed by depressing the corresponding “F” pushbutton. when the FREEZEfunction is activated, it locks out the periodic update of the status display to permit live monitoring of the digital ratios during data acquisition. CAUTION: Since the FREEZEfunction locks out the periodic update of the status display, care must be exercised in its use as various parameter values and system functional displays may not reflect their true current state. The FREEZEfunction can be positively terminated by depressing the STOP pushbutton. If the SHIFTpushbutton is not depressed to change the direction after the FREEZEfunction is activated, depressing the corresponding “F” pushbutton a second time will also terminate the FREEZEfunction. 10-7 N UC LEAR DATA INC TFCHNICAL Golf and Meacham Roads Schaumburg, Illinois 60196 :: SPEC IFICATI0 NS Telephone (312) 884-3621 ND600 Digital Ratios Package (47-0071) The ND600 Digital Ratios Package permits monitoring Digital Ratios Status Parameter Display up to 12 digital ratios between net areas, gross areas or combinations of net and gross areas in overlapping 7 ::: DIG RATIO or non-overlapping regions in any memory group. NO RAT I L[IRK NUN AREA Lr1Ri< DEN AREA Either the net or gross area of any region bracketed 1 9. :j:3 178N 221:17 1786 279:I by the left and right markers can be specified as 2 0 612 292N 3:493 2926 5793 either the numerator or denominator for any of the 3 7. 3:31 98913 7182 :17456 973 12 digital ratios. The ratios are dynamically computed 4 9. 129 1745N 847 989N 6579 for monitoring live during data acquistion. The 6 9. 325 9:39i3 7182 178N 22117 package also permits generating a summary report at 7 9. 266 9:396 7182 17813 279::t an optional hardcopy peripheral device. :3 9. 297 989N 6579 178N 22117 JO 0. 936 17456 973 1786 27931 The Digital Ratios Package provides three functions: 11 0. 532 292N 3493 989N 6579 digital ratios setup, output digital ratios list, and 12 6. 325 98013 7182 178N 221J 7 freeze status update. Any of the digital ratios functions LlIRK I p’jp: can be assigned to any of the “F” status parameters D’3RP I by entering its select code (30X) and performed by depressing the corresponding “F” pushbutton. When Digital Ratios Status Parameter Descriptions any one of the functions is assigned to a particular “F” parameter, each of the other functions can be NO—Ratio number 1-12. sequentially selected for that parameter by depressing RATIO—Ratio value in fixed decimal notation (0.000 the NXTV pushbutton. to 99999). DIG RATIO Function (300) LMRK—Numerator region left marker channel number and N or G for net or respectively. Activates the DIG RATIO Status Display (PAGE 7) gross area, to permit specifying either the net or gross area of NUM AREA—Numerator region area (1 to 1081). A Q8 any region bracketed by the left and right markers as value of 1 will displace N or G character. either the numerator or denominator of any of the LMRK—Denominator region left marker 12 digital ratios, deleting any one or all defined ratios channel or restoring the markers to bracket the numerator or number and N or G for net or gross area, respectively. denominator region of any ratio. DEN AREA—Denominator region area (1 to 1081). Q8 RATIO LIST Function (301) A value of 1 will displace N or G character. LMRK—Current left marker channel number. Outputs the digital ratios summary report at the 101 device. RMRK—Current right number channel number. FREEZE Function (302) DGRP—Current display group number. Permits visual monitoring of the digital ratios during data acquisition by freezing the periodic update of the status display. The Digital Ratios Package consists of four 512 x 8 EPROM’s (two firmware pairs) which require the Firmware Option Board (70-2434) for installation. Digital Descriptions Digital I\D NO—Ratio channel channel RATIOS—Ratio channel (0.000-99999). number. gross NUMERATOR/KMRK—Numerator (0.00 NUMERATOR/MW—Numerator NUMERATOR/GRP—Numerator NUMERATOR/PEAK—Numerator NUMERATOR NUMERATOR Tel: Sales Atlanta, Boston, Tel: United 1 DIGITAL NO 11 1121 12 O-1). 2 1 3: 4 9 6 5 7’ E 617/535-5665 404/284-1747 and RAT ‘2’. g. 0. 0. ü o 0 g. 0. 22. 0. 35. States 1 (G) Mass. Georgia -9999.999). Ratios Service Ratios A 131 :318 081 835 896 i: 31 57’S 204 001 width location number. 37 05 I value area NUCLEAR and i: number RATIOS Facilities Canada I3RF’ in AREA—Numerator N/G—Numerator Summary indicator. Summary of 28 16 :1 16 :i 31 value in 2 3: 2 number 4 3: 2 1 fixed Q9 1-12. LrJRK in will Tel: Tel: cleveland, 42 Tel: 5’2i 59 22 11 17 Denver, 5 59 22 Los 59 fixed decimal DATA of Report Angeles, displace Report 714/898-7760 303/755-607 216/331-5145 channels. tiN NI_Ir1ERFjTOR 14 13: 12 lfl 18 ..i 16 Colorado i 13: 18 12 21 decimal Ohio Calif. region notation region region INC Parameter region region N region F’EAI< 65. 51. 57. i.i l 25. 3:0 57. 3:0. 70. ES. or mi notation Tel: Schaumburg, Tel: San Tel: G New net marker group 0 O’2iON 3,2’N ‘.niw I.11-1I.IN 0’2-II2IN MI-IkIN O121ON 0 012106 121i2’I21N 00013 area peak indicator. left Francisco, 312/884-3600 415/483-9200 212/962-3666 York, (N) N/G marker (1 or New to Illinois Calif. 153:3:21 187426 York 453:3:4 50617 ‘1 AREA 2295 53::36 5695 _.‘ 5781 2295 channel number. marker DENOMINATOR/GRP—Deñominator DENOMINATOR/LMR or channel DENOMINATOR/MW— (0.001-9999.999). DENOMINATOR/PEAK—Denominator indicator. DENOMINATOR (ito DENOMINATOR Tel: Frankfurt, Washington, Tel: Europe gross 529952 ‘3RF 301/345-6766 1O-1). 28 16 3:1 channel width 2 2 3: 4 location .1 2 2 1 (G) Germany LtIRI< D.C. area A 42 59 i’4 5’2i 17 in 4.. 22 59 59 59 value number. 12046 in number AREA—Denominator N/C—Denominator indicator. Tel: Tel: Uppsala, London, fixed DEN’JN MN 12 14 1’-’ 13: 18 Specifications .J.. 14 16 12 12 Printed 21 of 22733, (018) K—Denominator 1O Denominator decimal of Sweden England 15-25-15 185. in 25357 will channels. F’EAK 51. 57. 65. 3:0. i 7”.i 25. 65. 65. 1 I 70. NFITOR U.S.A. displace 000’3 000’3 0006 HmiIj 0121013 ‘.nio’ 0003 MMMIj 0’210N 00013 01210,3 000N notation subject throughout Other your Schaumburg, representative. Please Representatives 10/77 N/13 region region region local region region region Sales write to N 2126195 PS change. or :L87425 and the or net 40995 :46 4M335 506:17 1038 group marker Illinois G FIRER area 7’ 6823 call peak 2295 529:3 left world. Service located (N) El 2.5 for ( \ printer printer Data Data from DESCRIPTION of the between opHonal Receive The serial size which device on controller Model a The Printer All serial all a ND600 interface basic ND600 board 50 output half—width input status input/output must 33ASR and/or keyboard or is to data Type the ND600 ordered Digital ND600 interface 9600 connector can System be Serial is page ND600 communicator/controller circuitry D Automatic to magnetic installed be discipline. baud printed Firmware and/or the ND600 with System information Equipment from Input/Output and devices. to System Teletype slots (depending permit the for any the on circuit tape magnetic Send/Receive SERIAL contains Packages. any in system, the one Teletype and Corporation the cassette If data, and printer one Firmware board of more another Interface front INPUT/OUTPUT upon tape any the the or of control keyboard than which these with if (733 The firmware following of board CHAPTER device) channel, cassette Set, the system. Option the Model permits 11—1 one interface or ASR), input/output and serial Texas plugs housing various without and/or serial via required (733 status LA36 one board input/output XI or Input/output serial INTERFACE input/output into Instruments EIA also the additional ASR), tables of input/output punching paper Writer. transfer any (70—2434). RS-232—C the DEC input/output for serves peripheral of or and ND600 supporting tape writer. peripheral the the Model between (70-2437) transfer It as firmware paper interface reports reader, also Data eight DEC a interface Electronics devices serial 743 data tape, permits writer any rates Terminal generated ND600 available devices: pair the is or data transfer one to the and is 733 are TI keyboard. is serial be contained Enclosure. Systems communicator/ of required TI terminal peripheral selectable Transmt/ Terminal used by half— Teletype the terminal between output as or TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ( BCDlnput Output Code: 8—bitBCDcoded ASCII in a standard 8—level, 10—unit(11—unitfor Teletype) serial time code format (one start bit, an 8—bitASCII character, one or two stop bits) via EtA RS—232—CData Terminal Transmit/Receive Type D discipline. Binary Input/Output Code: Standard 10 or li—unit serial time code (one start bit, an 8—bit word and one or two stop bits) via EIA RS—232—CData Terminal Transmit/Receive Type D discipline. Input/Output Rates: Teletype — 110 baud. Termnal Printer/Keyboard —300 baud. Magnetic Tape Cassette (733ASR) — 300 baud. DEC Writer — 300 baud. Serial Data Communicator/Controller — Selectable from 50 to 2400 baud (or up to 9600 baud with hardware “handshake” discipl ne). BCDData Format: Eight characters per channel - Six BCDcoded digits of data, one space character, and one rubout (delete for Teletype) character; every tenth space and rubout are replaced by carriage return and line feed. Carriage return and line feed also follow the last channel readout. Printout of non—significant zeroes is suppressed (i.e., replaced by space). Binary Data Format: Four six—bitbinary bytes per channel with each byte transferred in the serial time code as the six least significant bits of the 8—bitword. Bit 8 of the 8—bit word is always logic 1 during transfer of the least significant binary byte. BCD Identification of Channels Containing over One Million Counts: The character ‘SM” is encoded in the first data digit and the remainder of the count over one million in the next five digits. BCDReadout Format for All Channels in the Current Display Group: Consists of the current elapsed acquisition live time, carriage return/line feed, first channel address, carriage return/line feed, first channel content and the content of each channel and the address of every 100th channel within the current display group. A carriage return/line feed occurs after output of the content of each channel whose address ends in nine and after output of every 100th channel address. Channel addresses are preceded by the character “@“ to distinguish them from channel contents. BCD Readout Format for Channels in Marker Defined or Intensified Regions: Consists of the current elapsed acquisition live lime, carriage return/line feed, start channel address, carriage return/line feed, start channel content, the content of each channel and the address of every 100th channel up to the stop channel, Stop channel address, and carriage return/line feed for the marker defined or each intensified region within the current display group. A carriage return/line feed occurs after output of the content of each channel whose address ends in nine and after output of every 100th channel address. Channel addresses are preceded by the character “@“ to distinguish them from channel contents. ( 11—2 rear 3. 4. 2. ND600 5. panel, (or ment damage saving NOTE: apparent, Board representative connectors installedas Prior 1. lotion INSTALLATION Dimensions: Part Power encoded Communicator keyboard respectively), the region BCD live the of Remove Locate If region Remove Carefully Number: to time, to to Readout (if a procedure the the Requirements: top cabinet Electronics within ensure after distinguish installing The included to command, notify shipping ND600 and in (two carriage the follows: command ac delivering the its the Standard Format full—size the or unpack reimbursement 70-2437. rear Control in power serial stop front 6—digit removal the for the which ND600 the with current Electronics Encloi them cartons covers return/line optional channel keyboard delivering Nuclear for panel, data input/output from +5 Serial the Word carrier the half—size board words the from from Vdc Intensified Electronics display from acquisition, the Serial shipment) for ND600 Input/Output such top address Format: system for connector region the Enclosure Data @ containing enable/disable must possible ND600 the feed, carrier any and board 0.5A. Input/Output shippng group. that device(s) home be ND600 Electronics Region component totals. and damage Enclosure. rear and start Bits the System notified reshipment. (8.5—in. data and to slot carriage office. the the 11—3 Channel cover 1 was component +12 Interface, cartons. OFF. channel Electronics Totals: then through from adjacent input/output, six incurred serial by or Vdc included within boards Enclosure Interface retaining I. display most notify setting The the return/line addresses x @ Consists address, input/output 7 Thoroughly If 5.2—in. top refer Serial side to and during 50 of 24 and damage Enclosure. the in the the on/off. the board(s), of mA. hours screws is six of the the to status nearest the Input/Output installed). of POWER ND600 the are 8—bt the transit. Chapter feed w.) least shipment, location the incurred after front inspect preceded total -12 and board peiTFrai input/output, for control current the significant Nuclear Electronics OFF/ON receipt Vdc remove board number II, each Firmware is of during the insert at noting interface by @ the word elapsed housing device(s), equipment intensified Data the of the the of 25 board digits, switch transit the it any Enclosure are top. counts Option front the mA. character into acquisition equip in is other instal— on is the the for in the Teletype 9. board Electronics 10. Teletype ND600 Electronics used b. NOTE: male opening harness of a. DEC rear as System, on 7. output 8. NOTE: Serial 6. NOTE: component that connector 570—2419 location the follows: one Lead panel such WRITER Connect Interconnect the Insert connector and Connect Insert Remove ND600 Input/Output interface System, end across If the (from If into Serial To Interconnection the (lowest that the the (ND—MMF) and slot the Enclosure. the Enclosure side and the ensure internal or interface the the rear the the the Electronic the the Serial Serial label Serial in on Input/Output 2 5-pin RS-232). connect an of device available 25-pin internal the top the inside, ac cover color panel the the proper interface the Interface cable Input/Output from Input/Output line front Input/Output of Serial in board rear board male mark by from the the female of connector the Enclosure, connector propagation cable cord the board harness option of performing the internal ND600 connector Input/Output board female System is the on Interface the board front. from at ND600 connector harness the inside housing Serial the number) is female according Interface Interface Interface the mating Electronics pins and insert Diagram ribbon cable installed top. of the on Electronics board of Teletype (contains Input/Output the facing 11-4 the of the mating designated following one the Interface in harness cable connector the board rear board daisy—chained Section. accordance Board is to ribbon 2 5—pin prior of enclosure inserted toward ND600 the to panel the a is connector and between Enclosure and 2 5—pin (70—2437) to a at device board steps, cable five TTY female on conveniently Interface shipment the Teletype the device of Electronics into the with and connector the on to right which female extending rear), being the interrupt on as other the the chassis the into ND600 insert the are the described Seral from when board are first appropriate rear are used fasten diagram chassis ordered any end other Enclosure located ordered the openings mount the signals, available applicable. from viewing panel Electronics for Input/Output (TTY, of available connector the factory. end) in mount the the the with shown connector ac of step separate connector serial Tl743 such device ascertain internal or between the rear outlet. the option the connector the 8. board on Enclosure ND600 that into ND600 of input/ or ND600 Interface rear being from into the cable 733, to the the the panel the the the ( V device between the Electronics from outlet. Enclosure Serial Controller located LA—36 NOTE: ND600 15. NOTE: 14. 13. line Interface on of b. 25—pin ordered 12. on a. other Enclosure. TI in Electronics Input/Output NOTE: 11. the step 743 the one DEC receptacle the Insert end) Connect Insert Connect Communicator/Controller Insert Connect Insert interface DEC into rear or female end 8. Electronics ac separate If the If Writer If ND600 board as 733 the is the the outlet. between Enclosure. the Writer of and Enclosure the the described the Serial the ordered Terminal the Interface Serial Serial Serial the the connector the 2 5-pin and on into 2 5-pin 2 5-pin either ribbon 25—pin System, iS—pin from TI ac ac the Interconnection Input/Output Enclosure. Terminal the the the separate 743 Input/Output Input/Output Input/Output line as line the in a rear female male male cable Printer female rear male board TI 2 5-pin follows: l5—pin connect step or designated ND600 743 cord cord of 733 panel Printer connector connector connector into from 8. and the connector or Interconnection connector extending female supplied female Terminal Interconnection Interface the 733 TI System, the the of the Interface Interface Interface interface 743 TI the internal Terminal rear 1 5—pin connector ND600 on on 743 connector on with designated or ND600 or Printer, from the the 11—5 board connect one panel 733 or the board board board the male ribbon cable RS—232 ribbon 733 System, the end Printer Terminal female and of Electronics designated TI or respectively. on strapped and bottom connector and the of the harness RS-232 743 a cable the cable the interunit the female and internal connect DEC TI card ND600 or rear Printer rear interface 743 rear the (contains 733 extending on for between Writer edge DEC Enclosure or panel card or panel rear of the use cable Terminal cable Electronics the the to 733 WRITER the connector rear edge as are a panel internal ribbon of male of a the conveniently Terminal from DEC harness the from 25—pin the as ordered the panel connector Serial Printer described card of on Serial the Writer ND600 cable the ND600 Enclosure cable the on the of between male controlling edge Printer bottom separate Input/Output the from ND600 the Communicator/ rear into to harness Electronics on Electronics located connector other in connector a ND600 the as panel the the are step rear conveniently the described ac end Serial of 8. ac of the fanfold Data on in that NOTE: The corresponding 1. 25—pin of device(s). covers corresponding input/output system. OPERATI rear Male NOTE CAUTION: 16. installed 17. the the the following Set the of Return Readout Connector After instruction 25—pin on respective the or (EIA the Prior user ON 4 The 20 7 2 6 5 3 as 1 the roll ND600 ac These completing respective this RS—232—C Do peripheral has signals to Procedure ND600 male serial serial are stock power will performing not Pin. referred manual device(s). procedures typical Electronics connector printer operate input/output input/output (in hamper to Electronics No. device Compatible) interconnection device(s) the compliance on to procedures paper the ND600 the the the operation assume on on—line Enclosure following operating respective ND600 the Enclosure. peripheral peripherial and and System with the communicator for data paper as of of System Serial data to follows: the EIA procedure, instructions 11-6 the device. by read-in ON. tape device(s) Clear Data Transmitted Data Signal Signal Request Received Protect device(s), cooling readout RS—232—C setting Serial Input/Output without (if Terminal Set to to interface Ground device Ground to Input/Output load the fans from the Send contained have Ready Data the Send replace specifications) Data POWER ND600 the and the front been Ready s cable Interface a appropriate may ND600 Teletype) the in panel, properly OFF/ON System Interface result is the front as System board(s) instruction available follows: top from panel, in installed device as switch damage and board(s) described to the and rear the top at with appropriate manual on and the the to serial and covers to the the the pins rear ( 2. k. 3. NOTE: h. of, select 300 d. LA36 b. 743 Printer c. j. Refer NOTE: f. i. 733 punch. e. Teletype a. NOTE: Teletype g. the key. Terminal Terminal Select Select Select Select Select Set Select SeIect3OCPS(300 Depress Set Set Set Set DEC to the for printer. the the If 733 the the If If internal punch printer 102 selection Writer the BCD the Status LINE Full 300 Full LA36 operating 743 Teletype Terminal the Printer Printer 733 is input/output baud formatted Duplex mechanism Duplex Terminal ON by SPEED desired, by Page DEC Terminal releasing of, setting by LiNE LINE/OFF/LOCAL Printer instructions Writer 4. by by switch releasing and baud) Printer punched substitute releasing releasing key. by the Printer device, readout POWER the PRINTER depressing by to PRINTER POWER releasing the LINE HI in paper includes the 102 to, the mode the (300 switch BAUD rocker LOC FDX a HALF instruction for the tape switch switch switch baud) magnetic 11-7 and the RATE/i a to 101 key. ON HDX switch is magnetic DUPLEX data LOW ON and located to desired to in pushbutton key. the LINE. 10 the for and tape manual DUPLEX SPEED to key rear. 101 key. following tape ON. ON in on cassette addition and the on key. as of LINE/OFF cassette switch follows: the depressing switch the in steps. 733 Teletype to to addition system panel hard ASR FULL. switch the copy, Terminal to (ASR paper to, BAUD to LINE. or ON version), engage tape instead RATE/ LINE. the __ 4. Set the display cursor to the 101 parameter using the CRSRpushbutton and depress the NXTVpushbutton to select TTY. ( NOTE: If only one serial input/output interface and peripheral device is included in the system, that device is always assigned as the TTYdevice. If more than one interface and device is included, the second device is assigned as the SU] device. The serial data communicator/controller channel is assigned as the SU2 device. 5. Set the display cursor to the 10 1/MODE parameter using the CRSRpushbutton and depress the NXTV pushbutton to select BCDO (BCDformatted output). 6. Set the display cursor to the lOl/bATA parameter using the CRSRpushbutton and depress the NXTV pushbutton to select ALL (all channels in the current display group), MRKR(the channels between the markers), ROl (the channels in the intensified regions of interest), TOT (the intensified region of interest totals) or STAT(the information in the current status page). NOTE: Only data records which are punched on paper tape or written on cassette where all channels (ALL)is selected can be properly read back into the ND600. 7. Depress the 101 pushbutton. Readout of the selected data to the selected device will now begin. Readout will continue until the selected data is completely readout, at whch time, readout is automatically terminated. Readout can be terminated at any time by depressing the STOP pushbutton. NOTE: During readout of spectral data, a marker is displayed at the channel currently being read out. 8. To generate a trailer (sprocket punches only) after punching a data record on paper tape at the Teletype, set the LINE/OFF/LOCAL switch to LOCAL and depress and hold the HEREIS key for a few seconds. s J- 4-” •iA-i‘ ‘. 1412) • C 11—8 W Sample Data Printout 37 @0 0 2907 393 25147 15551 1381 1412 1508 1523 1749 2002 1847 1699159’S” 1444 1478 1521 15/1 1542 1489 1506 1548 1580 1583 1569 1668 1608 1655 1888 1903 1997 2122 2082 2121 2155 2099 1997 133 1809 1850 1746 1670 1613 1544 1616 1461 1421 1499 1462 11462 1332 1517 1451 1397 1436 1436 1392 13514 1464 1366 • 11434 1461 1382 1368 1412 1395 14214 1440 11451 1430 1466 1371 1318 1361 1356 1229 1220 107? 106/ 982 9.2 927 901 911 906 934 887 909 853 10 86,5 853 849 851 808 786 795 803 834 @iOO 8314 893 1007 1186 1477 1896 2460 2991 3400 3/08 3808 3645 3145 2761 2207 1818 1479 1215 1093 9/3 731 712 767 ‘169 888 814 771 724789 734 757 738 794 78 801 804 828 789 823 833 810 855 853 849 841 8514 870 903 852 838 822 877 838 791 831 775 746 736 665 5/ 632 633 606 549 513 521 570 534 5144 556 536 519 504 513 568 554 513 502 465 403 429 429 432 422 483 51 720 889 1093 1259 1513 1618 1786 121 1679 1688 1459 12149 1020 841 @200 652 510 382 305 266 217 18/’ 211 2J1 22/ 296 387 5114 629 838 1015 1204 1241 1430 1380 1388 1282 1137 952 792 689 527 408 325 262 191 169 138 101 105 83 85 49 63 62 44 35 . 44 , 50 36 141 35 39 29 26 28 35 25 36 27 35 Sample Region Printout 37 ‘@182 _1432 , - 422 1483 51 720 889 1093 1259k’ 1513 ‘ 1618 1186 1821 1679 1688 1459 1249 1020 841 ‘@200 652 .510 382 305 266 217 187 211 211 227 296 387 514 629 838 1015 ‘ 1204 1241 1430 1380 1388 1282 1137 952 792 689 527 408 325 262 191 @231 Sample Totalization Printout 37 @1 0 12615 @6 (h;) @99 0 45303 @123 @1 82 0 ?2885 @206 @208 0 17494 @232 11—9 Data Read—inProcedure NOTE: If the serial input/output peripheral device interconnected to the ND600 System is either a Teletype or a 733 ASRTerminal Printer, a data record previously punched on paper tape at the Teletype punch or written on a magnetic tape at the 733 ASRTerminal Printer from all channels can be read into the ND600. 1. To read—ina data record punched on paper tape from the Teletype, set the START/FREE/ STOP switch to FREE, load the paper tape containing the data record into the Teletype reader with the leader (sprocket punches only) above the read head, and set the START/FREE/ STOP switch to START. 2. To read—ina data record written on a magnetic tape cassette from the 733 ASRTerminal printer, refer to the operating instructions in the instruction manual on the 733 ASRTerminal Printer for selection of, and read—infrom a magnetic tape cassette. 3. Select Status Page 4. 4. Set the display cursor to the 101 (or 102, if desired) parameter using the CRSRpush button and depress the NXTV pushbutton to select TTY. NOTE: If read—inof a data record written on a magnetic tape cassette is desired and the 733 ASRTerminal Printer is not assigned as the TTYdevice, depress the NXTV pushbutton to select the SU1 device. 5. Set the display cursor to the 101 (or 102)/MODE parameter using the CRSRpushbutton and depress the NXTV pushbutton to select BCDI (BCDformatted input). 6. Set the display cursor to the 101 (or l02)/1DATA parameter using the CRSRpushbutton and depress the NXTV pushbutton to select ALL. 7. Depress the 101 (or 102) pushbutton. Data read-in from the selected device will now begin. If the number of channels in the data record being read is equal to the number of channels in the current display group, data read—inwill continue until the data record is completely read, at which time, read—inis automatically terminated. If the number of channels in the data record being read is greater than the number of channels in the current display group, data read—inautomatically terminates when the selected channels are filled. Read—incan be terminated at any time by depressing the STOP pushbutton. ( 11-10 The status readout at has when character flashing device NOTE: return/line this line, display 6. colon 4. last 5. and and device, 3. button 2. NOTE: data is Veyboard peripheral of identify up The 1. Keyboard any assigned. the been to, information mode line depress depress Select Set Set keyboard Set Select the which carriage information (:) time eight may and from to The colon ssjQj(or the depress the of performed the or If being excess ljni of any of an Read—in the device, feed depress alphanumeric by the be label the Status the can display information the display the display a available X—Y sequence return/line (:) of depressing peripheral of entered peripheral flashed Status entered NXTV NXTV characters be line. to the keyboard a a moves up is plotter, Page select serial as Procedure the defined particular such terminated, cursor cursor NXTV cursor to this Page pushbutton When pushbutton status on and NXTV of 4. in to entered 102) as data’contained input/output the device the device feed will the of the characters the to to avoid to will displayed pushbutton on a using bagjrs [QE. the the pages. date, the the next the experiment. display pushbutton. pushbutton status which next require is overlap and i.e. selected last depressing is from entered. the 101 101 101 to to line. as pushbutton. time, character select display displayed select information ASCII line The each using available any in follows: (or which (or (or to peripheral re—entry those the on As select to information 11—11 102)/MODE peripheral 102)/DATA further on title, 102, of the BCDI This STAT The If the character the select characters first can read—in the user previously more location can space at of if procedure selected the selects STOP or also selected If (BCD character entered character (status device desired) selected the the TTY. other the be than SU1, device. is be key entered parameter keyboard keys pushbutton information removed to read—in parameter information are desired the display). 36 readout entered status information can is the where SU2or status for parameter entered available alphanumeric location entries BCD characters to be right entry can This be mode). page. from is of page desired used read—in using to starting SU3 using not displayed. until be into the mode are or is and the of of the the using on any to to assigned to is device the are selected After information ignored. the the the the peripheral displayed, filled, and enter be current the the is mode user with information special CRSR entered status plot line the indicated CRSR retained next carriage entry keyboard to desires and the as to CRSR entry peripheral operation below which status pushbutton pushbutton the display. the line parameter first device display into in from the for push to by status TTY of any on the of page it the a any the I j will depressing the 4. 7. between point 6. numerical a 5. and device, marker and assigned. 2. last pushbutton of by 3. for peripheral NOTE: peripheral entry The information BCDO 1. s colon to information assigning inputting next depress depress line keyboard remain Depress Sequentially Select Set Set Set Select be in of mode channel, entered. (:) the the the depress the of If information the line. entries thej.QE.pushbutton. the device. device, being and alphanumeric Status Status until display the the into display channel display from the markers it numerical of peripheral into as The depress NXTV NXTV the 101 any a entering the flashed STAT, from enter the Page Page serial the and values cursor cursor cursor NXTV by from in data ERASE (or 101 the pushbutton pushbutton the status which the 4. depress depressing 1 information or 102) input/output on data and device the a channel to device display. are to to pushbutton vice NXTV numerical space pushbuttons the the the the display set keyboard they pushbutton. displayed contained the display versa. from 101 the 101 101 in This to to after pushbutton or the are 102 from However, the select select left any from (or value which (or peripheral (or to removes entered. each of in pushbutton Then, are BCDI the on in select 102)/MODE Liend sequential marker lO2)ATA 11—12 102, the the the This the MRKR. BCDI. simultaneously the for read—in keyboard value to peripheral keyboard mode first depress the the if current each the selects select line of to device This desired) values flashing and character to transmission) the SU1, to group as is data mode parameter readout parameter of the TTY. STAT desired status entered the first carriage of can device. a StJ2or entered channel parameter 101 of the peripheral depressed. BCD colon can channel also and location data page. the peripheral is pushbutton and be return/line read—in using key using SU3 as not be into (:) status This channels. starting exited the also used into using at and assigned device device of the the the mode the 102 information as mode the the which to device, at CRSR to data CRSR the with a keyboard feed device enter any to line is permit display line(s) is The as to CRSR indicated channels which as the pushbutton information pushbutton the time to the below procedure terminate numerical follows: select in left of entry to TTY channels of by it the the the the is by ( C ( Serial Data Communicator/Controller Channel When the Serial Input/Output Interface board is strapped for use as a data terminal, it provides a serial data communicator/controller channel for an external device or computer to control sending and receiving of both data and commands between the controlling device and the ND600 Systems. External control of the ND600 by an external controlling device requires generation of a program which uses commands in the same manner as an operator uses the pushbuttons to select and initiate operations at the ND600 System. As an aid in writing this controlling program, descriptions of the command codes and their use in simulating the actions of the ND600 pushbutton are included in the following paragraphs. NOTE: The data and control word formats are described in the Technical Specifications (Page 11—3). General Information When the ND600 receives an external command, it sends an icknowIedge code (OO6) back to the controller to signify that it has accepted this command and is ready to accept the next command. Since the time between receipt of the external command and sending of the acknowledge code varies depending on the specific command or on what the ND600 is processing at the time of the command, the external controller must wait till it receives the acknowledge code before it sends the next command. To signal completion of I/O, the < ND600 sends code 074 However, certain commands can stop I/O before it is completed. These include the ST command and any command that reconfigures the system, such as group size or number of groups. In this case, the ND600 sends e075 signal t at as een stoppe a norma y. 8o NOTE: Codes 0 are ignored completely as commands, i .e., they are never — acknowledged by code 0068. When the ND600 is required to change certain parameters (PAGE, DGRP, LMRK, RMRK, LE, RE, OGRP, GSIZ or GRPS), the external controller must wait an additional 100 msec after receipt of the acknowledge signal before issuing any new commands. This additional time is needed for the ND600 to complete its assignment and to insure that the new commands will be properly executed. NOTE: If desired, theJpdate command (l718)can be issuedjfjheOQrisecdeay. Full RS—232control is supported by SU1 and SU2. If this is not desired, the Serial lnput/ Output Interface board strapping or cabling must pull signal CTS (Clear To Send) high (ND600 strapped for use as a Data Terminal) or signal RTS(Request fo Send) high (ND600 strapped for use as a Data Set). If this protocol s used 2and signal RTS(or CTS) eminating from the ND600 is lost, e.g., by accidentally sending faultyc serial data to the ND600, recovery may be accomplished using one of the following methods: 11-13 ______ 1. Send a legal external command, i.e., SHIFT(0748 or or 2. Set 101 (or 102) to SU2; its DATA as undefined (enter 0) and then depress 2 and the 101 (or 102) pushbutton. ( NOTE: Since signal RTS(or CTS) is only asserted during data transfers when the TTYor SU1 device is selected, it is unlikely to be lost. However, if it is, recovery is accomplished by re—initializing I/O. The NEXT VALUEcommand should be used with caution as the external controller will encounter difficulty in determining the present value of a variable or parameter. Special Routines The following special routines insure that the desired action occurs irrespective of the current status of the ND600. Operation Pushbutton Sequence Octal Codes Sequence 1. Stop Acquisition -,ACQ, -,ACQ 043, 100, 043, 100 w A 4 2. Start Acquisition -,44 ACQ, -,rf4ACQ, ACQ 043, 100, 043, 100, 100 3. Select a Status Page —,CRSR, Page #, ENTER 043, 072, XXX, 076 NOTE: XXX s the octal code of the desired page — ) number (refer to Table 11—1). 4. De-expand the Display MOTION LEFT, a EXPAND 117,064 Setup For External Verification The Serial Data Communicator/Controller facility, which is accessed via the SU2 designation (Special Unit 2) for an I/O device (101 or 102 parameter, Status Page 4), provides a means of verifying proper receipt of external commands. This may be achieved by having the ND600 transmit the status page to the external controller for verification after entries have been modified. The following setup should be performed on Status Page 4 to enable the feedback. It may be performed either at the ND600 keyboard or via the external controller. 1. Set either 101 or 102 to SU2. 2. Set the MODE toBCDO. 3. Set the DATAto STAT. 4. Send the appropriate status page(s) to the external controller after each command (. or series of commands. This is performed by externally commanding 101 or 102. Thus, the status pages may be verified for the proper changes. 11-14 c. b. a. 3. b. NOTE: a. 2. any This 1. using and ND600 The Setup meter Set meter Set wait select Home Setup issue Stop or Stop the currently following currently by Terminate Disable modification keyboard Operation example the For operational 102/MODE local 102/bATA for This commands acquisition 100 auto-lob, Update to to auto—lob cursor 102 Remote Status returning BCDO STAT. double (Enable) msec operator. demonstrates operating in to example to operations and process. prevent command. Page send of Operations or required function. capability para— para— sequence I/O commands Status 4, Status illustrates functions the Page to Page 6, buffWarray. ensures as(23)t6erand NOT,)CDO CRSR aray). to NOTE: 7, CRSRUP set —, —, 8at STOP this commands No Pushbutton actually ENTER information 8, CRSR, ACQ, of the up 4 pushbutton function. UP 2, the to the acquisition external operand (6 (twice), the 8, fI)is 4, ND600, 11-15 -, ND600 by times), control Sequence ENTER external ENTER ACQ which for is exists entered pushbutton command entered 2, verification in push— is the acquisition, an 2, a stopped for controller typical commands external 3, as features regardless 054, 072, by auto 072, 055, 043, 043, 100 106 Octal processing 175 for controller necessary the of msec verification. analysis 076 072, (174) 056, 072, 072, 100, the external Code of delay ND600 050, 050, 072, 052, 043, its and is to Sequence experiment able current setup controller 050, or 056, 072, i/O 076, 100 System. 171 to functions. the 051, 076 072, stop state. 072, ( f. g. e. d. c. b. 4. a. e. d. auto to preparation Erase to issue Set auto preparation to issue Set or Set to issue memory matically Erase GRPS Set verification. Setup Home external wait select Send SU2. Set issue Operation 40, 3, 2, issue 1024, LMKR DGRP DGRP GSIZ 102 job. lob. Update Update Update group wait 100 wait group Status Update parameter cursor Status wait Status size. Update parameter controller wait msec calculated parameter parameter parameter parameter 100 100 for 3 for 2 100 Page and command. Page command. command. command. Page in in 100 msec or msec command. msec is 4 1. msec auto 1, to for to or or for or CRSR ERASE 3, CRSR ERASE ENTER CRSR 1, —, 782 Pushbutton array. NOTE: 102 ENTER CRSR ENTER 0, CRSR, at DOWN, DOWN DOWN 2, UP operand 4, SU2 11-16 (twice), 1, Sequence ENTER ENTER (3 is (5 4, pushbutton entered times), times), 0, 7, ENTER 8, 2, as 2, 073, 051, or 076, 073, 047, 073, 100 102 102 100 043, Octal 076 100 072, 124 171 msec msec msec 052, 076, 073, 046, 073, 100 072, 072, Code delay delay msec delay 046, 073, 050, 073, 100 047, 055, Seguence delay msec or or 076, 050, 073, 052, or 076, 056, 171 171 171 delay or 076, 073, 050, 171 — —_-E-p Operation Pushbutton Sequence Octal Code Sequence h. Set RMKRparameter CRSRDOWN, 1, 0, 2 073, 047, 046, 050, 051 to 1023, wait 100 msec 3, ENTER 076, 100 msec delay or issue Update command or 171 i. Send Status Page ito 102 124 external controller for verification. 5. Setup Status Page 2 for desired acquisition parameters. a. Home cursor and —, CRSR, 2, ENTER 043, 072, 050, 076, select Status Page 2, 100 msec delay or 171 wait 100 msec or issue Update command. b. Set MODE parameter CRSRDOWN, 7, 4, 2, 073, 055, 052, 050, to PHAC. 2, ENTER 050, 076 NOTE: PHAC is entered as 7422 at operand push button array. c. Set AGRP parameter CRSRDOWN (twice), 073, 073, 050, 076 2, ENTER. d. Set TBASEparameter CRSRDOWN (twice), 1, 073, 073, 047, to 1. ENTER 076 e. Set TMULTparameter CRSRDOWN, 1, 7, 073, 047, 055 to 15. ENTER 076 NOTE: iS is entered as 17 at operand pushbutton array. f. Set PTIMparameter CRSRDOWN, 1, 0, 0, 073, 047, 046, 046, to 100 seconds. ENTER. 076 g. Set PTOT parameter CRSRDOWN (twice), 2, 0 073, 073, 050, 046, to 200,000 counts. 0, 0, 0, 0, ENTER 046, 046, 046, 046, 076 h. Set PLEVparameter CRSRDOWN (twice), 3, 5, 073, 073, 051, 053, to 35,200 counts. 2, 0, 0, ENTER 050, 046, 046, 076 i. Set DOFF parameter CRSRDOWN (twice), 5, 1, 073, 073, 053, 047, to 512 channels. 2, ENTER 050, 076 NOTE: ADC CONV GAIN may be set to 2K,4Kor8K. 11—17 Operation Pushbutton Sequence Octal Code Sequence j. Send Status Page 2 to 102 124 external controller for verification. 6. Setup Status Page 3 for desired data manipulation parameters. a. Home cursor and —, CRSR, 3, ENTER 043, 072, 051, 076, select Status Page 3, 100 msec delay or 171 wait 100 msec or issue Update command. b. Set E/CH parameter to CRSRDOWN, 1, ., 2, 073, 047, 044, 050, 1.25 keV/channel. 5, ENTER 053, 076 c. Set E(0) parameter to CRSRDOWN, 6, 4, 0, 073, 054, 052, 046, 640 keV. ENTER 076 NOTE: Since DOFF = 512 and E/CH = 1.25, E(0) = l.25x 512 640 d. Set SF parameter CRSRUP (4 times), 4, •, 072, 072, 072, 072 to 4.35. 3, 5, ENTER 052, 044, 051, 053, 076 e. Send Status Page 3 102 124 to external controller for verification. 7. Setup Status Page 4 for desired auto—jobsequence. a. Home cursor and —, CRSR, 4, ENTER 043, 073, 052, 076, select Status Page 4, 100 msec delay or 171 wait 100 msec or issue Update command. b. Set CYCLESpara— CRSRDOWN, 2, 5, 0, 073, 050, 053, 046, meter to 250. ENTER 076 c. Set Fl parameter CRSRDOWN, 2, 0, 4, 073, 050, 046, 052 to SMOOTH ENTER 076 NOTE: SMOOTH is entered as 204 at operand pushbutton array. d. Set F2 parameter CRSRDOWN (twice), 2, 0, 073, 073, 050, 046, to SQRT. 5, ENTER 053, 076 NOTE: SQRT is entered as 205 at operand pushbutton array 11—18 k. j. g. I. f. h. e. selected of Set external meter Set meter meter NOTE: Set Set Set meter meter Set meter Operation Set the STEP STEP STEP 10 STEP 101 STEP to to to to to to spectrum 1/MODE to 101 for controller, F2. BINO. 101, Fl. ACR. STRP. 4 5 3 2 1 para— para— SU2. para— para— para— transfer is to para- the CRSR NOTE: CRSR 6, pushbutton NOTE: pushbutton pushbutton as CRSR CRSR 32 as NOTE: as ENTER pushbutton NOTE: pushbutton ENTER as ENTER NOTE: CRSR 7, pushbutton NOTE: CRSR as ENTER pushbutton as NOTE: CRSR ENTER Pushbutton 461 2466 782 7877 227 31 at ENTER 7, operand DOWN, DOWN, DOWN, DOWN, DOWN at DOWN DOWN, ENTER at at at F2 at at operand SU2 BINO Fl STRP 101 ACR operand operand operand 11—19 array. operand is operand array. array. array. array. array. array. Sequence is entered is is Is entered (twice), is (twice), 4, 2, 7, 3, is 2, entered entered entered entered entered 4, 2, 6, 8, 2, 6, as 2, 7, 1, 7, 3, 8, 1, 073, 073, 076 054, 076 073, 076 073, 073, 076 055, 073, 076 073, Octal 051, 050, 076 052, 055, 073, 055, 073, 050, Code 050, 052, 054, 056, 051, 076 055, 050, Sequence 054, 047, 050, 047, 056, 055, 8. r. q. p. o. n. m. I. 250 will sequence. auto—job NOTE: to for Send meter Set meter Initiate Set meter Set Set meter meter Set parameter Set Operation external verification. WGRP STRIP AUTG times. STEP STEP IO1/bATA be Status to to to to to performed auto—lob The 0.1. 2. —3. sequence ERASE. 101. 7 6 para— para— to para- para- para— controller Page entered ALL. 4 AUTO CRSR CRSR 2, 102 CRSR ENTER ENTER pushbutton as NOTE: 2, CRSR pushbutton CRSR NOTE: as pushbutton NOTE: ENTER as CRSR ENTER Pushbutton 461 37273 255 7,3, ENTER DOWN DOWN, DOWN DOWN DOWN, DOWN, at at ERASE ENTER ALL 101 at operand operand 11-20 array. array. array. Sequence operand is is (twice), (4 (twice), 0, 4, 2, is entered entered times), entered 6, ., 5, 1, 5, 1, -, 3, 3, 7, 076 073, 076 073, 050, 073, 050, 073, 104 124 076 073, 076 073, Octal 073, 046, 073, 076 055, 073, 052, 050, Code 043, 044, 073, 051, 051, 054, 053, Sequence 051 047, 073, 076 055, 047, 053, ( ( ?‘.. 14 ‘ .$ e )___ t) ..- E f C,! /J device. / using Pushbutton/Command Table 1/i ?ç ERASE 2 A r 4 - AUTO AUTO ERASE ACQ ACQ ENTER CRSR CRSR ENTER SHIFT SHIFT ADV CFS CFS XPND RST XPND MPOS MSPN MSPAN MPOS ND600 Pushbutton commercial fl—i / 7 6 4 9 8(TUV) 5 0 2 3 (>>) & + 1 * Down Up These (<<) Down Up (WXY) (PRS) (MN (J (GHI) (DEE) (ABC) Left Right Table Left Right Right fists KL) (>>) Left (>>) 0) (<<) (<<) codes (<<) (<<) the (>>) (>>) (>>) (<<) 11—1. communication codes . exclude Code ND600 which Cross the Pushbutton/Command permit equipment 077 076 074 075 073 072 071 070 Reference 067 066 065 064 063 061 062 057 060 100 055 101 056 054 102 053 104 105 103 052 051 050 046 047 045 043 042 044 041 040 Code first Octal 32 6 6 4 6 t 43t L’ £6 the ç% 11-21 4 ‘4 3 °, % ‘4 4 2 C 33 ‘4 ‘-t”i Q 2 SC states 2. -t 3 S 3 user such 01 01 01 00 01 01 01000011 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00110011 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00100011 00 00 00 (Note in Code Binary to as 000 000 000 000 000 order 111 1 111 111 111 111 1 1 110 110 110 110 110 110010 101 1 101 101 101 101 101 101 100 101 100 100 100 control 100010 100 100 1 Modems. 1 1 10 1 1 1 Code 000 001 010 010 011 001 000 001 000 1) 100 01 101 111 010 100 001 101 100 000 111 110 101 100 001 000 1 101 110 100 110 111 100 101 11 to 1 the prevent Cross ND600 Character ASCII Corresponding Reference. A complications C D 4 = E B 7 9 6 5 > 8 2 0 / 3 ) ? — + * 1 % ( & $ # Space U via an external when Table 11—1. ND600 Pushbutton/Command Code Cross Reference (Cont’d). Binary Corresponding ND600 Octal Code ASCII ( Pushbutton Code (Note 1) Character p STOP 106 70 01 000 110 F (Note 2) STOP 107 ‘ 01 000 111 G(Note 2) SCRL 110 01001000 H c SCRL 111 01001001 I r tNT (>>) 112 tj 01001010 J U DEL (<<) 113 ? 01001011 K V NXTV Up (>>) 114 1-4 01 00] 100 L w NXTV Down (<<) 115 01 001 101 M MOTN Right (>>) 116 7 01 001 110 N “1 MOTN Left (<<) 117 3 01 001 111 0 WIDTHExpand (>>) 120 01 010 000 P WIDTHContract (<<) 121 cf4 01 010 001 Q 101 122 f? 01 010 010 R 101 123 3 01010011 5 ‘ 102 124 ( 01 010 100 T 102 125 ‘ç 01010101 U STRP(>>) 126 ‘G 01010110 V PLOT (<<) 127 d 01010111 W Fl (>>) 134 92. 01 011 100 \ F2 (<<) 135 ‘ 01 011 101 F3 (>>) 136 01 011 110 A ( F4 (<() 137 01 011 111 AREABGND 142 01 100010 b AREABGND 143 01 100011 c ECAL 144 4’ 01 100 100 d ECAL 145 •91 01 100 101 e Keyboard Enable 174 12Ji 01 111 100 Keyboard Disable 175 Z 01 111 101 ) Display Off 172 •4’Z 01 111 010 z Display On 42 173 01 111 011 { Update 171 124 01 111 001 Suppress external control 177 ‘17 01 111 111 RUBOUT(Note 3) until ACQ or AUTO is complete NOTES 1. Parity is ignored; codes 0 are neither acted upon nor acknowledged. — 2. Before attempting input into the ND600, ascertain that the STOP pushbutton is clear by depressing the SHIFTpushbutton if the STOP pushbutton was depressed last. 3. Do not issue the Suppress External Control command if the keyboard is disabled as the. STOP command can not restore control under the e circumstances (i.e., if ACQ or AUTO is unending) 11—22 r I LIST MCS PHAL Mnemonic PHAC EXT 1M Mnemonic 1005 is 1MS los lOOMS 1OMS 100US 1OUS ACR NXTG STRP PLOT ERASE F3 Fl 101 F4 F2 Mnemonic 102 Table Table Table 11—2. 11—4. 7425 7422 627 5478 Equivalent Numeric 11—3. 462 461 7568 6984 7877 227 Numeric 37273 31 32 34 Equivalent 33 Equivalent 1007 Numeric 17 10067 107 167 16 1067 1087 10087 398 Acquire Auto Time 11-23 Analysis Multiplier Mode Sequential Multichannel Description PHA PHA Step Parameters. Next Acquire Description Strip Fl F3 F2 Plot Erase 102 F4 101 Description External 100 isec 10 1mm 100 10 10 100 Parameters. Function Function Function Function sec msec psec Clock Live Parameters. sec Operation Operation Operation msec psec Operation Operation Group Operation Time List Time Operation Scaling Control Control j [ ALL STAT TOT MRKR 10 ROl BINO BCDO SU3 BI BCD SU1 LP TTY SU2 10 PT MAGT Mnemonic 101/102 NI 1/102 1/102 I DATA MODE Device Table 6757 7828 764 255 2466 868 2464 2234 2236 783 78 782 781 889 6248 57 Equivalent Numeric 11—5. 11-24 101/102 Content Content Current Content Output Input Output Intensified Special Special Teletype Special Paper Line Input Description Magnetic Parameters Printer Binary BCD Tape Binary BCD status of of Unit of Unit Unit Tape Data all channels region channels Reader/Punch Data Data 2 3 1 page channels Data count and/or between in intensified in totals Status group markers Pages regions ( ( ( Table 11—6. Data Manipulation Functions (47—0054). Mnemonic Numeric Entry Description L ADD 200 Add a constant to each channel in the current display group. INTEG 201 Integrate area between the markers in current display group. DIFE 202 Differentiate area between the markers in current display group. XFER 203 Transfer the data spectrum from specified group to current display group. SMOOTH 204 Perform a five—point coefficient smooth on the data spectrum in the current display group. SQRT 205 Calculate the square root of the data spectrum in the current display group. RELERR 206 Calculate the relative counting error of the data spectrum in the current display group. COMPRESS 207 Compress the data spectrum in the current display group by a factor of two. Table 11—7.Intensified Region Peak Extraction Function (47—0055). [ Numeric j Mnemonic Entry Description XTRCT 100 Output intensified region peak extraction report at 101 device. Table 11—8.Intensified Region Isotope Identification Functions (47—0056). F Numeric Mnemonic Entry Description SETUPID 400 Permits entry of an energy tolerance (+) between the calculated energy, and the actual energy listed in the isotope library table. ID 401 Output intensified region peak extraction and intensified region isotope identifi cation reports at 101 device. LISTTAB 402 List isotope library table at 101 device. 11—25 SETPS Mnemonic PSRCH PSINT VFWHM AID Mnemonic ISO LIST COEFFS GRAPH Table ID TAB Table 11—10. 11—9. Automatic Automatic Numeric 500 Entry 501 502 503 Numeric 600 Entry 601 602 603 604 Isotope Peak Identification 11—26 Search Functions set—up Description Permits report Output peak search Calculate width Intensify entered FWHM Description Permits Output identification 101 device. List isotope Calculate based parabola versus Display detector Functions isotope device. and parameters. at parameters. on report efficiency curve entry automatic entry for automatic identification graph spectral 101 output efficiency detector values (47—0057) coefficients coefficients energy library of based at device. (47—0058). of set—up of the 101 the automatic entered display dual peak parameters. peak efficiency versus on table peak curve. isotope device. parameters. reports values of parabola of search search for search of variable at half— dual peak each energy 101 curve at and C ( ( FREEZE DIGITAL RATIO Mnemonic LIST RATIOS Table 11—11. 302 301 300 Entry Numeric Digital 11—27 Ratios Functions(47—0071). the freezing device. ratios set—up Permits Output Permits Description status during parameters. visually digital entry the display. periodic accumulation of ratios monitoring the digital list update at by digital ratios 101 of ELI ( C _ I..) ‘_,Il r C’-; ‘3 ‘-9 .1’ L.) U ci) — C—) —‘ Lt— ‘CT— c - - ‘- t ‘- uJ -j -J EL 1 1_ C) U-; — “J ,.‘ j C’) ‘:‘ U C-) CD CD CD -ç NZ J CD r aD h e ± I— CD U U U U C-i i— a_ I”-iJ ‘0 4 C-) j ‘- — LJ — -‘---(‘4* (f)’- D—’’--- O_Q_-_Dr’j.-. - C’) L—1 0 I---’ w’ I rr I O()OOuOu C -j _ ,.‘ r-; .- — L 0 C) r—’— -0’ — ;_ aD 0 0 D a -J I- z - r’j ( IJ__ M:__ I I I C-) aD C’, 0 o — ; 7: 0 ca 0 i La aD J— — C-) aC 0 Lj LJJLJJ 0 0 aD 0 C C-; •J : 3: :: bJ (J U o: z J LJ 0 0 Ui C-) C) i I tC \‘ ‘-‘-) . II __j II aD aD ‘Jt aD aD C J aD J aD ! ,— 0 0 — - — 0 0 a- 1%. p 0 0 0 ‘F) aD’-’ Li aD U-; W —0 ‘JC aD c-; -III aD aD aD aD aD - aD aD aD (-I 0 0 C-’ 0’ aD 0 0 n 0 -J -J - — aD ‘r p----’ — a- — aD aD aD a- aD a- a- aD aD aD “ IC cf 1 0 aDaD i aD aD — J-’J )“4 , .- r’4 4-I ‘4 ‘F U-; r’- ‘-‘4 a- w I- W z z * a-” aD r’4-DaD “4 ‘F) aD rN0 aD 0’ ftaD - — .— aDaD J - 0 0 Z (_‘) (_) C) C) 0 Y Y 0 a- ‘- — a- r’J ‘F -“ .— a- a- - LU z 0 J_F) - — a- ‘a a- 0 ‘i a- 0 a- C) ;c x x C a- a- a- — 4 _J aD J,, _J z , t I i I z .— a- ‘Cl A B BDALØL I1B1 I 5øOu [1P4] T’ SO VECT* S2I. [431 SiI’* [141 [14I [1 [14I I oI N ÷5V 100 .- . RI C4 A I KIL . .‘ -,- —. 2 2 IRQ lACK [P21 [P31 FEN [441 11) INTERRUPT 8 ENABLE LOGIC 80 CO I KH lACK (B2) FRAMING BAl BI by ERROR P APi QL HALT (381) BDALV7 BDALV6 [‘B’] BDALØ5 [1811 BDALO4 [1B1 BDPL03 S2IN* BDPLP2 [11 [lAl SIN* BDALR1 [‘P4] [1B1 PD CLK [3P2) [lAl [ipi [3B2] S6OUT’ [1A41 AL 3 I I 00 I I I BIAICOL MODE +12VQ_—._——< BDMGOL BOMOIL SELECT Q—<<--— Q—<< B ______ (SEE 452 AR2 • P1 C& TABLES) ______• EPE — + SBS 22uf 22 4 U f WLS,WLS2 (TO (To IC1B 1C18 DR . P3N PIN I 1) 14)O—<———-— RD7 RD6 P05 (184) (1B4) R RD3 (184) R RD1 (184) (lB4) RDO (184) (184) (1B4) 04 32 AC2 AJI AM1 AT1 8C2 BJ BMI BT1 1 BREAK4 [132] NU-TYM DRPN NO. STOP PPRITY: NOTE: I MODE BY: OF = BITS: AP2 BA2 By’ INSTRLLED BITS: SELECT THJ NO EVEN ODD 4-5 I ND600/660 1 2 b 7 5 8 4 NB1 LOGIC 4 I R R I CHCKED5Y:SHEET2FS R X SERIAL NB2 NUCLEAH DIAGRAM I I R R REMOVED DON’T PR (1B2) (iLl) 2SB INTERFACE I P DY V4 CARE PEV x R DATA I NP SO-2437-Q2. J L _J z Q> R c_ =‘ >< Ui EC+ Q:z — >-,_ z )- , : . z - — : ( J : REVISIONS -wzQ_ w > : : _J = W ‘ —: I- w w w 0 — V) w c >- ‘ ‘- - u_J /) c — — D >- X L,J bJ A Z Li IN Li 0 LI LI I I- ci IN 0 H” cr I- LJV) 0ww L) , - z 0 - w;.j w L -J i; — I L + -J Li L!U •L Li Li ci ci 0 0 ‘ci; I— I- 0 L1 4 w Li z z ci c w w - c —I Li .- rj IJI . I. UJ ()V)QUvU) I I I I I I o r’4 IJ 0 ci _.J ci c CD C _) ,__ I ) I I w tr r4 ‘ -J 0 w C • c c - ‘ •.Ia J131DflN JO A13dDd JAISfl1JXJ SI ]t4J. U, 1N3WDO 5tH! a]NII1NOD NOIiWllOiNi 3F1L AW èJON ‘a]DflGOHd3H ION 3U AW CNV ld]DX] ]NNW Q3Sfl NI AN 3 WONd]N]H1 ]1AI3 èlO NI]H]H1 AJV1iPidOJd H1 ‘v1a ]1DflN 10 NOISS)W]d N3!IUiM AY —Nfl iO ]11N]1Vd V dO ‘NOIiW1OdNl ]HI 01 S1OIU C? (D •j_o N3DflN O1GJAH]S A1SS3idX3 3H 3flIVN (‘J 31IN]IUd !j1 p 1 U I, a, .-—f-ir,a’a- > :, .-C-iC)0ri a, at -0 0 a, Li - — U)C--C)U)0000LiQ0Li0 Li LU a’ Li 0 0 if) 0 0 0 0 0 Li C) C) C a, 00000 00000 0CC to a’ 0000 —::-3 C) 00000 C- lx a’ a’ C’i to C- C) _J LU LU a: LU a, a, a, C a’ C- a’ C-- -0 1) Cl) C)_ C to C Ci o_ (_D -J :3 0 0- LU lx lx 0 0’ LU lx 0 LU — 0 C- —I -8 C Li - a- a’ a, C 00000 C) C- LU :3- z Z Z C-J Li 0- C-i 0- o—0 GIS IN3NOdWOD : o C_i 0- 00000 00000 l1 0000 a’ lx -a’ Ci a -0 it CC C— 0000 a, C- Li u-i lx lx a: - -C 0- 00000 cO .- — .- C- lx a’ -a’ U) to u_ C C _J C) u-i lx C-i ii C) .- C)- C 0 C—C C) C-) C- C_, C) - C- C- to C)) U, -J C-i u-i u-i C- 0 C1 C) C- Li a- (_) — 0 Li — Q_ - a, a, 0 C a C- J C a— 0 00000 C) I- 0 u-i ci C1 :3- Li -C C a_ U) Li 301S IN3NOdWOD C- C)) Cl) 00000 00000 )IO000 C) lx 0000 00000 0- Q .- .- 0 If) U) -0 -0 C— C C a, C), C-i Li C-) 0 0 ‘—4 C-i (‘4 a, — cD r— - u Li-i C- I- Li C/) c C/, b-i C- to 0—C---, _J C-I u-i C) _3 I— -a C C-, z u-i C) Ci C- z C- u-i C) -J -0 I C- -0 I— ) -a, 02 0 -J 0 u-i 0 00000 C) C- 0 u-i 0 :3- Li -J 0 -o - .o -J -0 C) C) ais IN]NOdWO 3 00000 00000 00000 0000 Li ..1 00000 0000 C 0 C C C 8 Li - z 0 u-i Li 0 — 0 C)) :3- 0 - U) _J :Z z _) Li C- CCJ C- u-ar-- =: LC Cl U) 0 C) C- - C ow C- z 0 0 0 00000 a_ cz aCLa : w 0 0 :ix 0 -J 0 0—i z I- : C’ Li ._i 7.: C--C C- U) a, 3015 IN3NOdWOD LO—6OL-OcJAi—ON c: c -JO CD 1 z Li C), _J CD - cD LO c (:3 0_ -4 D c_) 0 C/) LU 0 cD 7: fl -3 . w j c:i i3 — 2.: : r F— LU Li u_ L) Li-i U) •1UQ b11:J(P o A1bdOdd ]AISu1])X 3H1 S! INI,fl]OU SIHI 1NOJ ci i v IUdfl NO IHI iN .Jfl]3dd3d ‘1 dIN 3 IG4 INV kU Id JXI RNN1 I AN’J O]Sfl 11 ‘Od]ilH1 ‘II ]1AIb33 C-) AèU 3 I Hdfl1d I ]H1 a O ‘fl uT1Dfl .i]d SS 1 I Nfl I 11 N I 9 HO 19U1N1Jd —NH JO NOIItdOjH JlSThOi 01 SIHOIèJ •j1Ua H11flN 01 G3AH1S A1SSJdd3 ]J 1U1N]Ltd 3flj _ A B — DRiER DIN DY.-iC FR’ING CHIRACTER IQDRI/R PERIPHERAL EASCCONFIOIJRATION BAUD DRIVER FIGURE 4P ERR N32 FR3 2SB F431 PE’_i A3 ,‘7 là b ;3 ER EH 7 1 4 RATE ADDRESS RECTOR CONTROL ERROR FW FORMAT HALT 177— — PN .__L t- -ii- - 12 6 3 7 2 9 8 —.-— . 1011 — N.A. I/R TTY CL 110 5&0 EI\IN OATR REQ EIOUT PROT. CARRIER SI6NIL CLR SIGNAL R 1 R R R R B R I R 60 I I I R TO TOD SET GND [3r2J SNO OND [3B4] TI7XX [3B41 1001 RDY TTY 300 R&D iES 2 2 R R R R I RI R B I 60 381 I [J___- I I B [3B] I I LI TI7XX 1001 1200 _L_ OS TIP SLO YES 2 I R B R R R R I R R I 60 i: I I R RCS CONN. LA36 1Q01 560 YES CL 300 hR B I R R R R 60 I I I I I I B 1 I R R R PIN .!! ••_ - ! 2 22 15 14 20 9 SIGNAL SEROUT— SERIN— RDREN- SERIr DRTR RU9EN+ SEROUT+ 50CC 1001 2400 SU2 DT 570 YES 3 R R I R R R I R R R I 70 I R R R I TERr 3i] {33] 3E3J E31] [3A3] [3j3j ROY 50CC 1001 9600 SU2 DT 570 3 I R R I I R I R I B B 70 I R I R NO R R [3B1 I RS232 IODl SU1 DS 300 660 2 B R I R R I R B R B 60 I I I I I NO R R 2 - .--- ;.T ;; —---- ._!i_ ._L- i_!_ .±.L !!L .._L!_ AFI ._L !E.L ASI AEI BBI E3NI 8K1 BLI E3JI BTI -;--; G M MSPL1R P BI-IRLIL BREFL OND OND BDMRL S B B S B S BOCOK H spox SIGNAL H S EXT END PSPRRE BSRCI(L GND BEVIITL B P N N SPIIRE D SPRRE SPYRE SPARE S SP1RE S S SPRRE SPIRE SPRRE S SPRRE SPRRE SPRRE D S PAR P PRR P F RR CLK B I I H R B R E E E E E H E E E E283 1 3 B 4 B 2 3 3 1 2 1 6 5 4 7 [2B3] B 4 6 B [3B1] 2 I — ••• --- ..i! !! !.! !i !! ! AV2 A AF2 AE2 8K2 8L2 BN2 6P2 BT2 BRZ PIN AZ +5V BDALB1L —12V ON BORLB2L BDILØ6L BDRLØ5L BDRLB3L BDXLØL BDRLB7L BDRLIIL BDRL9L SIGNAL BDAL1 BDXL1ØL BD BDBL1 BDRL13L BOAL B BDRLØBL BDMGOL BBS7L BDMGIL BIRKOL B 6 BIRKIL BIT BRPLYL — BIROL # BDINL BDOUTL I S ND 5 1 1 2V D I NI Y 2 V 2V L08L BT NCL V TL 1 5L 4L 2L L 3 [ [1R21 [283) 1 [2B31 I [2B3] {2B3] [ [2R2] [1R2] 2B3] [1B1] [181] [1B1I [IB1] [181 [1B1) [1B1] [ {IR1) [1R1] [111] Ri [1 [1 1 [1B1] 1 1 B A 3 Al Al 3 1_i_.____ I i ] ] 1 I ) .—--- . SPARES — -“ Eii ..2_L .__L ..E_L E_!_ C .a_!_ CEI a_!__ CFI EL______csl DEi PIN DBI Di DHI DA DNI DLI OKI DFj DRI DM1 OH DUt ‘( A I I - SIGNAL C2,C3,A3,D7,08 I _ -I —1 - — — . .2.E! 0A2 CE2 CFZ I PIN 0)2 DC2 0HZ DEZ 0P2 DK2 DA2 DL2 CV2 DR2( DU2 )F 0T2 ______NO600/6G0 ::z:;- --- DATE NO-TYM - SIGNAL : -. TFJ” ‘23/77 • LOGIC 4 ______IPPYCED QIAGRAM 3UCLA SERIAL I INTERFACE E1 b— - — .. S0_2LL37_O ::E z Q- — — c>- v, x . ______x c z 7: ct_ Z c_ j I Q I r L) o >- • Q Q - D — - W ‘ I I 1—Hil p -1” L I CN C1 —I — L_ C,, : /‘\ /1I f1 v1va JO H11)flN A1Ii)dOHd SI JAISfl1DXI 3111 IN]Wfl]OO 51111 a3NI1No) NOIIVWNOiNI :1111 AVW a3flOOHd]W ON 3 ION AVW ONY I4JJEJ WINNVW ANV NI asn i wo]]HL 31gVAI3Q HO NI]3HL AHViJIHdOd JU1 •VIVQ iO U)1)flN NOISSwd)d NJi1 A HO -Nfl J1UNJ14 V iO NOIIVWNOiNI OIVS1OJV 01 iHI S1HOI oiaici •v1vQ lv1-I:rnN A1S53dE3 3HV 3dfl1N 3lgvlNflvd I1 MIO __ I I > ‘4—i k) C) () II_ 4 ,. THIS DOCUkNT 5 THE EZCLUSIHE PTOPHTY O NU[LEH DATA. AN MAY NOT HE REPRODUCED, NOP MAY THE NFORATION CONTAINED THEREIN UN UERIVABL.E THEN[FROM 1 USED IN ANT NANNER. EXCEPT a’ NNITTFN P1RISSION OF NUCLEAR DATA. THE PROPRIETARY RIGHTS TO THE AFOR(SAID INFOR4ATIUN. Of A PATENTARLE OR UN- NATURE . RI TO NULLI AR DATA. LI PATENTARLE ARE EXPRESSLY SIRVED -> PENDING [CN______fl I 0 Li l)J ONION1d •VIU(1 NV IliflN q ai is iixi iv mnit 111911d —‘III H’) flIN i1V .10 • NO I 1UL’.JO I’ll 1 S 1U J ‘-t iI SIHJI ANUI IthiONd 1HI •U1UO dUJlDfUi iD FlOISSI.d 4J1iI’ Id .)X I •HJNNUW AN NI aisn •flH iH -41 jiqi fl •ji tl I’IlNOJ NIH IHO Ml 11 UJL. HflN (1 .)flOO41H N 19’l iW ]NJ •)lU1) I•1fll Jf) A j4 l,)e,f ;I’-,n1 )E HA 1 IN h,fl]O SIHI 4 4 0 x z 4 w _J I -J U :iaic IN3NOdWOJ LO- t6oL-ocwAL-ON , fl 0-’ a C 0 C C CrXI k1 9 •! V 0 •1 — ,‘,Dr— 1 Z g a 8 C 0 0 a C fl’0nn 0000 !:; 0r0r Cnnno 301 S IN3NOdWOJ 0 0 C 0 a 09000 0 —I a I- LJ a 9 0 C I noon -: k,n[,0 ‘bMd’ coma 00009 3GS LNJNOdWOJ LO- 6C L-OS WA i-QN 0 0 0 a 0 0 0 (N (N — 0 0 C 0 C,, anna &xim ‘ojM1 00000 00000 S o—o’D 0- 00090 a 8 0 — 0 uJ 00f 0 0 0 0--, § 9 .- -, -C 00000 0000 —;:?b z 00000 00000 0 -C 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 I 1 ______ I I 2 3 4 cs CONN. SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL PARE 1 : —I—PROT. GNC !_ SEROtJT—[3A31 -. 5V :: C82 .—— EIAOUT [B41 !_ SEROUT• t3A3] ABI HPAHE 2 AB2 -12v .i.—TiAIN (3C2) SERIN. 31 PAR 3 .! J_. E ONO EE.!_ .E_E! C? 4 REQ TO SED [381j RDREN+ 13A3j ARE 4 2o CD2 •.i_ ..2i_ .._ • C S5PARE I :: CLR TO ShO [3B4 RDREN— .±._!_ BDOUTL11021 £.!_ — SPARE 2 DATASET ROY 13B41 .1! SERIN- DAli AFI BRPLYL 12831 E.!_ 5’PARE 3 cH .7 SIGNAL OD !2 DATA TERN ROY 13B1 ._!_ .±.! BDINL [1A21 CARRIER [3B4 .- -- 8SYNCL I1Al I AK I MPARE A BWTBTL ,PARE A BIROL AC A 7- ALl [2831 E_!_ — .S.! T_____ ? ±! BIAKIL [2421 EL : BD4.HL BIAKOL 2B31 .E_!_ - .±_L BHiI‘ T 2 3 L I B 1 BBS7L I 1A1 ] .r__ ±.t! .Et_!_. .Er! BRFPL ±i!_ BDMGIL[2B3 1 .S...L .S! PS4RE 3 .!.!_ BONGOLI2B3i BINITL 153 .±.i.!______1 .Ei. 1 PARE BDALØL [101 j BDALl L I1B1 1 PERIPHERAL TTY TI7XX TI700 LA3A SDCC 50CC HS232 .±._!_ S._!_ .S.! OR H i2B3j _5V .2±.L DBZ x_ IODT 1001 SBI H • 882 -12v DBI IODRVR FW 1001 JOOl lOOT IODl IOD1 BIK DRIVER TTT ITT TTY TTY 512 SU2 Sul DCI DC2 ...i. PARE 4 !..!. GND ARE 5 — !2.!. • BASIC CONFIGURATION CL OS OS CL DT DT OS SPAHE 6 !i BDALA2L E1B1 I 2._L 2.! F IGURE 2 SF1 S PARE 7 SF2 BDALØ3LI1B1 I DF 0F2 BHI EH CLP 3Bl I 8HZ BOALA4LIIB1 I DII I 0142 !! 2400 9600 300 BAUDRATE 110 300 1200 300 ! H H 8.21 ON) 8J2 BDGL5L [TAll OJI DJZ FR3 H H FR2 H R H N PARE B BX2 SDDL6L [TB1I £!.!_ H H FRi 1 1 PARE H BDGL7L [ 8 ) 2..!_ H H FRB 1 I ON? GNu !M2 BDALB8L [ Al I ON ! DNI DN2 C ASICEL !!! BDAL9L I i o ] CHARACTERFORKAT 0P2 PARE b ADAL1ØL [I Al ] DPI P,. H BRI BE NTL BDGLI1L [141 ] DRI DR2 2S8 BR2 H DSI 052 NB2 H PPARE 4 ::: BOAL12L [lot ] STI GNU BIAL1 3L OT I NBI 8T2 f.i! PEA H H H H Out E PPARE 2 BDAL14L B BOAL1SL [1 Al I 570 570 660 E! DRIVER ADDRESS177— 560 560 560 560 ‘ ! B7 46 H H SPARES H 43 I : DRIVER VECTOR 60 60 60 60 70 70 60 r—1 A? I I I I I I I v6 I I I I I I I V3 I I H H I DYNAMICCONTROL N.A. : YES YES YES NO NO J14 I/H i I I H H ECH DATE FRAMING_ERRORHALT REAtSINI H H FEll H R H H H : NLJCLIAR DATA xl LOGIC OIAA C6OO/6 RIAL U1EA S Si- CHECEED IV: SET DATEDAW:6/23J77 I APPIOVEDii:Ø4 I S1O—2%37-OO 3 I 2 I I I 2 I 3 4 RCI—4 RCI—13 A A B B ECN DATE REV S IONS NOTES: 5 — THE FOLLOWINGSYMBOLS/NOTATIONSARE USED ONTHE DIAGRAMAND/OR PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDASSEMBLY. ADC SIGNAL NAME CONNECTOR [4A2] —SIGNAL SOURCE DRAWING LOCATION, OR CONNECTOR PIN IC INTEGRATEDCIRCUIT SAT -— SELECT AT TEST —— — GERMANIUMDIODE NUCLEAR DATA INC 1 — ALL DIODES ARE G964 OR EQUIVALENT, EXCEPT AS NOTED. (4A2) — SIGNAL LOADDRAWINGLOCATION PIN POSTOFICEBOX451.PALATINE ILLINOIS 60067 — SILICON DIODE LOCATION TRANSISTOR (P1) PRECISION RESISTORS 100PPM —+1—-— TZONE ,—P C BOARD NAME 2 — ALL RESISTORS ARE 1/4W, ±5%, EXCEPT AS NOTED. 1/8W, ±1% METALFILM SHEET NUMBER BOARD IC PIN ....pf..ZENER DIODE C PIN .C. NAME ( ) — DESIGNATION CHEMATIC DIAGRAM 3 — ALL CAPACITORSARE pf, EXCEPT AS NOTED. DC COMMON 12 CONNECTORDESIGNATION , TUNNELDIODE ND-600 KEYBOARD 4 — I .C. VOLTAGES, EXCEPT AS NOTED: CONNECTOR NC - NO CONNECTION . FERRITE BEAD SELENIUMDIODE (ND—KBM) 14 PIN DIP, PIN (7) GND: PIN (14) +5V LOCATION I.C. DRAWNBY: ,JSP CHECKEDBY: I SHEET I OF PIN DIP, PIN GND: PIN +511 - . W 16 (8) (16) CONNECTOR—./’7”\..I .C. LOCATION ON P.C. RD. TYPE 24 PIN DIP, PIN (12) GND: PIN (24) +5V I C TYPE ON P.C. RD I.C. DATE DRAWN:2-25—771APPROVEDBY:V4fr IS70—2436—OO I I I ______ I I 2 I 3 4 xYD—1o 2Y MP M3-5 GEOM XYD—6 Ti82O1 P31 C x AMP4____—_--______-___-_-— (6 (12 (lo F IL—1 F IL—3 HVI (MOLEXTO HVS) A A M2—8 68K -24F < (/)- _L!± SIONKL GND INT 8C 50 KHZ 4 —2.5 KV GND Ml HVO (MOLEXTO CNT) w PIN SIGNKL .o L_ CVTHODE Q_ - —2.5KV C Z Z INTENSITY z>-c.J a= FOCUS z 2M 4 o • 5 mL.J .wI-LlI- LU M4—3 lOOK 470 )- — Q.w I- )- C, AC 50KHZ w w (I) — ‘ L 0 €1) L.)WWb LI M3 CTO (M0LEX TO CRT) ‘C 0 2M PIN SIGNKL w 0 W 0 V) 1/2w = _j — FOCUS LJ V C 8CCELER8TION — —: LINEARITY xo = C W 0 3.9M >-- U, — — I- ASTIGMATISM bi I- B —f.— (d W GEOMETRY = )- — INT 8DJ —— I- I- 3.9M + 3uf 3.9M — - 15OV !L KYO — (To XYZ) SIGNAL SIGNAL —— GND 3.9M ___]_ LINEARITY MA-i ._L 2 IN .1_. GND GND 3 ACCELERATION 8 —24F M3-6 INTENSITY ADJUST .—— INTENSITY GEOMETRY —— ASTIGMATISM _9_ ECN DATE REVISIONS NUCLEAR DATA CRTCONTROL z.. C (L88-0598) DRAWNBY:SFG CHECKEDBY: SHEET1 OFI DATE DRAWN:5-13-76 APPROVEDBYY 2 3 S70-2387-OD I I ND3 ONION3d F.- ‘tHfl1N 311N3Jd F’; c-I DNI1LUO d]1flN OIGJAd]S3d A1S]NdX3 3IU It, —Nfl O ]aUiN]Id U JO NOI1WHOdNI GIS]dO ]H1 01 1H!H It, C%J AN1L3INdOJd ]HI DNI 111O 33flN JO NOISSIW]d N311IM A c’J WOdd3H3NI 31AI3O O NI33HI a, 1d3X3 N3NNW AN NI O3Sfl 3 C., a]NILNOD NOIIW8OJNI 3H1 AW ON ‘a3JnaoNd3 38 JON AW ON F’- C’J I- AJèl3dOdd 3AISfl1DX3 3HI SI 1N3WflDO SIHJ. a, 0 C., 3N1 ‘1UO H31DflN JO It It, bJ I— < z C,, j- < H” V—: : III H” ‘-z- C Ii’ — :.— H” r) C) c’1 CI +1 0 w I- 0 z I, L V ‘It I’’ — I’’ HI’ 0 0 a, a, Cl, Cl, 0 0 C” Cl, . w >< C C) U CD ______ I I I 2 - 3- - 4 xYP (M0LEX TO CPS) PIN SIONL 1 +24 C) 2 DC OND - 3 —24 4 DC OND 5 + 200 A — xYD (TO CRT DEF PL4TES) A J!:( SIGN4L SIGN4L x2 I xi L I -- 4 9 :: 1 — xYO (TO CRT CONTFJL) T PIN SI 6N4L PIN SIGN4L LINE4RITY —--- GND ZOUT OND —s.— .!_ 3 AcCELER4TION 8 —24F D:) 4 INTENSITY 9 INTENSITY 4DJUST o ISTIGMITISM -—- GEOMETRY a- : i-- >- C w : : v — _, Q w POS (TO R.P. POS CONTROLS) _J SIGNRL SIGNRL j_( w C W C fl YPOS— --- YPOS .1_ — —: 2 7 2_ 24F —. 8 —24F :o w LJ - I v, =W B — .!_ 12_ ECN DATE REV1SIONS ::: NUCLEAR DATA xYz BOARD (L88-0598) (CONNECTORTABLES) DRAWNBY: SF0. CHECKEDBY: SHEET2 0F2 DATE DRAWN:5-1)-76 APPROVEDBY S70-239’4-03 2 3 I I I I 2 I 3 4 Mi PON (MOLEXTO NPs) SIGNOL 10 MO—S 1 SC OND i_. DC 188 OC 18 8 —-. DC OND —f— 5 +24V A 6 —24V A — PIN (MOLEXTO TRONSFORMER) J!: SIGNOL AC OND _L AC OND AC OND AC OND AC34A Ew. 0C34B AC OND a; o_ _ OC18A z —- c_J AC18B >- Q_ 10 DC GND °E . 270 A __i_ AC 0>- jz - I- )- w w X — l () 0 W C)LJUJL UJ PHV (r1oLEx TO HVS) w 0 W _J —0 Ui PIN SIGNAL Ui / 0 Ui — —: +24V UNREG .1__ z Ui 2 AC GND D:o Z C Ui Ui - B Cd = - — MO xyp (r.IOLEXTO XYZ) P IN SIGNAL 1 ÷28V _2_ DC OND 3 —24V —f- DC OND 5 +200V ECN DOTE REVIS IONS NUCLEAR DATA 21 cpsBOARD (L88-0598) DROWNBY: S.F.C. CHECKEDBY: SHEETI OF 1 DOTE DROWN:5-10-76 OPPROVEDBY’ . S70-2399-po 2 3 I I I > k) \!/ CA) c : : : U, -J F’ a)-J -a C,) a) I,, PROPERTY OF NUCLEAR DATI. I,, THIS DOCUMENT IS THE EXCLUSIVE -I AND MM NOT BE REPRODUCED, NOR MAY THE INFORMATION CONTAINED THEREIN OR DERIVABLE THEREFROM BE USED IN ANY MANNER, EXCEPT BY WRITTEN PERMISSION OF NUCLEAR DATA, THE PROPRIETARY RIGHTS TO THE AFORESAID INFORMATION, OF A PATENTABLE ON UN— -1 PATENTABLE NATURE. ARE EXPRESSLY RESERVEDTO NUCLEAR DATA’, > PENDING ECN______c 0 C) A B : :L !i_ f!_ !L --- !! i !!_ !!. !_ I :: I i: .yi_ .:!L 12 !!_ !!_ !! — i!_ 14 4 — — — : —_ — GND GND GND NC NC NC NC NC NC BDMRL BREFL BHALTL GND GND NC ‘ ______SIGNAL J2-32 J2-33 SIGNAL J2-34 (NOTBUSED) (NOT (NOT CONNECTOR BUSED) BUSED) CONNECTOR - - - _L ------ ! 2 !! : :!: : -- -- L2 -- 32 ------R2 P2 N2 ¶_ i- 34BDMRL BHALTL BREFL BDALIL BDOUTL BDINL BtRQL BSYNCL BWTBTL BBS7L BDMGIL BDMGOL J2 BRPLYL BIAKIL BAKOL BINITL BDALOL BDALIL BBSTL BDINL BIAKIL BDALØL BDMGIL BIAKOL BRPLYL BINITL BDMGOL BIROL BWTBTL BSYNCL A BDOUTL +5V GND NC N C SIGNAL SIGNAL J2-18 J2-2O J2-22 J2-24 J2-25 J2-23 J2-28 J2-26 J2-3O J2-27 J2-21 J2-19 J2-29 J2-31 ARI API ANI AJ2 AE2 AR2 AF2 4H2 AU2 AV2 AK2 AL2 AM2 AS2 AT2 AN2 4P2 (NOT (NOT BUSED) L BUSED) I PIN :i ------i -ii- K 12 VI UI 14 TI IT II NI MI 3 6 4 LI P1 Fl 8 7 2 RI HI JI El 5 3 5 — — GND GND GND NC NC NC NC NC NC BSACKL GND N BDCOKH BEVNTL GND +5V 4 I C SIGNAL SIGNAL J3-32 i3-33 J3-34 (NOTBUSED) (NOTBUSED) (NOT CONNECTOR CONNECTOR BUSED) PIN 27 28 - 23 22 30 29 25 24 21 20 52 PIN 32 V2 31 2 U2 T2 N2 M2 34 R2 H2 (.2 F2 Pa A2 C2 ia 8 9 2 BDAL4L BDALI5L BDAL5L BDAL6L BDAL7L BSACKL BDAL9L BDALIØL BEVNTL BDALBL BDALIIL BDALI2L BDCOKH BDAL3L BDALI4L BDAL2L BDALI3L J3 B BDALI5L BDALI4L BDAL8L BDAL6L BDAL5L BDAL4L BDAL3L BDALI2L BDALIIL BDAL7L BDALI3L BDALIØL BDAL9L N BDAL2L NC +5V GND C SIGNAL SIGNAL J3-18 J3I9 J3-22 J3-23 J3-24 J3-25 J3-26 J3-29 J3-27 J3-28 J3-30 i3-21 J3-2O J3-3I BH2 BJ2 BE2 BN2 BT2 BP2 BS2 BM2 BU2 (NOT (NOT BUSED) BUSED) — -i-i- -a-i- -ii- PIN i UI TI RI Fl SI P1 El NI HI KI JI MI LI I GND XIRQ2* GND XIRQ3’ XIRA4* XrRA3 XBYAD* XWAD XSPARE3 XADDR GND XIRQ4* XSPARE XSPARE XIRA2 XIRQI’ XIRAI +5V I 3 4 3 2 5 I I 2 I SIGNAL CONNECTOR ANALOG —I5V CONNECTOR +5V GND +I5V +5V GND GND SIGNAL SIGNAL GND CONNECTOR P2 P1 PIN C2 F2 M2 A2 1(2 02 jJ N2 J2 5 P2 L2 T2 R2 V2 3 PSPARE GND C PSPARE +5V XINIT XRPLY XDOUT’ XDALØS XDIN XSPARE XSPARE XSPARE4 XDALI XSPARE XBS7L XWTBT* XSYNC* 3 XSPARE7 6 5 8 SIGNAL I 1P21 IPI ND-MMB I I ‘ IPOWER 39-7Q09 J6 CI PIN BI Al DI El NI MI LI VI Fl RI P1 HI SI TI SUPPLYI XDMGI XDMG4’ XTMOUT XDMG3 XDMG2 .4 t J XDMR2* ANALOG GND GND XDATIO* XDMR4 XDMR3 XSPARE XCLK XDATO XDMRI* +5V L I PSPARE XSPARE(BUS I I 72-1375 USED 9 GND (SPARE)- SIGNAL CUSTOMER FOR (XSPARES ON NUCLEAR SPARE)-NOT I I I I . NOT CONNECTOR ARE (ND-MMB) USAGE DATE DRAWN ASSIGNED, DATA BUSED) DRAWN: BY ASSIGNED, NOT : USE. I I I I I PIN B2 N2 M2 A2 J P2 R2 1(2 H2 C2 V2 52 U2 T2 R RECOMMENDED. 3-2-77 NOT D M FOR XDALI4 XDALI3b XDAL4’ XDALT XDALI5 XDAL8 XDAL3 XDALI2 XDALI XDAL6 XDAL5 XDAL9 XDALII XDALa G GND +5V +15V CONNECTOR - 15V BUSED, RESERVED BACKPLANE, 4 APPROVED CHECKED SIGNAL NUCLEAR TABLES BY BY: : REAR p4V DATA S7O—2424-OI SHEET ECN )- — Ui v, REV : =W w I I S W I OF DATE ONS : — I u, z A I w I a- . - - r—) a- . m a- a- ‘ 0 a- a- a- rJ ---- —. — n a- _o - >< >< >< >< )< >< >< )< )< c, a- c a- a- a a a- — 9 -. — a- -J -a - : z 0 — —a m 11111 :r, r’ z -1 ‘Ii- r’) t C = r, — :!::: c— “1 !‘ : C)) a- : C) a- ‘ j—, : C-, F.) C,) —I -I —I C_)c, I- I,, G) 9 lz, -I I,, C,) C,, ‘1 C) m a- a- -I 1%) 1%) w PENDING ECN______C n ______ I I I . UO-hZ-OLS f(4:) OD1100ddIl LL-fiI- :llJJ 31110 C [1106] I 0 [11II6]Do01D D11O1 [St)NIg9D hdO Z 1HS 033D]HD .•HI :10 N1IlIl0 []g00dS 0 [ZO11uL000dS 0 ZaIldS[Z0li] H : [11011] [111161 [S] L0dS 0 [11O6]00011dS 0 SØ0IldS[ZO11] LA3O DIl1S I I I (V-frSJV-ON) (t) (6) [5011] [5011] [9p]gø0dS p ‘-, ,—‘ 51) 11L) (51) (1) I (L)I 0IDD ØZIlO 3DVdI3!NI V’lO 11O1NOD NOIIISIflDDV 013 113 11 0 3 a (L)(SL)(tiL) St) [sot] li4VVIO DIIO1 C Oh 11 0 3 0 (9) Ø0À (O)j 3D 0 (lit) 06 IS [0] (t )(11) [hIlL] (SL) 60t56t 3D (110)00 3110—- —0 ØD11 -- 0 — V.LVG V31flN T-5- (5) Os M ) (51) 5LLS1liL 1011111 (5) [tOt] j — lit 1111 LA )— — —QOØ1110X (5) I to (z) LØA (EL) (51) I (11t) 115 [0] (Ii) [LOt] [t71 (5Ilt)(tiO)(l1)009 LA tO j (I) SNOIS 1130 <— L0DI1 —0 LODO 511 511 1111 110 > 0 toioax (5) -T-5- 1k (5) (6) 55—11111 691S111 9 (9) [ LOLl 3100 ND3 (XI1L)(11O)(ZIl)Lø0( 1111 110 (L) hiS - 1111 110 SA sa ) — Zø10X - (SI) [0] OA (.9) (01) [tOt] (ZOL)(6O)(0Il)Zø0 (SLS —p50111011 .(— SA 50 cs) LA 111 k 110 [so] L5—!WU 6 9) (11) 110DO() Lt) 009 (11Ilt)(11O)(11)søO K (LL 11k 110 L [so] (1) (S (LI) 5øA L9 05-11111 )_ hiS [0] 1000— o 8 [O6] (ZO)S0D11o—--- —0 søDli [SO] () 00011dS (ZL) —0 liD 1100 (OL) [8li] [5O][5O][5O] [SO] — (6) [0] () Ll —0 L0011dS 1100 ØO 900 tOO 500 0— (tL) [06] (5116) (11) S0A1111D0— aNo < [SO] —0 000IldS 1100 so (ft) [06] [51111] (- [50] 0 50011d5 NIhOD ( c:i —0 z—J.w 500 0—;- [5011] [5011] 90 (t) (1) (t) SL) lit) SL) < [SO] ( ti [° 171DD VZ0O (lit) 013 113 03 z—1wj 900 )j) (9)j) 11 0 3 0 10 ( L)(st)(17t)(SL) (1 (_ [SO) C *li• to 3D — 109 0 0 3 0 (VL (9) go Oh Is [110] 170A (11) (110)60300— (SL) (hi) 60 1561. - — 3D b6 LII 110311 Lz— 95 (St SILSihI 59115161 19H61 (5) [LOt] (n mmz K )— 115 110 611 611 LA LO —OliglOaX — - o iwi (5) (5) E71i OS 115 St) (11) [ tot] (111) Is (11IlL)(ti0)(Il)11ø< LA tO J 503110--- O 65 (t) XII 50311- —050111011 (5) —0 511 511 (CL) 1111 110 r’l 6 L—1W T•5- (5) ._ (6) (1) [tOt] (Ilt)(VO)(0Il)SøO 601S111 (9) K -____ _--_ 1111 110 *1111 —p9ØlllaX -o 09 SO 1111 1111 SA 50 9 B—1WI1 - (St) 9011 (9) (5) (6) (at) [LOt] :— — 011 [110] (11I1t)(liO)(11)9øE 511 1111 (St) (6) :----i- — 9030 TZ) 511 90D11(5) LA LII 1711 60 —0 L01110X I L—1W1 (11) [IlL]1INI (Zt) aNo (0Ilt)(liO)(Il)L0O K - (IL) :tit5 — hO (110) (IL) 10A ILL) (5) 01 - [110] 9 L—1W1 911—IWO 1030 (6) (01) p... lIt 1111 IODO -vzzm. (11) Zi5° 63 SO][SO][ SO] [O] (, m m 1100 500 9110 1.00 i (5Ilh)(SO6) 1011003 DN [5011] N1803 * pwax o—<----——O [5011] [5011] sr ( 1)1 (6 (1) 1—0 9133 91100 (L) SI) VL)(SL) C *uwG j 013 113 03 11 3 11 -v V )( S I ( tIh7 to (Iç 3D m (lit) 06 (9) 1 (o 1’l Z 3G Lr (1111) (SL) [1101 O0A :------00311 0 (hi) III 691S111 * L4OX O—<.------O (51) 611 (5)—0 90311 *1-I - taa 651151111 591151171. 119 [ LOt] r I OHlit 110 OØ1OaX — 59 LA to —0 [110171 IIS 59 (SI) (5) (Ii) [LOt] (111) 11WOS (LIIL)(tO)000 K — OS (1) )— ] 69 110 (50 60311 511 110 —0 601110X 511 (I) 9—111111 (6 (0t (9) [tIlL] 691561 611 (tIlt)(LIl)600 K 1111 1111 (1) - SO 1111 (6) 5A SO —0 0L1110X 1—11111 99 (9) (5L) [11111 OLA (9 (5) (01) [j (5) [Lot] (tOI)(LII)0I0 011 < SA (9I 0— (51) 511 LA LII 110 1L1110X —0 —0 9—IWO (6) OLDII (1) (11) LL) 1 (11L) ( t11t)( 10)110< :1-- 170 ( Lt) (111) (5)L(* (LL) ttA S—IWO 0 01 [1111] VS (11Il)LID11 (11) (Ot) LLDO °—-i5 61 till (jy.O liD [SIl][511) [501(511] 000 600 010 LLO (6) [5011] [5011] (t) j(6 (L) 9133 OZ0O (1) SL) Vt) St) 013 113 OD (L)SLjhtj5t) 0 0 3 0 SLLS1VL V *33 (lit 9) V (1111) Oh Is [1111] > 4011 (SI) (17) (t 69 IS111 11LDIIO LDO 111 89 *I1 7 1911111. (5) [LIlt] 05 pL1Il0X VA 110 LA 10 ) SI) (5) (Ii) * hibOIx o—4-- 0 OS 69 [tot] (tIIL)(tI1)11IO< b (OL) (1) 05130 51111011 LHD str (6) 511 511 OA 110 ) p (5) OL 5) 01) (1.) (9) * SOIlIX 0-- [tIlt] (LOL)(I11)SL LdD 1111 6OIS6I 110 < (1) SA SO ) O11L100X SOS] S—IWO 51) liLA (9) o * 11001X -0 111 011_ 011 55 [1111] [tIlL] o <<-- IN111NI (tIlL)(L11)litO< 511 (51) — L33 SIr (6) SO VLD110 b 511 : VA 110 -(ZL) OSL1IIOX 11—IWO Vt) (5) * tbOIX (3 —4:-——-—0 7 : (L11L)(I11)5LO 1111 ha D(zt) C Ot 110 103 9L (IL) — LI) I—IWO ___j (5) at 115 [1111] SLA CV) (01) (ZV)StDIl 0— 61 1111 (1 s LDII (11) 11L) 11tO SLO litO SLO (6) [SIll [511] [511] [50] (5116) C SIAOODc)—-— .1 z I I I ______43 2 I 3 I 4 p PST07 (4B1) p PSTØ6 (4B1) +5V p PSTØ5 (j(12)(13)I (4B1) C, PSTØ4 (12 (13) CRY BRU r— (9) 0 4B1) CRY BRW (9) QD (7) Q8 0 SYCLR*O______D QO 7 ‘14) (7) — (10) B0 HIBYT [B4] OS Q7 C QC (6) (14) [243: (4B2) [44]TOTF* O______C QC 6 ?15) 44 (1) (2) E0 Q6 (6) RMT—41 (1) 17 (2) (2) )—O PFLO. (13) BQB T000F’ QB 5 (B1) <- . 74LS 193 Q5 (5) — — (15) Q4() RMT-42 (3) (12) B DMRDDR SPECF* (15) Q 4 42 (11) [1831 • (4) :14) ( CLR NC (11) (14) (11) —C LO 45 YNC PRF1 O—( LD CLR 41 [1421 16 Q3 (3) [411 (10) C446 A 74148 A 40 (2) [4411 A (5) (4) Q2 A +5V0 6331 Q1 (13 1: AMT—40 MSCHO* < p PSTØ3 (4B1) (1 2)(1 3) p PSTØ2 RMT—43 CRY BRU (9 (4B1) QD (7) (13) CTF* D p PSTØ1 XDRLØ2 (NC) ( (4B1) RMT—44 (10 (12) (141) LTF < C QC 2 —0 psiøø 02 3) 4MT—45 23 (11) (4B1) B QB (2) (9) CRY BRW DRDYF*‘ C Q8 74LS193 01 (9) (7) 4MI-46 D 90 (15 (io) (7) XDOTRF’< 4 QA (14) Q7 (10) (6) (11 44 (6) C QC T0TF (14) Q6 (41 ) PRF1 O—( LD CLR (5) (1) (2) (13) QB . bJ [81] 43 (5) B Q5 . 74LS1 93 ‘(13) AA (12) (15) 94 (3) () 42 4 I (4) V Q4 (11) PTOT (11) 14) 41 V [B3] +5V0 (3) ----C LD CLR 93 RSTØ1 (10 [482] 40 (2) Q_ Q2 (5) j(4)- >- 10 Q (1) 6331 91 +5V : .5 (15) PRF3 p : [B11 Q- >- C, 47 I- AMT—1S w w C,, 74LS1 74 : — CC 0 W AMOD0< z AMT—14 10 19 INTREN XDRL14 —0 —,< AMOD1 _J (141) (4 (243)(244) 20 2Q (5) AMT—38 ,< (_) = 0 RMT—13 (1) XDAL12P— —0 PTOT bJP- —LCJ LIMOD2 7414 (141) (43) MCLR* < (6 3Q (7) XDRLØ6 3D (4B1) p__— —0 RESET w C, w (1 B1) 0 (11 (10) (B3) — XDIILØ5p.._...... _.. 40 49 —0 f/S W Ui (1B1 ) I- L (13 (12) (442) SYCLR* 50 59 — (443) (Al) w :Q z C LCJ C (14 (15) 6D 69 w i U) B V __ V A >- — +5V 1(9) I- I- PLFG (1) [42] SYCLK LDC* INIT* [1431 (10) [143] [1B4] [1421 (12) (1) P 7410 CONTF (12) [444] (2) 78 09 CONTST* [442] (11) PCLK* (442) [442]C 843 (444) (4B1) [442]CB02 PRF3 0 ECN DRTE [41 1 7408 REVIS IONS [442 ]CBØ1 ORNOF’ 0 [143) [442]C 804 r\D NUCLEAR DATA 21 LOGICDIAGRAM ACQUISITIONCONTROLLER& DMAINTERFACE c.. (ND-ACM-A) DRAWNBY: T.H.J. I CHECKEDBY: ut/il I SHEET3 OF 4 ORTE DRAWN:2-15-77 APPROVEDBY:pj)/ V I I 7O-2422-OO 2 3 I If I ______ I I 2 3 4 SPARES 1 •0 CB06 5V J1 (13) (9) r— 04 ‘(4) (10) ______CARY07 E1 18 03 [2821 (6301) (11) 168 IT* (3) OFLOF (14) 02 (E2*)48 6306 (83) CARY15 01 0CB04 TSTOFL [242) C805 (12)(LiL 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 (43) 74O2() 40 (43) (B3) (5) (6) (7) (4) (3) (2) (1 )(15) NC 6 A CLRLNK* A LINK CBR2 (82) [84] c1 (381) c*(h1) CARY07 oi)7 [2821 (9) +5v 04 —0 C803 (83) LINKF * (10) (83) El 03 I (381 30 824 24 7442 (11) (2) (2B2) (14) (E2*)A8 (6301) 02 , 1 )—o LDAC* 6306 C (12) (3) (43)(253) CONTF 01 2 ) OSTAC* (381 40 Al 42 43 44 45 46 47 (4) (2B3) NC LOOFL* (5 (6) (T iT ci- (14 3 )—0 ( CB1 I B (5) (43) (82) 4 )—C CONTST* LINK (3B1 ) (6) (44)(3B1) [841 (15 5 )—0 5D144 CONTST* CBØ 0 (7) (243) [A2] (B2) 6 IRCLK* LBIT* )—0 1 (381 (9) (243) [42) .4) (12 7)- CR05 PCLK* Q_._____( E* (10) [41] >- AMT—9 [384] 8)- CBAIN CR04 (9) (111 (282) [Al I 04 SPADØ3LL13](281)(2B3)(2B3) NK* > 9)- L I (10) AMT—1ø (82) [B41 DRNDF 0i_ E1* 6 [143) (6301) SP4D02(82) [143] (2B1)(283) A/S 0>- (11) 4MT—11 (283) [383] 0 - (14) 6306 02 SP4DØ1(82) [143] (281)(2B3)(2B3) : ‘ (E2* > )A8 w C: w : v, AMT—12 —. J (12) I_, C W 01 > SP4DØ0(B2) [143] (281)(2B3) 0 )cLL__.CDEVA* 40 41 42 A3 A4 A5 46 47 (2B3) (183) ).c!_____ (5) (6) (7) (4 (3) (2) (1)(15) EL DRNDF 0 (B3)(2B3) [143) 2 )P____o DEV2* _J — LU (B3) (13) )c± (284) HIBYT — —D C [344) z 4 C807 LU [Al I (141 5 C806 B > [All LU - v, LU 6 AMT—34 LINK = = )- — (9) DEV7 (A3) - 04 > XDATO(1A3) (15 7 4/S (43) A [383 (13) E1* AMT—35 12 03 8 )-I CB0S —L—-----c EVC (6301) 36 [Al I (14) 02 0•— (E2*)A8 6306 MT-36 7442 9 LINKF AMOD2 [A3 I [3B2] 01 (124 > lAVA +5V 40 Al A2 43 A4 AS A6 A7 (5) (6) (t 5) (2) (l)(15) LINK* 0 )_cJi__ (A3) PSTØØ0 0 (2) (3B4) [33] )—0 RST01 PSTØ1 EL 0 7432 (3) (343) [343] PCLK* C800 PSTØ2 C [3841 [Al I [343] (13) I PSTØ3 C SPAD02 0— (5) 1 [343] [B2] 4 ___ I— _ _ __ —.1 ECN DATE PSTØ4 C [343] REVI IONS (14) S PST45 ‘‘ SPADA1 0— B [343) [B2) 6 P5106 0- [3431 7 [All NUCLEAR DATA PSTØ7 0- SP4OØØ 0— A :21 [3431 [82) S 35 LOGICDIAGRAM (11) ACOIJISITIONCONTROLLER& DMAINTERFACE 7442 9 (ND-ACM-A) DRAWNBY: T.H.J. CHECKEDBY: pd/i SHEET4 OFL( DATE DRAWN:2_1L(_77 APPROVEDBY:Ui/ 2 3 S7O-2422-OO I I I I 2 I 3 I 4 D4BUØ (A3)(BI) C, 27 (I3)(l2) 7442 D4BUI 2 7404 (B2) SPAD2O C3A4) 3 — 4 (14) D4BU2H SPADØI0 B E3A4] 5 (A4) 6 (15) SPA0000 A CAI)[A21 A C3B] 7 A (B4) ADCII D4 BU2T (B3) AMT-5 ADCIO* AMT-9 SPADO3• ADCØ9* (A3) BUOCLK 808 (BI) [AI]EA2] D4BU2F-I tA3] (10) AMT-26 > 807 [BLI[B2) AMT-27 C II) 806 [BI][B2] DXT-17 AMT28> E (12) DXT-18 > B05 [Bfl[B2] AMT-29 < (13) c DXT-19 ,> 804 [BI][B2) <- DXT-20 < DCI DXT-21 < . RB DXT-22 >22 < CC2 DXT-23 GNbO- < AJI cJl B DXT-24 ->--o B <- AMI CMI DXT-25 —>>--o < ATI CTI AMT-30 DXT-13 —>-o 1 < BC2 DC2 f5V’ DXT-38 o—<4-- —>---o BJI —>--oDii BM1 DM1 BTI DTI GN O—<-—— LDCLK D4BU2L [3A2] [A3) LA3) ECN DATE REVIS IOHS —— I DC* NOTES: 5 — THE FOLLOWINGSYMBOLS/NOTATIONSRE USED ON THE DIDGRDMDND/OR PRINTED CIRCUIT BORRDDSSEMBLY. SIGNRL NAME CONECTOR [4R2] — SIGNALSOURCE DRDWINGLOCDTION, OR PIN IC — INTEGRATEDCIRCUIT SIlT — SELECT lIT TEST —— - GERMXNIUMDIODE NUCLEAR DATA 1 — ALL DIODES RE G964 OR EQUIVRLENT, EXCEPT XS NOTED. (4A2) — SIGNXL LOADDRXWINGLOCATION I’\fl LOCATION VCONNECTOR .C. PIN TRANSISTOR (P1) — PRECISION RESISTORS 100PPM —RI-—— SILICON DIODE TI ZONE ç--—P.C. BOARDNAME 2 — ALL RESISTORS ARE 1MW, ±5%, EXCEPT AS NOTED. NUMBER 1/SW, ±1% METALFILM LSHEET NAME ( ) - IC PIN DESIGNATION ZENER DIODE I C PIN __I 3 — ALL CAPACITORSARE pf, EXCEPT AS NOTED. LOGIC DIAGRAM DC COMMON .—>>—— CONNECTORDESIGNATION TUNNELDIODE S26 -01 INTERFACE TOACQUISITION MODULES 4 —I.C. VOLTAGES. EXCEPT AS NOTED: CONNECTOR (3) C NC - NO CONNECTION FERRITE BEAD - SELENIUMDIODE (ND—ACT) 14 PIN DIP, PIN (7) GND: PIN (14) +50 I .C. LOCATION ‘I RESISTOR PACK DRAUNBY: T.H.J. CHECKEDBY: UCIIi SHEET I OF 3 PIN DIP, PIN GND: PIN +50 - RESISTOR PACK CONNECTOR 16 (8) (16) ] 2.21< TO +5V 680 TO 5V I .C. LOCAT ON P.C. RD. 24 PIN DIP, PIN (12) GND: PIN (24) +50 .C• TYPE ON P.C. BO. I.C. TYPE DATE DRAWN:2-25-771 APPROVEDBY: S702458-OO I I ______—-______ I I I 00 -8QtZ—0L S IIP : g 3AOdd LL8 : NM ]1a :),9 NMG 2 dO .L33HS I (f(1 O3D3HD (iDv-ON) [t82] EtiV%] s31naoii N0LLISlfl3v cii. 33Vd]!NI 8.1.1 *0is 8OS1W. (21) NVe19VIG 31901 [2V] 8Lt’NI (II) 1VHd (28) OL (I) (DI) [182] ‘ ilNi AI-O 4 >>OA9I- WiNO 3 * N3A30 o—_—O—- A22 9a Lt’L IèlD >13% L1 318VS10)LMS O—O_—O—-l 3N 9) (9) 92 , (03 SNOISI (31SVN3 3V)9MSO—Q.._-O----i >>—c.LINIX LS1W. (9) L8] (2V) 31O ND3 I2i aI-3 92 80s1W_ 6 813 (>13013 SAS)cMSQ—O_-G----- W82)(IV2) (p8) W82)(8) 0t’L (9) 9t7 DVHd (7avH3 1X3)t’MS o—o.—o—-- d0901 0 (01) 82] (%)(%V) NW. (9) d0901 (9) (18%) —cN3A3a ZI-1NøIO >11DX It’-.LVV d (1±S-SN) £MSOQ—O—-C øg1v( ,v >>—q0O1vaX t8] A9+ (V) WKL22(%I) [!i nD [8] 1INIO— iwlvax MS *81a1< ¶ [%V] (I) (6) St—.LNV LL-iNV (I) 0t7L BOS1W. Od3V (6)1 ø1vaX -13 >113 èJlD V (01) 91 A3 (9) 9 (V) (9) 0911 c9 a9 (%v2) 18.1. 09 øi’ax 4) 089 - N) a9 j Dc a9 (2V%)E81O- 09 (2l) ()çL% 1 >>—Q01VGX — -< D17 a (%V2)t910— tlt, L_J zmx - n, C,, COD (II) [EV] [%](iT°* t2 aç —OLO1VOX (%V2)881Q— l$ Q2)_ (9) NfleLL3 [18] I OW. C.,, 8 Z A9+ tz —o0lvaX (%V2)ILLo— E (E) Z=-o W) [IV] E AQ+ 0 — a1 —o%I1VGX (%V2)EIUo—) 82 ..... :— I 09 (2) I a1 m o’ -) t’LISiW. (28) I LIS1L ZHWOI (W) 1(1) [EV] 13dNflr * —qoivax O3iiV.LSNI (1’) (9) lAid AO13Vd(Ir) L_J W. 8) 8N1 NVH3 .o._J (El) ($1) (El) 9V I 13L_j aib—o Ø1vax (II) 913 91’ t’-3d (Nh I —1 C,, rn m : (01) 9 oivax -< -4 w lSlW.h .1X3 Ø >113S % 2. (lI) (*V2) fiE) 6 9 6 9 >>—c9o1vaX -———— °7r°WT) 8b 9Ø1VGX (8).26) 0 o, UV2190iS 9PWL)ja0 LJ -D EOh4V 9E9 øiax -< I (g r—I 2l-J.NV (I)) TED (SI)L___c?__I(El) OW. .(282) I r—>I0OiV 3 LW%] TN3!D—1 I W8) (9) 91i (I) enD >413 (%V2)W8)BLN (;v) ±0001 (182) (28) 3N— Ip >ID I 09 a9 i-o SD g- [ES] *o_____cLw(9 000I L23 tg Og (j)_-__OOOX (2) tiLSitL (2) (El) )>—q8e1vax 128) (%8)lVHdo-_--? lv WV%) (2) 02 (11) !__J DVHdO — b j—°I0ivax [18] 1130— (ill E (01) (W2) (01) UI) (El) 0% I . _ L 02 [29] E130— dii):L(I) dli (9) CE) (91 ‘° (1) E30V1 (1) OW. £ (W2) aE Ct’) NoDavo—) —oe0ivax W.3 601 VOX (Z) t,v N33aV (9) 0E LtV2] (t7V%) (lV2) (EV) a1 [IV] (t’vS) a1 ,101SèI N311 09D0V0— 0L O3v 9 -—---09liVGX 813 ‘pt’ CE)l I 1229 I W.lSiW. : AQ+ (162) 89 W.IS1W. N3DSVOj E9 >>—o0nvax (2l) oiivax (RI) 6t Li dC ON >1DjiTFeJ OW. nvax II1VOX a 9% [2 92) 09 V JEelf - d1D< Eu (6) dID (6) (El) *N3DV (El)0<..9(9) 3N0W. 9l 2>0EIi VaX L(6) • -J.NV OE [E9] 9-1db (8)K...6(6) 2t oc:::::::1 d CE) ¶ (El) CE) (8) O9MS I_J L__ (0l)[J I1 (22)(28) I (21) dODV (E6) Ag+ 0W. (0l) 0 r—>*dI LI1VOXO - (9) (%l)1 6%-flNV —5--—] 0181W. 3N—- >13i-n___OODV <__.___ 6t 29 AQ+ DN () EflO (9) J LS1tL øI-Dd 0% - —(0 9r 9-Dde a—> dlX(> --—--—- d1SV 1 (9) 29 (II) Ll 9MS I-Dd 9>4 (01) E I ______ I 2 I 3 I OLTB (2B3) p4*(AI) (A2) AMT-16 lB BDC-17 (II) ADCGO . - ACQ’ [2A3] I ADC-17 BDC- 9 AMT-49 ‘l2 AMT-7 L- E* C -> P4(Al) DRNDF< C ADC-I (A2) AMT-lB LTB K- - (B2) (2A4) AMT-35 AMT-19 ADC-2 (13) 2 +5V DEVC< ADC-3 24 3 AMT-20 BDC—9 )(5) CLADC* AMT-36 7442 4 ODEV4’ ADC-4 14 AMT-21 < DEVB< B (1A3) ADC-5 5 AMT-22 AMT-23 ADC-6 AMT-37 (15) 6 <- DEVA—. A )(9) ADC-7 7 ODEV7* AMT-24 A (83) A BDC-B AMT-25 ATR* [A2] MCLR* [82 J p4* [A2] BDC-20 r--i MS*< I I )—ORSTØ4 (2A4) DXT-15 DEVEI 0 DE B MSINP J2 MS-START S1RES SPARES AMT-42 -()-—.- SWI NOT çSPECF > (I) USED AMT-34 (7) 12 (3) 25 XDATOO (2) L —-(4) —‘ 9 \(6) 7 C; (5) 74LS00)> (4) 974S14 (5) 2 - 3 I I ______ I I -I 1 2 3 4 8L2 +5V T0R*ut)> ——)>-—()BIRQL IRQ TRfl I (12) (5)(12) 0 Q 0L!.L.IAKF [81 1 IRKF 7438 BIA KOL 37 (12) 0—- ) (13) LIRQø 74LS74 CRY 8RW [5B2) CD1 (7) (8) /7 i-;;-i D QO — >CK XIRQ1 ODIN0 [2831 (14) C CE1 C2B3) (10) 7 OS )- (13) ,, C QC XIRQ2* Q____... F1 (15) (2) (3) (3) 1Q INIT* 6 ED 10 >- [B21 CF1 46 (5) (1) (2) ii 2D 2Q I---1 B QB XIRQ3* Q_.____ \,,_--t_) XIRA1 \\ 47 (7) J2k 0 0 74LS1 93 4 3D 3Q L?7 ii ) IRR1* CH1 74148 )(2) (3) (11) (10) (13) A A 7, (15) (13) 3 6) 40 4Q C XIRQ4 O A Q8 82 (3) 1882* 4 ) (12) ‘“ 81882* (11) 7) (13) (12) (4) 1883* (5d76) ‘F 0 (14) 81 5D 59 B 3 - ) LIR* LO CLR 48 1884* (5B2) 4 )_(5) upDNA -9) (14) 60 69 (15) CR1 (2) 0 80 - A 5 )—-D 1R85* XIRA3* 74LS1 74 >>-0 LIRQ5* (5) (5B1)(483) [5B2] 6 )_LZ.b1886* (5!— LIRQ6* (9) (582) +5V [5B2] (2) )— (1 XIRR4* . >>—0 LIRQ7 +5V 8 [5B2] 49 7442 9 (11) 18 KE IAKF 0— BDMGOL (83) VECTOR*(3B1)(83) [5 B2] DM600— [B2IDMR VECTO .... 8M2 J/ 54(10)BIAKI BIAKIL 0— 116 MASTER BDMRL 680 [2B3) MCLR*(2B3)(5B3) (8) T. BN1 BSACKL (12) (13) DMAA*Q(AJ_.( 7 OS )(14 DD1 (2B1)(3B2)(3B2) CRY BRW [84] (15) F-1 (7) () 6 E0 XDMR1 .i2) (B4)(2A1) OR1 (- )- MASTER DMG0* (2) (l3)6(l2) BREFL DEl I >)0 C QC DM60 j)J 4 54 74148 53 (1) (9) DF1 (1) ;! D 0 ) I QB — B 6) (13) XI NIT 2 82 C 1 74LS193 DM1 (14) 1 Al XDMR4*O W! A QA 22 (15) >—0 XDMG1 0 80 A 3 OMAD0— LD CLR (14) EQ CLAIM0—--— [5B4] XADDR [5821 MO4* AUP DNA B B +5V >—0 XDMO2* +5V 0 (4) CLAIM*0 — 36 (6) [583] 8T2 6 (5) 7417 >—0 XDMG3* RQRF0— BINITL D 8) [281] 3)58121c11 732 55 (11) ( (5) 7442 0 9 DS1 (12) ))o XDMO4* -=- BINIT 37 74LS74 9* (6) (4) CK DMAA* p DM8 B2) (83) C (382) D.MASTP (582) (1) 1R3] DM68* (83) ECN DOTE +5V REVIS IONS ADC* NOTES: 5 —THE FOLLOWINGSYMBOLS/NOTATIONSARE USED ON THE DIAGRAMAND/OR PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDASSEMBLY. SIGNAL NAME CONNECTOR [4821 —SIGNAL SOURCEDRAWINGLOCATION, OR CONNECTORPIN IC —INTEGRATEDCIRCUIT SAT —SELECT AT TEST ——-—GERMANIUMDIODE NUCLEAR DATA 1 —ALL DIODES ARE 6964 OR EQUIVALENT, EXCEPT AS NOTED. (4A2) —SIGNAL LOADDRAWINGLOCATION PIN TRANSISTOR (P1) —PRECISION RESISTORS 100PPM —-——SILICON DIODE ZONE LOCATION C BOARDNAME 2 —ALL RESISTORS ARE 1/4W, ±5%, EXCEPT AS NOTED. 1/8W, ±1% METALFILM TLSHEET NUMBER ri_C. BOARDNAME 1 I C .C_ ZENER PIN ( ) —IC PIN DESIGNATION DIODE LOGICDIAGRAM 3 —ALL CAPACITORSARE pf. EXCEPT AS NOTED. OC COMMON 12 DMACONTROLLER& KEYBOARDINTERFACE —>>—-—CONNECTORDESIGNATION TUNNELDIODE -01 4 —I.C. VOLTAGES, EXCEPT AS NOTED: CONNECTOR NC - NO CONNECTION FERRITE BEAD SELENIUMDIODE (ND-DMA-A) 14 PIN DIP, PIN (7) GND: PIN (14) +5V 94& RESISTOR PACK I .C. LOCATION RESISTOR PACK - DRAWNBY: R.F.Y. CHECKEDBY: SHEET 1 OF 5 16 PIN DIP, PIN GND: PIN +58 - CONNECTOR (8) (16) 680T0 +5V I80T0 +5V .1 LOCATION ONP.C. 80. I TYPE I TYPE -C. APPROVEDBY: 24 PIN DIP, PIN (12) GND: PIN (24) +SV 390 TO GND .C. ONP.C. 80 DATE DRAWN:3-10-77 /4— S7O-2420-OI I I ______ I I I I - 2 3 4 RPLY1 (1)1 43 (4) (2) 7400 DMRSTP* OMRRWRT (152) (B21 (2 (5) 0 Q C 72 (14) 74LS74 __I:— 1I YJd12) —-_ BDOUTO (10 -U3) (B3) (3) lY ---OXWRT (13) 52 (3 (6) 4B 4 - 74LS51 Q* P XDT 16 (B3) RMWF*Q— (12 OR 745 (B2) 63 (42) (1 D Q (1) S 2i\ OR 745 CLR DMGØ* 7LS157 - _c.i [1B4 2Y (1) 72 _c.1 2B L 74LS74 +5v (9) 3Y — SRPLY(A2) (10) 3B (11 Q*(R) (14 >. — RPLY1 A C A CF2 c_i__)____ (14) LR E4 57 11) (13 4 (12) 4B -- XRPLY*O< 75154 ) (13) 4Y —Q PRPLY (13) 4B [B31 (1 s • 74LS157 (1) 74LS157 +5V S (4) I(5) (6) (7) (15) G 051 S/L S B C D (11) (10) = M1STER SRPL >>—o XCLK [5B31 [521 65 I U 7419S * 10MHZ BRPLY 4(82) CJ2 01(1 1Q WRTF(B1) BSYNC° CLR QA QB QC QD 1 7406 >XSYNC* 54C12x05T0 xDRTO 10 :3) [B3] 10* >—NC 4) I(13) RLY2 CK2 DL1 2Q (1) !2___RMWF(51) MP1 8WTBTQ XWT8T (4)(13) 20 >>—o 16) [583] 4 )—o RMWF* (s2) F—-- CH2 (2), I (9) 8DRTDQ CK1 (12) 3Q L_ 6(8) XDIN 10 WDDF(NOT 4 [E1 3D 0 [353] XWLID*O_<< 3Q* 11) USED) -NC 0M5DO WTBT >- *- 42 [5B4] 3 5P2 58 z 74LS1 75 I (10) (15) BYTF 88S7L )CP2 xBS7 CL1 )3B2) (551 ‘/ IE1 (6 ) (13 40 XBY5D*O 52 02 NC (5) 74LS51 OR 7451 a_ : - C2 0 BRPLYL 0 ) CE2 w Z w € XDDTO : XBYDD [1541(553) — 70O.- 4 z *, 0 w (352) -J i4)54(13) 8RP’CY [—:-:-—--————;1.(4)(351) MP3 XWRT0— DMRWRT(52)B3) (582) [s2J [5B31 XDRT + 5v 0 0 RQRF 58 (6) (6) 2 183 1CO s1?(3B1BDIN 74LS04 ENOUT _J — I SF2 PRPLY0— imr—\ \[7 w *, 0 Li (5) id 18 59 (52) BRPLYL — 74L574 0— = C4 MCLR 1C2 25 4 [1531 (1) Li 2Y DMDIN Q* (6) (3) DMRRD 71 (3) :o 39KHZ 1C3 ii 2B MDSTER 0— 78 (7) 74LS08 4[583] [83] _ (1 (11 w I- 16 I : 35 In : B -::I4E:--(9) MP4* ci) 13 E 5J2 (9) DMDWRT (10 —0 BDRTR MP30— I- - C- DM00 [584] 26 2Y 38 [583] 83 74LS1 57 D15 >BSYNCL 79 [1841 •(1O 8SYNC0— +5V 2dO (14 45 +5V —C-- (4) (552) (53) -C- 74LS1 53 DMDOUT w_ 12 13] 71 (6) fl2) 7 2C1 \j WRTDLY0— (5) 74LSO8 82 )>OBDINL (10 52 I [583] (1 BDINO — (10) 2C2 +5v MDSTER0— S (552)(153) (B2) (5 74LS1i 5E2 (13) [583] Ii 9 () 2d3 (15) 4) RMWFcD (6) 81 >BDOUTL (52) BDOUT 51 A B 0— (11) 15) (1) [(10) (52)(5B2) (9) (2) I0 5K2 ]?TT1T)) (12) — (1) 74LS74 WRTF RMJF 1OMHZ* 80 F:::*up CRY (3) >—BTBTL (52) (81] (‘33) SO 22 26S1 2 1HZ (5B5) I 84 (8) ON 74LS193 RPLY2 4b: 74LS193 [53] . CLII QA 08 QC QD QA B I C 00 BWTBT ((13) [i4) () (2) (6) 114) ) (2) (6) (7) I 39KHZ* MP10— Ri (Bi) ECN DDTE [5831 220 REVIS IONS ç5) 85 + RESET (182) —. 74H04 4 (3) (4) (5) A C D NUCLEAR DATA DU1 I L:::--— - (15) CO (5)54(i2) I >XTMOUT* (11é DIAGRAM 74161 LOGIC o) DMACONTROLLER& KEYBOARDINTERFACE QC QD C 05 QB 7 (ND-DMA-A) - (14) (13) (11) I2) DRSWNBY: R.F.Y. I CHECKEDBY: -1O SHEET2 OF5 DSTE DRSWN:3_))-77 SPPROVEDBY: y(frj 2 3 I S70-2420-OI I I ______ I 2 I 3 4 (3) DM80 [584) 66 (6) XDIL15 BDDTD DV2 (3) [283] 742O XDRL15*0 [--1 BO XDAL14 << VECTOR 1 c..2__o c I0 BD4L15 XDAL13 [i82] 18 0U2 (6) XDAL12 (4) (14) E2 El 1Y (15) BV2 XDRL14*p Bi RDDB15 (3) 18 << Ii 83>- ___>____0 BDAL15L BD8L14 (13) Z3 (5) BDAL150— — (10) 28 (81) DT2 r (7) (11) 8U2 (12) C4 2Y 12 (12) XDAL13*0 I A71 B2 (11 84 (6) << C (11) (10) 8DD814 2B W \\ BDAL14L 80 12 E4 r (10) 82> 7— -0 0804L1 3 BDAL14 22 26512 A3] 112 84 (11) 0— — 052 (13) 38 (9) (Al) 3Y Ii (4) XDRL12*0 I—1 83 B3 (10) << C15 (13) ADDB13 38 81)- w -0 BOAL13L 13 BDAL12 E3 r (6) 7, Lib (14 82 0— 21 83] 83 (14) BDAL13 — ) 48 (12) (Al) 45 10 (1) 63 8S2 (2) 82 (13) 800812 48 80)- A E2 (1) r ‘F BDAL12L A 81 74LS1 57 BDAL120— 20 XBYRD0-- 82 XWAD (1) 32 DR2 XDAL11 74LS (Al) (581) (1) 20 [2B11 (6 283 26S1 2 XDRL11*0 << +5V0— B1 IC El (4) (15) BOAL11 Al (6) [A3] 0P2 — XDRL1O*0 [--1 81 6) << 7408 -I7) El BR2 13 Ii iQ BDAL1O 15) \: 83 \/ [831 13) -7,————0BDAL11L DN2 02 (10) BDALL1icy- — 23 12) XDAL1A (2) XDRL9 0 B -iSV KBØ7 KB04 (B06 K801 (803 (805 (800 KB02 RC1 RC1—10 RC1 RC RC1—19 RC1—7 RC1 RC1 1 —20 —17 — —18 ‘\ 1±j ‘ c —8 ( D82 —9 SCCLK SCIILD* 3821 [44] +5V ]305 —I—-, -[O05 i25- —.. TiOOO5 —i—i — TfOO5 — FE1 F L I———] LIZ I I Lt L’’ F F LT_ 14; r :j; 0- Q 1OK 4.(15) 1: 100051 boos S(6) J i (13) 25— 0005 (14) 10K 0005 10K 10K LI 10K Z-] 11 7j 10(1 7 — — 7] 1. __c.) -I (5) (3) (9) 1 1 I I I I I I I I I I I (4) CEPCETA (51 5- (6 I C 0 B 4 LD (7 74161 5 54(12) 19 (4)4(13) (6)(h1) CO 413) (11) 4(12) j(1o(2) I (15) C QC QD QB LR 6 Wi (12) (14) (13) (1) )— I -I — (13) -C (4) (14) (15) 44 0 (13 74148 5) SCN1 L_ 0 SCN2 El SCN4 (9) 7442 43 42 41 40 11 Os E0 112 111 110 KBEN* [SB1] I 16 >cj >) I 9 8 7 6 4 3 2 0 (8002 KBDO1 (7) (8) L ji2(2) — _ — - L (14 (_t. c12. (13 (11 (12 (11 (10 (13) 114 1(2 113 112 Al 40 Al (5) 110 6331 6331 +15V0 1? ?(15 E E (15) Q8 97 Q6 Q5 94 93 92 91 7406 7406 98 Q7 Q6 94 Q5 93 7406 92 91 (9) (7) (7) (6) (4) (_a (6) (5) -- (4) (2) (3) c1_ (2) (1) £. 2 (12) (2) DD2 (6) — 98 - _[JsE —i—i F L ‘ F I L Fc L1I I I I F5E I LJI L I I I r-: L LJ I 4.2.2K (12) -: KYTM* -:i 15:: L°°° 1 I, L 4 !_i (4) 114— p2.K oodi 0001 2.2K (13) (1)(14) j_ 10) 0001 0001 25— (5) 0001 -0 0001 (3) 0001 2.2K1 22K 1 2.2(1 2.2K) 1 2.2K) 98 93 92 (5114) 91 94 95 -I -1 1 -I -1 I 1 -I -I I I I I I I I (6004 —. —> — — — — —> — RC1—14 RC1—4 RC1—13 RC1—3 RC1 RC1 RC1—11 RC1 —12 K8107 —2 (8102 (8106 (8105 (8101 (8104 —1 (8100 KBIO3 -I I . MUTIR* [5o4] . (14(1O) LS08 j RF46 r 3R2 (13) (11) (14) (11 (13 (14 (3) (4) (6) (141 (11) (13) (6 4) 1 (6) (3) (4) 10 20 3D A 50 10 4D 2D 5D 3D SD 3D 4D 20 10 :9) Kt4 74LS1 KT KT KT 3. 74LS1 74LS1 24 3 2 1 2 CLR 3 CL 2Q INIT* 39 [ 49 59 74 6Q 19 49 29 39 74 59 74 1 49 39 1Q 5Q 29 B2] (5) (7) ______(10) (12) (15) ( (7) (12 i — iJ 11 — : - ______r —000CLK IRAS* [143] (5) (581) KYTM 7414 (VECTOR 26 KYTM BITS) (6) — BXFR [5112] I RF44 [382] 738h1 )7438(82 438O 43D__—0 (4) 738ii2__.O (5) I 438° I N (3) (5) 0— 7438 1 7406 7406 . 12 12 (3 D 6) 74LS74 +5 17 V (10) (ND-DMA-A) DRAWN DATE NC () (6) BDOL07L BDOLR6L BD4L05L (384) 804 (384) BDIIL03L (384) BOOLØ2L BOVL01 (384) 8011 (384) (3B4) (384) DR1(WN: (384) BY: L04L LOOL SC (41) R.F.Y. DMA H L (\l 3—10—T7 LO CONTROLLER I I 4 LOGIC 1(PPROVED CHECKED & KEYBOARD DIAGRAM BY: BY: ()O) L’dH DATA INTERFACE I I S70-2’420—OI SHEET ECN I-z =:>- 0 C>- — LI 0 L — - o REV Q bi : z w x L —: w 4 I w W r co: S Cd) 0 ).- I OF °-z O 0 : - ONS DATE 0 V) — i- _J >- W W w 5 A XI C C C ______ I I I iO-UZfiZ-OLS G]AOUdd LL-OL-C:Ntiuern]! S O 133HS t1Q 3D3RD Ad NMVG [501] .013W (V-VO-ON) 0 3DVJN3INIaVoA 3111OI1NODVO IwvIo DIE3O1 (sot) [soo] NI01D (501) * ZI-IWOI 0 viva NV31flN (SOl)( 100) SdW0- (000) (000) SNOIS IA3 (501) I I b a 31a ND3 •0 O3ISOW (EL) (I) (I) (6)1 013 V .____SLSD..______.______. 0 1IOWOO t A1dIJO (oL):a [] (1) A1G.LW10— 09 09 vr5 J (St 05+ (L) (080) (SI) * dW OS1t7 —0 !OM000 (01) U 05+ lit LS117L ( 101) —0011013 AS+p (01) IL) • 179 (ii) ( L) ) (1) OS OS 9) (500) VNO V (501) [Lot] (SOS) 0 *JI1 (ZOO) I;) (5) 013 O1 >0 Cs) (171) (Sot) (lOt) 1L) [50t] —I 17151171 .500I OOWO (ii) (5) .tboil 0— oO 0 so (5) 51) (ZL) (lot) 56LOut EI (IL) t7lL — -C :r (0) (1) .90011 0— 80 017 0 cn (0) 1) —I m 05+ 1 0 a (lot) (5) .s0011 0- DO 3 (01) .500I r, (9) z (17) (lot) z- .00011 o—-y 00 0 (6) AdD :— — (01) SI) 1100 LJ I,, Q U* m (too) ‘—p (SI) ()(lL) (17L (500) IdOl c: (St) c, C r’l 0*1 NDO)I(St) OP 0 X 9OlJI a (iioS) (01) OS CM *1 *1 1901000 ii hit (8 6 -C -4 : -v 1(6) 9 [sot] (9)* .9001 00 9OShhiL 05+ (1) 51 (5) — *01 (5) zv (1) N3)IDAD — at -v -< C* \J\ (1) 00 aNo1o—K< T 1.- - ‘(0) LX Lii 3 .0 T63 (9) ON0 0KE —>-—--——0 aNo - I 3v_ iia L1O OIS1I7L 05+ Il n ON0 0—<—---— —>-———0 ON0 [081] [SOS] LJO .IINI 0— —•0001i1a8 0N0 05+ o-4-- —>--0 ONO ZOO Ira Lb (5) 0 0 05+ aNO 0N0 d —>--0 [500] LAD 030 030 [5051 DNASA0 ONO —0 05+ —>--0 0N0 DNASO 9)90Sh1716 [505) 003 LID 110 101000 (01) 05+ ONO —>--0 aNO 05+ (SI) LAO NIOJXO 1013 IWO [OOZ] 3 05+ 0N0 —0 0)08 aNoo-<-- —>---0 II) .0 [sOS) 000 LID LIO (8) (LI) 501000 I 15171 rt-5- 05+ ONO ONO (9) 81 01) 0 [SOS] —>--0 17151171 901000 000- ODD 0DO al-i-a (15J) (500) IL lAlddO Z_0L [SOS] 801000 V d T° [SOS] I 1S171 601000 ALI7 at [SOS] (SOP) I0n ) [OOZ] .011001 inoao —00h1Oa0 05+ ( 10))113N3 -0 LL1 1LWO (P41Yj) i5•° ;.::_1 [501] 1) 0117 C)’- so 9 (01) t D . SDOOdS I I I ______ I 2 3 I 4 XINIT* CN1 CD1 XIRI1 O—< p 13 0— ------—>>—S--C)XIRQ1 D8H CE1 4 CP1 86 XIRI2* p 10 r—O+SV 14 0— - —>>-—--0 X18Q2 Q<- CF1 4 CR1 15 XIRQ3* X1R113*C—< -0 11 R4 +33O O—---—--—-—>>—---——O C’ XDDLD3 IROF 0 CH1 DV2 (2____XDAL15 zo 11IR 114 O—<-----———-—-— IRD (811 ) (1131 1---—> XIRQ4 XDAL15* (1) DD1 BO (31)(4B1) DN1 11D11L02 I NTREN )7:8 XOS7* Q (L___ XBS7 R3 68O 10 XDM6l*O—___ç 1 (84) [811 [31121 5 XDMR1 p A15 p 0— - >—O - 0 (111) (32) DPi XDDL01 DEl DU2 XDM62*O.<( p 2 [81 1 6 0 >>—O XDMR2 XDOL14* (4) XDAL14 r-i Bi DR1 XD11L00 DF1 4 °—:: (3i1)(4B1) Ii (5) [81 1 —0 14 p 3 7 0 >>.—O XDMR3* (3A2) 0T2 Z2 XDL13 XDMG4 XDMR4 (l2) B2 XD11L13*< (341)(4B1) CJ2 12 i_i.__o 13 84 (32) XSYNC*0 <<- XSYNC Z3 j (B2) +5V A 26512 Ji2___. XDAL12 A XD11L12* 83 0 (31)(3B2)(4B 13 (14) LSRL* (62) 2MHZ E2 El A13 [841 (3A2) XDDLO6 DWELL* [81 1 (2B2) 2MHZ* XDOUT XDOUT DR2 XD4L11 (113) * (1) • (113) XDAL1 1 60 (3l)(342)(4Bl) (2112) —C (B3) (82) 10 -----—-O ll (84) (381 1 (3A2) (384) (364) DP2__ XDLlø (4B3) XDAL10*o—4::: Bi (3l)(3ll2)(4Bl) (82) Ii —0 lø (3A2) +5V DN2 z2 JPL. XDALØ9 XDALg9* r;;i B2 (3l)(32)(4Bl) XBS7 (82) 12 AØ9 (6) —0 [1121 77 (13) (32) DM2 Z3 (481) 26512 —0 xDLø8(3l)(32 XWRD* XDAL08* .c---k 23 (3l)(3l2)(4B1) (. (14) XDAL03 (82) E2 El —OEØ8 [811 XDDL02 XRPLY* [81 1 (3B2)(382) [1111 OMRF1 DL2 zo .i2___ XDLø7 [B31 X8YAD* Bo (2) (31)(34)(4Bl) 10 (B2) —j 1107 (3B2) XDRL DK2 Zl i__. XDL1LO6 0 (4) [B11 XD11L06O—c •—c: Bl (112)(3111)(4B1) (B2) Ii i2__ 0 1106 (3B2) (62) EDAL1 DJ2 (12) Z2 X011L05 (382) (3B1)(3B2)(4B1) 52 70 (.1iL... 1105 26S12 (3B2) XDOUT Z3 XDL1LO4 (15) [1121 11011L04*O____ —C (3B1)(362)(4B1) 13 (14) +511 E2 El (3112) 1OHMZ 10MHZ 0141100* 1 4(283) (113) [2B3] (284) (283) B (264) B 0F2 ZO XD11L03 60 (1131(1121(381 )(382) CHAR XD11L03* [3113] I0 1103 DRNDF1 (3B2) (382) DE2 Zl X011L02 XD11L02* l...... <( —C 61 (112)(113)(3B1 )(382) Ii —0 1102 (382) CV2 (12) Z2 (l0) DEVSEL x1111L01 [831 —C 62 (11) (112)(113)(3B1 )(3B2) 12 DM0 —0 1101 63 (382) [1131 (15) 26512 Z3 63 0111 XDAL00*Q—.----E--El 13 (14) DRNDF2* E2 El -(9) (113) E0DL1 ECN DATE +5V REVIS IDM5 NOTES: 5 —THE FOLLOWINGSYMBOLS/NOTATIONSARE USED ON THE DIAGRAMAND/OR PRINTEO CIRCUIT BOARDASSEMBLY. AOC* SIGNAL NAME CONNECTOR [4112] — SIGNAL SOURCEDRAWINGLOCATION, OR PIN IC INTEGRATEDCIRCUIT SAT — SELECT AT TEST ————GERMANIUMDIODE 1 — ALL DIODES ARE 11964 OR EQUIVALENT, EXCEPT AS NOTED. (4112) — SIGNAL LOADDRAWINGLOCATION NUCLEAR DATA — VCONNECTOR .C. PIN Q —TRANSISTOR (P1) PRECISION RESISTORS 100PPM —*4--— SIL)CON DIOOE I ZONE LOCATION 2 —ALL RESISTORS ARE 1/4W, ±5%, EXCEPT AS NOTED. BOARDNAME 1/8W, ±1% METALFILM ,...... •L_ SHEET NUMBER I ( ) — IC PIN DESIGNATION ZENER DIODE I.C PIN BOARDNAME 3 —ALL CAPACITORSARE pf, EXCEPT AS NOTED. LOGICDIAGRAM OC COMMON CONNECTOR —>>—— DESIGNATION TUNNELDIODE YYY LAYINTERFACEASSEMBLY 4 — I.C. VOLTAGES, EXCEPT AS NOTED: CONNECTOR NO PIN C NC - CONNECTION FERRITE BEAD - SELENIUMDIODE O72)B (ND-DMB-A) 14 PIN DIP, PIN (7) GNU: PIN (14) +5V 946 RESISTORPACK I.E. LOCATION 16 PIN DIP, PIN OND: PIN (16) +5V - DRAWNBY:THJ CHECKEDBY: igI4 SHEETI OF 5 (8) CONNECTOR 2.2K TO +5V .C. LOCATION ON P.C. BD. +5V 24 PIN DIP, PIN (12) GND: PIN (24) IC. TYPE ON BD I .C. TYPE j P.C. DATE DRAWN:2-17-77 APPROVEDBY: y 570-2413-Oil I I ______-- ______ I I I ÷ 2 3 C9 1600 R28 4.7K 4 5v +15v — (1 2) R26 2 2K ZDLY 3Ous D [A2] (10) 74LS08 BLANK* SLINK ll2R_23PLTINH* RC—24 COL6 [82] [143] PLOTEN (4 SEEK V :LOTF [42] ÷5V ZOLY (43) (9) 3) 4) 5) 6) 42 ‘ 8 C ‘92.2K:C CEP-LD (13) 74LS86 4NK 11 4 CK Q *0121{”””\Qi11Rx4C* .J PLOTF* [811 74LS32 (42) [83]ACCLK CR8 -l2V CLRQA_ (3) (13) —15V r ÷5V 14) 2) 11) (10) 1N4728 1 DRO1 PLTINH ‘(9) FLDMS* +5v [144] 7432 11431 [Ml PLTINH* ) 6 6(l)T )Ll COL2 (10) 7400 MRKMS* - (Al)(B3) )7411(8) S D 8 ALPHA [A3] +5V (81)(483) ZSg7 45( [81] PLOTF* MRKMS (Bl)(4B4) (5B1) [4A2) (13) (82) [A4] A ZSØ6 Q— 44 A [4t2) CL PLOTF (12) 9 C 2 41 48 Q3 ZSØ5 43 ZINH0—--- ) 0— 0 E42) (11) C1l 4S08(hh2 42 luf R33 1K ( 3 zsga0— (5) 34 MRKMS Al (9 (3 (J(5 (6) (42) (7) [4i2) (9) 3258 LD A B C D 2N4124 AC CEP ZSØ20— (10) [4A21 CET 19 ZTC* CLI( (15) 4 33 74161 —0 CLK (81 ) 2 74LS1 51 15 CLR B QC D (14) 4 9 (6) ) H RC 25 w (13) ) COMPLT . (14(l31(12(11) CHCKEN COL4 ALPHA [All IB1] (12) (7) I1 ZDLY - (9) 2MHZ* SKIP* (A2)(L13)(A3)(B3) (1l)r — (1B4) SF0 [144) 74564 [B4) (Q) 12 (8) [B3] (12)1 CHAR 7410 LOG [383] (11) ROW7* - (B3) (4A4) Ui — W 2MHZP [82] •‘:• [341] CHAR (84) __j I- I— [3A2]4 CALPLS cJ ) (3) (4) (5) )- -Z 54000 2MHZ 4(3A4) (4) (4) [3A21 20 )[1A4 .1100 (5) P (4).. 74LS04 ROW* ZTC 6 o)-__ w 7 6 (2) (2) [B2) 0 Q c12._ [A2] ( DMAF1 0— o Q (4) 74LS08 =w SCL* CIILMOD 2MHZ [1831 bJI-VI- •, [144] a- [Bli Q [342] 8 ZCH4* 0>- 0 (4) ADVNC 18 6 [42] (4) (4A2) Q_: - 7474 (14 (13 ADVINH 14 (342) 74574 Li Z Ui X (121(11. 6 (5)1 0 J U) [3A2] 74L532 ÷5V — z c-, 0 W 0—4 (5) DWELL (15) ALPHA SKIP [143] (6)1 D (3) Q* (6) Q* (6) _1 —)< CK —NC [83] LSRU* Q (3) CK C0L6 ROW4 [14412MHZ SF* (11) ,c c) 0 4 (Al) - D LJDI- —W [A2) [1B4) (B D i04(6 (82) (9) C 0 C W W 0 U) (B3) 12 _I — (1) ROW2 (4) ‘‘(6) C (12) (83) 7410 (10)’ (1) C W U) 0 W (Al)(B1)(4B3)(484) ZCH3* — ROW1 (5) (4) lO (13) —z B I (442) I- W W W * (9) . (8) 74161 CHAR EDT i z EOS*[A4] (10) ‘ — — — — — — (14) [Bli +5V CoL6 L004ç___&.) A w [343) 7402 [344 A :o Q W Q (8) CQL6 840 (9) (1) — o>-- Dul CLR (9) — — U) I- [A2] 122.2K( C LD 7404 W I- B XTMOUT* U) 0____< 9 (10) CEP CET CLI ZSO9 ) = I-= >- — (13) 74LS32 I- 8 (9) (7) (10 (2 [4A2] 12 (6) (12) (7) ALPHA 7410 BLINK* 0 Q ZCH2* 7 — 4 (14) 0MHZ* (442) ZSO7 0 44 P [182] 74Q4 (6) 6 (2) (5) 18 [442) 13 M13 D Q SKIP 43 CO ZSR5 0 SKIP [341] (82) 74574 5 (5) (11) [442) SCL* D QD — 12 —0 [83] CFS3 0 (10) ZSO4 42 (81) (Nc) Q* [382] 0 (4) ZTC* ZON* (4) A CK 4 0MHZ QC [442) ri p EOT* Os [lB21* CFS2 0- C (IlL (11 [42] (B2) 74196 11 SF1 ZSO30 Al (82) (1) DMAEN 5 (3) CNT MR 13) (1B3) 74LS74 (82) [3B2] 3 [—-1 C _ci2 B 31 QB ZCH2* [442) 0 LF* +5V [3B21 E0 )cJ.2_.DMA0O* CFS1 0— CLK2 (3) Q* (6) 74161 ZSO2 40 ZON* 4 0 LDAR* CK SKIP* (13 0 (2) (4B3)(4B4) [382) (14) [442] 46 2 CR* (8) [B2] 112 )c!_.Q [384] (42) CFSO0— _(2 A QA 6331 p ZINH (42)(4B3)(4B4) 3 C (82) SF1 (Al) [3B2) (1) 1 (1) Al (7) t LD SP* 4 E* [1 0 +5V0 [83] (1) CHAR* .i SEC (4B3) 1/2 SFO* 2 (9) [3A2) CEP CET CL . (484) R3l t 841 AO I 470K R29 DMAF2 1 25 150 *[3A2] CALPLS 2N4126 [184] 74148 CHAR [A4IEOS* Q 02) 0 [344] ECN DATE 74LS32 DMAINH SF1 0 1OMHZ* ZCHO* ZSO6 Ql [342] F — — (43) [1B2) [442) (9 ) (442) REVISIONS do - CNCKEN 4LS5l luf Q2 [43] (10) I R30 5cr 2MHZ - 22d ) [144] NUCLEAR DATA ALPHA ALPHA FN4124 [811 LK* j [811 +5V (Al) LOGICDIAGRAM (383) 74S11 CSR DISPLAYINTERFACEASSEMBLY ZOLY (11) (1B4) [A2] 10MHZ (ND-DMB-A) CHAR* [1B2] DRAWNBY: CHECKEDBY: SHEET2 OF [3112] T.H.J. I vdU I 5 DATE DRAWN:2-18-77 I APPROVEDBY:d1’ I 570—2413—01 2 3 I ______I______ I 2 I 3 I LINEAR 54042 LOG* [42] 47402 13 74LS32 SPDTM SADØ3 [42] (4A4)(543) I ADVINH* (A4)(2B2) IDINH* AdS (l2) 44 C4 QSRSICALMOD (282) CALPS* (144) [A4] 04 (481) ADVINH* (243) (ll) __c__2____ C DMAINH* M15 84 0 CARYF [] (2B4) (1B3)(2B2) [4B41) (2A2) (7) — (1) LDAUXR* AC14 3D 34 Bil (483) [A4] 89 E3 90 —0Acl5(A3) 4D 44 (10) (2) LOAD Mi4o—-i-) B3 BiD [4B4] 74LS1 74 AC14(A3) [84] lLS283 (13) (12) (3) INTR* O 5D 5Q 89 4Cl30—-- E2 PRUN (81) [A4] (15) 4C12(A3) (4) [82] CHAR* M13 o_—i- 82 60 64 88 [4B41 (82) (283) CLR 4C12(A3) Al 76 A +5 (84) (283) ACl20—-- LUJ_Q+ El V (144)(482) 5 (2A2)(483) Ml2 (6 81 ADVNC +5V (2B3)(484) [4B4] Co A 4[283] (7) +1S (22) A 0+15v I ci (21) 1uf COM : OAGND 1uf CHAR (14) (B2) (9) —1 0-lsv (1B3) 4C T (2A1) E4 (10) ci 3 (281) [A4] 62 1000 Mli 0—------84 DAC8D (24) [4B41 REF (5) OUT ACiø0— 43 (13) (]21 • 87 [44] (15) E3 L___. QC 0 (6) Ml012 83 82 (6)c c!22 86 0— BPO 1D 14 (2) 74LS283 mi XDAL11 INTREN ’[484] —0 AC1B(43) (7) 83 QB cj_! 85 hAil (4) (143) ACA90—__ — _iiB 2D [44] E2 74L5195 XDAL1ø0— 24 (144) 4C49(43) (8: -. (2) B2 ______c_A 44 !—° 73 M092 ---- B4 hAl] (6) 0— REF (16) XDALØ9O— 3D 34 [484 (9 (1 ) t_____4C08(43) (5 1 CLRXAC IN CLR 0 [141] 4C08 Al S/L (11) 4LS14 (1 0) XDALØ8O— 4 MRKRS [441 El : F +i5V C Z n [141] (13) (12) (243) M08 co SD 54 Q_ XDALØ7O yPOSUP [484] (2) (10 RXAC R6 [141) (4B3)(444) (2) (7) [2421 (14) (15) CHAR*Q 74:SO8> 68K bU I- XDAL120— 60 64 DMAEN [B4ILDAR* [1411 [42] (20) (282) +5V SUM A +5V )741l(12) JCT (9) _(1) Q_ I- 20V NC 0 w : w : ci, (9) RNG - C 0 cx ci-) (4A2)(l1) R7 C4 510 z •wzo 4C07 (10) (9: 10 PRUN [441 XDALØ5 0— - lQi —0 (11) (11) (10) by ._i]i NC [11 (42) M07 0— :: RNG 20 24 [4B4] QD* w C W C U-) XDLØ4 0— —0 LINEAR (14) (7 [1B1I 66 (44) ACB6 0-— 43 (13) 0 QD (12)(10 XDILØ3 3D 34 75 E3 B2 — 0— —0 CFS3 (6 76 - VOLT [181] 74LSl 74 (2B4) ) c QC OUT I- W bi W 0-i 74L5283 z XDBLØ20— __i__]__)40 44 CFS2 [484] 83 74LS195 ACØL —0 (5) I-, w [1B1] (284) 4C05 42 B QB :o C W C J 0— —XOUT c_c XDALØ10— L2 5D 54 CFS1 [441 E2 (1 ) 81 I- —0 (2) (4 )fl (541 ) — — ci, c [1B1] (284) M05 0— B2 A 44 (l w - 5 ci-) B XDALB3 XDBL$Ø0-•--— 6D 64 —0 [4B4] 80 CFSØ Al CHAR* >- — [1B1I [1B1] (284) 4C04 0 S/L CLR ACØ4 ACØ5 CLR El [42] XDALØ2 [44] : F (83) (83) (6) [1B1I M04 0— Bi co (442) (442) XDAL$l [4B41 LDCMD* i) INIT* (7) [1811 0— —0 (142) [ 142] +5V ADALBØ [1811 S * (2) [183] LOAD (2) LD * RAM* (3) 104043 14 74LS32 AR [B31 [143] ly !L__ SPADA3 2MHZ* (81) (4) lB 0 (Bl ) (84) SADØ3 [144] 0— (9) (2B3) [42] 4C (5) 104002 0— 24 ACB3 A4 _c_z)____ (10) [143] (6) 2Y [84] (11) E4 (ii) (6) 54002 2B 0 (81 ) M03 84 0— 0— S [42] 74LS1 57 [484] (11) (14) (7) (7) 34 A3 D QD 104001 0— AC42 0 (13) —0 ACB3 3Y 2L__ 68 E3 (83) (442) -;;-N,> [1B3] (10) (6) 69 QC 3B 0 (Bi ) 83 C L1IL.. (1) S4001 ] —0 AC02 +5V 0 0— 0- 74LS283 ECN DATE (.5) 74L5195 (14) (B3)(442) (10) 44 42 B 48 oAdBBo__S--- —0 ACB1 REVIS IONS 108003 0— [1B3] 4Y !L__ SPADØØ E2 (B3)(4A2) [1831 (13) 82 (4) (15) SADBB 4B 0 (81 ) A QA 4Cøø 108D02 11 0— —0 0— [142] [4B4] (1) (B3)(442) IRCLK* [183] Al S/L CLR NUCLEAR DATA 12 ACBB0— (143) IORD01 0— j(1) (l5) [84] El :::F [1B3] (6 J A 5K j I0Døø 13 MØØ 0— 81 0— [R84] DIAGRAM [1B3] (2) LOGIC j7) INTERFACEASSEMBLY DLVSEL . DISPLAY C [183] o (15) DRNDF1 (ND-DMB-A) XDOUT 0— [283]OACCLK [142] [182] DRAWNBY: T.H.J. CHECKEDBY: I.IoL- SHEET3 OF 5 5 DATE APPROVEDBY: DRAWN:2—21—77 R-W S70—2’413—O1 2 —3 I I I ______ I I 2 3 A ZSØ8 zs09 (2B1) (2A3) (B2) (2B2) 9 74LS157 ZCH4* IA 8C07 (4) (1) ___cL) 1I 80 ly Bl 1 .7 (11) [2B4) 0 0 A2 lB lB 38 0 I ZCH3 81 (14) BC86 28 (7) (2) 4 (5) 2B j_ [2B4])4 QB 2Y BiD C 2Y 45 (13) B2 2B Q_) 2B 74LS195 74LS157 4 (14) 74LS 298 B B Cl (13) CB5 38 (9) (3) LOG o—cjj—)3D [2s4 QC 3Y 89 [283] L060* .5 15) (5: A B C2 (83) 3B (1o) .3 __.i2) S/L CLR (l4 Dl (12) RCB40— (12) (4) 4-5 0+5V (14 SPDTM 4D QD 4Y 88 4 K* 5V [2541 3821 J (6 ( (13 D2 48 3 XDDL12 4B (2) (10 (3) —OZSø7 ) ,oi [1D1] _; ws A 13 +15 (22) A S 0 ZSØ6 (B2)(2A1) 0+151 4OO (B2)(2B1) j(lo) (j)(ii (581 (2B1) +_! C5 :PL[382] (2B1) JiIl5) l(ll jT15) ZQD* LDD* luf 0 COM (21) p AGND 0 sn[384] 28 3: C6 ZSØ5 ZSØ4 luf 34 0— [2B3] DAC8O (B2)(281) (B2)(281) (14) (2B1) (281) —15 -15V 74LS157 ZCHØ* 0- Al -W1A (4) (5 ) (2) lB 72 [284] ly 87 3o— — (11) __! 82 ilB (24) i B QD* BEF XDDL11O 40 OUT [1811 22 QD LMM50— - --2 81 (14) 8C020— I2A 28 D 44 QB 2Y (7) +15V XDDLØ2 51 [B2] —t[3B41 _) 86 (6) (13) 82 0- 2Y C QC __c_L 2B [1811 - (6) (17) XDAL1ø 2B 74LS195 74LS298 74LS1 57 BPO NC QB (14) — __c_22 Cl liii 38 [lml) DCØ10— (9) (7) 38 (13) 3Y Ru QC 85 1.21K A QA ;;— C2 (15) ( ‘ 3B (16) i2i REF (P1 ) 38 - LOGD*Q...... i.90— (9) IN S/L CLR Dl C )C [8210- (12) ACAØ0— 4A (12) Rl2 [84] DG19OB 0 48 QD (8) 84 ø0— +5V (6) (13) 6.19K ) Eo LJ K*3 02 4B 813 — (20) (P1 ) (13) 48 If’ (4) NOTE: R15 - SET TO EQUALIZE SUM — wS 3S Dj >- S G JCT 820 VERT. F.S. IN LOG/UN O S 0 I Lzs03 MODE c 0 (2A1) I JTh(15) 100 JTFQf(15) )0— (281) Q ZS02 (19) 4 (16 CSRU*O 2 I(10)1(11) DV (281 NC 800 0— [184] BND Ji) 0 [1B1I (281) 510 0>- - x i- >- 1DV (18) NC u.Iu-c Z w BND — z L)Jv, 0 W (3) LMM20— Al (15) (2) c)WWb. W [82] QA 18 if u( C) (2) (4) (9) (15) 0 (1l) . ZSØ1 — AZ 47 B3 VOLT QD* (3) 18 OUT (5A1) 1/2 - XDAL15 0 LMM10— --ia) Dl (14) (5) bi 0 [181 1 QB 28 — (6) 87 (13) ]zsøø (7) (10) —: C [8 — __Li.?82 82 UJ bi L XDAL140— 2 I-z [lAl I 74LS1 95 74LS298 28 XDAL13 B QB _ci) Cl 0— (13) S G [181] QC o>--- A _c__) (11) 81 L2!__ XDAL12 QA1i C2 (1) _(1 5) M15 8 ---0MD7 ,: w i- 0— — v) 0 (381 ) :I=w B [181) (9 (3A1)(3A3) (383) —w IDI (7) = = )- — S/L CLR ;_?____ Dl M14 7 0MD6 I- C +5V (12) C14) —0 (? I- - QD LF* 84 LF*QL 84 Q— (381)(3A3) 1)(3F3B3) K* _._) (6) .J D2 CHAR* DO [2B1] —0 M13(381) [2Bl] 6 —0M85 LS1572Y (13) 83 (3A1)(3B3) [3A2] CR* 83 5) C282) C283) C383) CR* 6 (2) wS (10) (3) A 5 [2Bl) (12) —0 M12 [2811(12 ( (10) SP 82 (3A1)(3A3) 82 0— (4) 4 (3(3B3) [2B1] —0 Mll [281 1(11 (11) Al Al )(3B3) 1(11) ROW7* C3A1)(3A3) B0W7*0-_ (3 —0 MiD [2821 (10 AD (2) (3A1)C3A3) COL60— 80 )C3A1)C3B3) (14) 53 2 2 XDAL110— [282] —0 M09 [282] 60 —0MW 6331 (381 ) (383) [181] (1) C3A1)C3A3) 6331 2(1 1 XDAL1D0— —0 M08 E (MDø [lAl] -NC (6) (11) C3A1 ( 0 (381 )(3B3) 13 — D QD XDALB9 UJip G 79 [181] (5) (12) 0 CHAR* XDALDB JiE ZSB8 84 C QC 6 [382) [1A1] 74166 [A2] 2 (13) QB XDALD70— ZS$7 0—--- 83 YPDSD1 0—- B —0 YPDSD1 [181] [82] ——-——0LMM5 [83] 74161 (B3)(5B1) ECN DATE A2 A QA XDALB60— ZSØ6 (4) (82) YPOSAD !ii_ Cl (83)CsBl) [181] [82] —0 LMM4 [B3] (9) ) REVISIONS B ZSB5 Al LO CLR XDALD50— (82) LDAUXR f.—0 CHAR* CLR (3) [181] [82] LMM3 [382] 2- —0 [3821 CEP CET XDALD4 A S ZSB4 AD 90 (82) 0— (2) 2 (7) (10 (2) [181] (15 [A21 37 —0 LMM2 NUCLEAR DATA LSRL* S/L 6331 I\D —C (82) 2t1 [181) —0 LMM1 (82) TJ5i) jCiS) YPOSUP MHZ* LOGICDIAGRAM CSRL* p [3A2] 2t184] DISPLAYINTERFACEASSEMBLY [184] SRSI (ND-O$4B-A) [384) DRAWNBY: LHJ. CHECKEDBY: vWP SHEETL OF 5 DATE 2277DRAWN:2_ APPROVEDBY:V1 S70-2413-O1 2 3 I I I > — II 0 . v k) •1 . C) p “: CA) C.) -J -J I- C)r, -, U) U) -J IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF NUCLEAR DATA, I,, THIS DOCUMENT - AND MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, NOR MAY THE INFORMATION CONTAINED THEREFROM BE USED IN ANY MANNER, EXCEPT C.) (-F’ THEREIN OR DERIVABLE BY WRITTEN PERMISSION OF NUCLEAR DATA, THE PROPRIETARY RIGHTS TO THE AFORESAID INFORMATION. OF A PATENTABLE OR UN— PATENTABLE NATURE, ARE EXPRESSLY RESERVEDTO NUCLEAR DATA. PENDING ECN______I 0 0 ______ I 2 I 3 4 CONNECTOR J3 ALL CONNECTORS A & C ALL CONNECTORS B & D CONNECTOR J2 SIGNAL SIGNAL E SIGNAL i: SIGNAL SIGNAL : SIGNAL SIGNAL : SIGNAL BDCOKH il-b +5V BDMRL CNI GND BDCOKH DAI GND ;— BSPARE I --- +5V :L J3-I 42 T I i: : 4 BSACKL DNI 19 :L BSPARE2 -: —12V !_ BPOKH JI-I 82 :i BHALTL CPI 9 2 BREFL CR1 — ---- BEVNTL DRI BADI6 (NOT IMPLEMENTED)C2 GND CI SSPARE 4 (NOT BUSED) C2 GND —.- — BDAL2L DE2 21 BADI7 (NOT D2 DI SSPARE 5 (NOT BUSED) D2 +12V BDOUTL CE2 21 4 .2.!_ IMPLEMENTED) +12V —f- SSPARE BUSED) E2 BDAL2L BRPLYL CF2 22 5 BDAL3L DF2 22 SSPARE I E2 BDOUTL J2-4 El 6 (NOT J3-4 —-- Fl SSPARE 7 (NOT BUSED) F2 BDAL3L J3-5 BDINL CH2 23 6 BDAL4L Di-12 23 !_ SSPARE2 - BRPLYL J2-5 —- BDAL5L SRUNL(NOTE I)JI-2 (NOT BUSED) 1-12 BDINL J2-6 I-Il SSPARE B (NOT BUSED) 142 BDAL4L J3-6 BSYNCL CJ2 24 7 DJ2 24 25 GND --- BSYNCL J2-7 JI GND Ja BDAL5L J3-7 !_ BWTBTL CK2 25 8 BDAL6L DK2 26 A A KI MSPARE A (NOT BUSED) 1<2 BWTBTL J2-8 1(1 MSPARE B (NOT BUSED) 1(2 BDAL6L J3-8 BIRQL CL2 26 9 BDAL7L DL2 MSPARE A (NOTBUSED) L2 BIROL J2-9 LI MSPARE B (NOT BUSED) L2 BDAL7L J3-9 BIAKOL AN2 ONLY 27 0 BDAL8L DM2 27 : I I i I BDAL9L DN2 28 -- GND BIAKIL J2-II MI GND M2 BDAL8L J3-Iø BIAKIL CM2 ONLY BDMRL J2-I BIAKOL J2-tO BSACKL J3-2 N2 BDAL9L J3-II BBS7L CP2 29 12 BDALIØL DP2 29 BDMGOL AS2 ONLY 30 13 BDALIIL DR2 30 BHALTL JI-5 J2-2 P2 BBS7L J2-12 P1 BSPARE 6 (NOT BUSED) P2 BDALIØL J3-12 :ii: BREFL J2-3 BDMGIL J2-I4 RI BEVNTL JI-6 J3-3 R2 BDALIIL J3-13 BDMGIL CR2 ONLY 31 14 BDALI2L DS2 31 PSPARE 3 -- BDMGOL J2-13 SI PSPARE 4 (NOT BUSED) S2 BDALI2L J3-14 BINITL CT2 32 5 BDALI3L DT2 32 GND BINITL J2-15 TI GND T2 BDALI3L J3-15 BDALØL CU2 33 i 6 BDALI4L DU2 33 .:!:_!_ ---- GND UI 2 BUSED) BDALI4L BDALIL CV2 34 GND 7 BDALI5L DV2 34 PSPARE I — BDALØL J2-16 PSPARE (NOT U2 J3-16 VI +5V V2 BDALI5L i3-I7 +5VB Y__ BDALIL J2-17 CONNECTOR JI CONNECTOR P1 CONNECTOR P2 CONNECTOR P3 PIN SIGNAL Q_ PIN SIGNAL PIN SIGNAL i: SIGNAL PIN SIGNAL >-z I I I GND GND — I BPOKH BBI 6 BEVNTL BRI +12V PROCESSOR GND 2 2 +5V 2 SRUNL CHI ONLY NC 2 +5V 3 GND 8 +5V 3 —12V 3 GND 3 GND 4 NC 9 NC 4 +5V w : w : i, 5 BHALTL API 0 BDCOKH BAI 5 +5VB NOTE: SRUNLON CONN. CHI, — (I) BSPARE (BUS SPARE) NOT ASSIGNED, —: PROCESSOR MODULE ONLY. = RESERVED FOR DIGITAL USE, w :oz 0 w 0 (BSPARES ARE BUSED,EXCEPT BSPARE6) VIEW FROM MODULE SIDE OF BACKPLANE w - SSPARE (SPECIAL SPARE)-NOT ASSIGNED, (I) B = >- — IPOWERSUPPLYI J210 NOT BUSED, AVAILABLE FOR ‘ND-MMF I I I J2-II .J2—14 39-7009 I USER INTERCONNECTIONS. CONNECTORS ‘A’ a ‘B’ I CONNECTORS’C’ a ‘D’ ‘P1 I J2 I I ‘S PSPARE (SPARE)- NOT ASSIGNED, I3 I P2 NOT BUSED, CUSTOMER LN PROCESSOR P3 J4 2 ASJ USAGE NOT RECOMMENDED. I MSPARE(MAINTENANCE SPARE) 2 OPTION 2 M N R S OPTION I MfNR(’S \ I CONNECTED TOGETHER AT EACH I I OPTION LOCATION. 3 OPTION 3 1R ‘ ‘ OPTION 4 ,1N M7NR/S 4 OPTION 6 RI,: OPTION 5 I , , 5 OPTION .7 )N; OPTION 8 M’ M’NR/S ECN DATE 1 REVIS IONS 6 OPTION 10 OPTION 9 A B C D NUCLEAR DATA DAISY CHAIN INTERCONNECTIONS SHOWING OPTION LOCATIONS FOR PROPER CONNECTOR TABLES PROPAGATIONOF DAISY CHAINED SIGNALS. FOR BACKPLANE, FRONT (ND-MMF) (CONNECTIONS BETWEEN ‘MZ’ TO ‘N2’ AND ‘R2’ TO ‘52’ ARE ON I OF MADE WHEN ANY STANDARD OPTION IS INSTALLED IN MODULE) US DRAWNBY: RMG CHECKEDBY:I’dI SHEET I 72-1374 _ DATEDRRWN:3-2-77 RPPROVEDBY: Pit S7O24I90I 2 3 I ______ I I 2 3 4 56 0V2 26S12 13 -OD15 ‘IN—LINERESISTOR PRCI( (1K TO +5V) 63 BDL15L z3 (13) (2A1) n —0 BDAL15 (1B3)(183) 12 (11 ) BANK RI 12 O014(2A1 ) I BDAL14L 82 BDAL12 (3) (jppDAL14 o.____1_.oCEØ z2 — 10 • 1q AC (1B4)(184) r— [1841 BDBL11 74367 DT2 Ii __c_) 2 All I ACS1 +5V B 2 16 BDIL13L 1 BDAL13I BDL16 (7) (184) (10)1 849 [1B41 ZI (6) __(..) p 3D 3Q OR1O(iB4 (241 )(241) ACS2* B)(1B3 I ON RflLI 9 [1B4) 1K B1B I DS2 10 _cll) 1O) BORRD 4 ACS3* ENABLE BDiL1 2L 80 (12)4 (6)1 [1B4] A1) BDBLB ZQ i]!.) D 5 ) 0848 ACS4* 74174 I [1841 8D4L7 (14) (15) (241)(241) 6 ACS5* £ I p22?(7) CLR [ 1841 0ORPLY (12)1 (11)0847 ACS6* ( 182) —. [1B41 A A (241)(241) 8C57* 85 YNC 55 [182] [1B41 BDIN DR2 26512 13 Dli [iB2] +3V RDLY BDAL11 83 (2B1) L z3 (13) [144] REFCY* DP2 12 (ii1o oi 8C50* O—F--o CEA [183] [1841 BDRL1ØL 82 JO) (281) z2 BCS1 0-_H_c DORPLY [1841 [144] 2N3642 Ii __c__1_oD09 BCS2* BSYNC 67 BDRL9L 81 (6) (2B1) [1B41 406 (10) I 180 zi 846 BCS3 Q__i_Q CE3’ BDIN [1841 [1821 I (28i)(241) RPLY* DM2 I __i_o D08 BCS4* —ocy— CE4 (182) I BDRL8L 80 (281) BDAL6 [1841 1 ZO (3) (7) BC55 * 1 1 B45 pIo 1E E21 . p [184] BDRL5 (6)I •_• (281)(241) .o 2Q I BCS6* [184] iiS ROAL4 8C57* (142)(24i )(2Bi) 3D 3Q 404 (12)1 (i1)p 844 [184] ACSi 8041.3 (]_]_ I1 (2Bi)(24i) (142 )( 242) ( 282) 50 10 I ACS2* DL2 26512 13 _ji Q (142 )( 242) ( 282) 5 4C53* BDAL7L 83 (241) 74174 z3 (13) (14 6 p 843 (142)(2A2)(2B2) 6 (2B1)(24i) 4C54* I 120K2( 12 cJ1LD6 (142) C243) ( 283) 0 ACS5* BDAL6L 2B (241) ) (10) I402 (14 (i3b (142)C243)(2B3) z2 B42 I AC56* C (2B1)(241) DJ2 Ii D5 (142)(2A3)(2B3) 57* 8DRL5L o- I I 4 DH2 ‘p __c__2_o D4 (2B1)(241) L_____ I N 8DRL4L (3) (241) 0 0Z (1 .15) K 1E 2E A i2iS (j)(7) BC50* (142) C2A1)(2Bi) B 45 44 BCS1 B 0F2 26512 13 CH2 26512 13 (1A2) C242)(2B2) BDINL (i5)( BDRL3L 83 (13) (241) 83 BCS2* < 3 BDIN (142) (2A2)(2B2) (144) (144) BCS3* DE2( ‘2 u]j_ CF2 12 (242)(2B2) 12 B 0 (12) ODQRPLY[144] (142) BDRL2L 0—c(E—————-( 2 (241) BRPLYL 82 BCS4* ) (_LO) BDAL2 (10) 4 z2 < z2 — BRPLY +3V (1A2) (2A3)(2B3) (5) (NC) BC55 * ‘1 CR1 1 — 680 (142) (2A3)(2B3) (241) BREFL 1B BCS6* BDRL1L (6) BOAL1 o•—<<--—c zi 1 —OBREF (1A2) (2A3)(283) (183) BCS7* 10 CJ2 (1)( I 410 (1A2) (2A4)(2B4) BDALØL (241 BYNCL 0—<< zo _c_)o BDRLØ —QBSYNC (NC) E 1E 2E : 2 (iB3)(iAl ) (9)? c2( *[1 )7 (-;;--—--:.0 RPLY 44] ECN DATE 1:-— I p MOIN*[144] REVIS IONS ADC* NOTES: 5 — THE FOLLOWINGSYMBOLS/NOTATIONSARE USED ON THE DIAGRAMAND/OR PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDASSEMBLY. SIGNAL NAME CONNECTOR [4A2] SIGNAL SOURCEDRAWING OR — LOCATION, CONNECTORPIN IC — INTEGRATEDCIRCUIT SAT — SELECT AT TEST GERMANIUMDIODE 1 — ALL DIODES ARE 0964 OR EQUIVALENT, EXCEPT AS NOTED. —t--- — (442) — SIGNAL LOADDRAWINGLOCATION NUCLEAR DATA .C. PIN TRANSISTOR — PRECISION — SILICON DIODE LOCATION (P1) RESISTORS 100PPM —+1—— P C NAME 2 — ALL RESISTORS ARE 1/4W, ±5%, EXCEPT AS NOTED. IIZONE BOARD 1/8W, ±1% METRLFILM I— SHEET NUMBER I I C BORRO C — IC PIN DESIGNATION ZENER DIODE C NAME ) PIN LOGICDIAGRAM 3 — ALL CAPACITORS ARE pf, EXCEPT AS NOTED. j DC COMMON —>——CONNECTORDESIGNATION TUNNELDIODE BASICFIRMWAREASSEMBLY 4 — I.C. VOLTAGES, EXCEPT AS NOTED: CONNECTORPIN—... C NC — NO CONNECTION ——— FERRITE BEAD ————SELENIUMDIODE 21i_cO7i)_>__ (ND-MMC-A) 14 PIN DIP, PIN (7) GNO: PIN (14) +5V LOCATION DRAWN CHECKEDBY: 1 OF 16 PIN DIP, PIN (8) GNO: PIN (16) +5V CONNECTOR BY:THJ SHEET 2 I.C. LOCATION ON P.C. 80. 24 PIN DIP, PIN (12) GND: PIN (24) +5V IC. TYPE ON P.C. 80 I.E. TYPE DATE DRAWN:ll-19-76 APPROVEDBY:,I S70-2V71-nn I I A B [184] [1841 [281] [2B1] [2B11 [2B1] (281)(282) (281)(282) (281)(282) (2B1)(2B2)PULL2 I PULL3 (BCSØ) PIJLL4 (PULL7) (PUL8) 889 888 [1821 B117 [182] 886 B85 [182] B83 [1821 B89 882 [iii2i [182] B88 BRi B87 [182] [1821 [12j] [1B2] [1I2jp) B84 [182] [1B2) [182] [1B2] 883 [iB2j 882 1B2](15 182] 0 0— 0 0— 0 PULLS PULL40 PULL) (2 (21) (17’ ( (15 0 0 8 87 6 84 A 83(58) 2 8 i 87 & cs* 85 8/W 84 V 83 82 i cs* R/W V c: PROD (11)Ei S6834 PROD S6834 56834 (57) () 59 = 60 07 D& 05 03 D 4 D 2 Di 07 D 06 05 04 02 D 3 Di D 0 (2.2K IN—LINERESISTOR (iii (10) (1) C1)__ 0 Lz1__ 0 c..]___ 0 .2___o —0 —0 ——----0 —0 (5) —0 (4) 2)___ (3) —0 —0 cti__0 !2__ (1) —0 —0 —0 (2) 13 1 (8) (281)(282) (6) (281)(282) (281)(2B2) (4) (281)(2B2)pULL6 (3) (2) 13 TO +50) N12V Dl 014 [181] [1811 013 012 Dli (1811 [181] 087 [1811 010 006 [181] [181] 009 DOS DOS [1811 D83 [181] D04 002 001 [181] [181] 000 [181] [1811 [1811 [181] S PULL7 PULL8 PULLS 0 PACK 0 (12) B41 881 THRU THRU I I [184] [1841 [2811 [281) [2811 [2811 [1841 [1841 [2811 [281] [2811 [2811 849 0— Q—<< 0-4 0—<< 0— 0—<<- 889 0 PULL2 (PULL6) cJ1 ACS1 AJ1 PULL4O (BCS1*) ( AM1 BJ1 (PuLL7) CM1 DM1 PULL8) *(J...... ( (16) (17) (18) (20) (22) (21) (23) (24) (15) (11) (14) S6834 (52) 54 ST1 CT1 AT 8C2 CC2 DC 1 2 [1 [184] (9) (8) (7) (5) (3) (6) (4) (2) 84] (BCS2*( 14) CS2 2 2 0—( 0—’ (16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (22) (21) (23) (24) (15 (11) 882 D82 C82 Dvi 801 S6834 (47) 49 +50 I-) [1841 [184] (9) (8) (7) (6) (5) (3) (4) (2) 8CS3 (53*)() 0—cT< 0____4(l(_—_-_ 0—C (17) (18) (19) (20) (21) (22) (23) (11) (24 (15 882 882 082 CB2 S6834 I (41) N12V 43 i I BIAKIL BDMGIL BIAKIL BIAKOL BDMGOL BDMGIL 818 KO [184] [1841 (8) (7) (6) (5) (4) (3) (2) L 0-< 0—<< 0—4::: o—<( (BCS4* AN2 AM2 AS2 AR2 CR2 CS2 CN2 CM2 (16) (17) (18) (20) (21 (19) (23) (22) (24) (15) (11) i 4) ) S6834 (36) 38 (9) [184] (8) [184] (7) (5) (4) (2) (3) 3 3 N12VO (BCS5*)( 14) 1cs5* SV0 -a:- ______(i21 -) (16) (17) (18) (20) (21) (23) (22) (11) (13) t.L3.3uf -1 SPARE 56834 (31 33 l X8 3.3uf i;v 5V x ) (9) (8) [184] [184] (7) (5) (4) (2) (3) —1— SOV •Oluf 8CS6—ç (16) (17) (20) (22) (21) (23) (15) (11) I I S6834 (25) 27 (9) (6) [1B41 (5) [184] (7) (3) (4) (2) NOTES: 8CS70C (57* 1_ 2. (ND-MMC-A) -) -) DATE BANK THIS FOR DRAWN SHOWN ON CONNECTIONS FOR (BA—), (17) (16) IDENTICAL (20) (21) (22) (15) (14) (11) EACH SIGNALS 1C59 DRAWN:_q_7ç SHEET (B) BY:T.H. IN DATA—(D—) MEMORY S6834 (28) PARENTHESIS. AND IS 22 TO SHOWS AND ARE IDENTICAL THOSE IC6O. J. BANK, I.C.NO. BUSSED AND ONE (9) () (5) (7) (4) () SHOWN I 44 BASIC ADDRESS POWER— BANK APPROVED CHECKED EXCEPT AND 5 LOGIC NUCLEAR FIRMYIARE (A) 0 BY DIAGRAM 8Y:1d4I D08 [181] Dl D0O : [181] S yt ASSEMBLY THRU DATA I D07 570-2421-00 SHEET ECN I_z o )- - bJ Ui >c :Q — I- = v, : REV C c, z : W = —z 0 2 - = I S w 0 0 )— IONS OF Q_ i- DATE : v) Q — I- — v, w 2 A j z ______ I -2— I 3 I 4 AAF’ILD [83] ROMLD SRPLY L\P2 4[ (282) 15 7 82] 081* +5V BBS7L ‘7 (9) 0 74148 BS2 04 [ 42] C (1) — (11) BOAL12L 6A 071* BR2 (2) OPT ON A 2 ( 82) BDL1 tL (10) 1606XX O6I* 10 1Q RON 03 [ 081* BP2 421 (13) C 82) 08E 44 23 051* 3 GS .c__L__o BDAL1ØL Q______( )— 2D 2Q RAM 6301 [ BN2 (4) 42) (1) (15) (6) (7) ( 82) (5) (10) BDALØ9L 43 041* Q...... ( 4 EQ )— - 0 QD RAMEN (11) 16g4XX o —c 8M2 02 [ 621 . 74174 24 (282)(283) (7) A (2) (6) (11) (10) 082 (4) (11) BDALØ8L 2 031* Q______(5 04 )— 4D 4Q C QC ______. SPAD2 74LS295 BL2 )7) (13) (12) 081 (3) (481 )(481 B BDLØ7L o—<< i (12) 021* 6 2 SD 5Q - QB ----—-O SPAD1 (4)r—N oi (481 1(481 BK2 (14) (15) OAfl 07E BDALØ6L 7 )i)_ 6 8 QA c_i_a_ J6L i £ 0 SPADØ A E1* E2* [ 621 CLR (481 ) (4B1 A +58 0 MODE (5) (1 SI CLK 0 (1 )cj(9(8) XX+I606XX* 60’ BSYNC +5v DLcfNjB) 061* (283) 06E 5V RAM 18 7442 )(1) [A22(6) I 8J2 C7X* BDALØ5L O—<<-— C >(2) 6X* ROOUT )(3) [283) BN2 2 5X* 28 05E B 7442 BDAL84LQ— AU2 )(5) p X3* BDALZL o— AN2 BIAKOL O—<< AR2 BOMGIL O—<< AS2 BDMOOLo—4::: ECN DATE REVISIONS ADC* NOTES: 5 —THE FOLLOWINGSYMBOLS/NOTATIONSARE USED ON THE DIAGRAMAND/OR PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDASSEMBLY. SIGNAL NAME CONNECTOR [482] SIGNAL — SOURCEDRAWINGLOCATION, OR •CONNECTORPIN IC - INTEGRATEDCIRCUIT SAT - SELECT AT TEST - GERMANIUMDIODE DATA 1 - ALL DIODES ARE 6964 PR EQUIVALENT, EXCEPT AS NOTED. (482) — SIGNAL LOADDRAWINGLOCATION NUCLEAR IC. PIN TRANSISTOR (P1) — PRECISION RESISTORS 100PPM —ml——SILICON DIODE T3ZONE LOCATION 2 —ALL RESISTORS ARE 1/4W, ±5%,EXCEPT AS NOTED. 1/8W, ±1% METALFILM SHEET NUMBER .... P.C. BOARDNAME ( ) —IC PIN DESIGNATION ZENER DIODE 3 — ALL CAPACITORSARE pf, EXCEPT AS NOTED. LOGICDIAGRAM — DC COMMON FIRMYAREOPTIONBOARD .—>-.—CONNECTORDESIGNATION —Id——TUNNELDIODE 526-01 4 — I.C. VOLTAGES, EXCEPT AS NOTED: V C, NC —NO CONNECTION —.——FERRITE BEAD ——— SELENIUMDIODE 14 PIN DIP, PIN (7) GNO: PIN (14) +5V (ND—OOM—A) i.C.LOCTON DRAWNBY: CHECKEDBY: I 16 PIN DIP, PIN (8) GNO: PIN (16) +5V CONNECTOR T.H.J. udI4I SHEET OF [1 RESISTOR [1 WIRE WRAP POST I.C. LOCATION 24 PIN DIP, PIN (12) GNO: PIN (24) +5V LC. TYPE ON P.C. RD. DATE 6DRAWN:11—23_7 APPROVEDBY: iS70243401 I I I A B BDAL15L BDALO7L BDAL13L BD8L06L4( BDAL14L BDALB5L BDAL12L BDA BDALO8LD—.——-<<__(15) BDALO3LO.— I I 7430 7404 70 (6) BOAL1 ( ( BDAL1 81) Bl) 4* 3* (8) 2 2 B8 BA9 8A5 8A8 (4A1 (SAl (5A2)(582) (581 (5A2)(582) BA7 (481 (5A2)(5A2) 884 (5A2)(5A2)(5Bl) (481) (4A1) (5A1) (SAl) (4A1)(4Bl)(5Al) (582) (582) BA3 (5A2)(5A2)(5B1) (4A1 BA2 (5A2)(582)(58l) (4A1 BA1 (5A2)(5A2) (4A1)(4B1)(5A1) (5A2)(5A2) (12 )(48’1)(5A1 )(5Al) )(5A1 )(4B1 )(4B1 BSYNC i: )(4B1 74175 3 o D 831 6 (9) )(581) ) )(5A1) (581) (581) (581) DELAY CLR [ lQ lQ* * 4Q* BDIN [ )(581 841 +5V 831 (2) (3) )_ :Jo) — )____Q 4i00Bl) ) t 1A31 RAMBN5 +5V = BANK6* (3A3) Ri 680 RAME [1A3 + ( 2) 3 I BDMGOL BDMGIL BIAKIL BIAKOL 7408 BRPLYL BDOUTL<< BSYNCL<< MDIN* BDINL O—<< ____<< o—<-- D—<< (841 DORPLY BDOUT BSYNC RAMEN [1A3] CH2 CF2 CS2 CR2 CN2 CM2 CE2 CJ2 (1) (4) (12) —< (15) C C (11) ( I I 26512 80 Al 83 82 __j)(9) 44 E 2 25 E 1 Ii Z2 Z3 12 13 3 111) (__) (14) (10) (11) 3 (10) [3A4T436(6) ROMCF p BDIN BSYNC DELAY BDOUT ( ( (182) (1A2)(1A3) ( ( (481) 83) 82) 84) 82 B3 A2) 82) B2 82) RAMWRT* (4>I(II) (14) OARD L 74367 +5v ON +5V ENABLE I (13) +5v 3(6) j4O8 (12) (5) (NIJ-0014-A1 DATE DRAWN C 0 (B3) (B3) DRAWN:11-23-76 OR BY: PLY T.H.J. I’D 4 FIRMWARE DELAY CHECKED C APPROVED ( 83) B2) LOGIC NUCLEAR BY: OPTION BY:LIdf DIAIRAM vd4 BOARD DATA S70-2434-O1 SHEET2 ECN ( Q D_ 0>- =w _J — tJ uJ w ., — = z I- I- U) o>-- = REVISIONS z Ui 0 x w o _2 I- LI W bi w c-, W W U) — 0 )- 0F6 *_ DATE I- U) —L*J 0 LJ — - W U) A :2:1 U 0 0 ND] ONION3d •v1a fl1313flN O1]A3Sd A1SS3HdX] 3JV 3dIIIVN 318V.LN]J.Vd —Nfl iQ 3191N3.Ld JO NOI1NNOdNI OIS]NOd ]H.L 01 SIHOHJ ANU.L3IIdO1d 3HI V1fli 33flN JO NOISSIWH3d N3!IINFI A ld]DX3 ‘N3NNW AN NI 3Sfl 3a WOIIJ]N3HI ]1BVAI HO NI3HJHI G3DflGONd3 38 ION AVW ONV a3NI.LNO3 NOI[WIiQJNI JHI AIIW NON L1j •IIIO N131OflN JO AIN3dOIId 3AISfl1JX] 3HI SI IN3Wfl300 SIN! u-I < I- < — 0 - = lu L,c - : uJ z __J LI LI * I— C., : I I C?) CN CN D I I I 2 3 4 O15[2A1) D14[2A1) D13[2A1) D12[241) D11[241) D1O[2A1) D89[241] DO8[241] (12) 1(12) j(12) (12) (12) 1(12) (12) (12) (14) SPAD2 0 49 [1 3] sPo1 p (15) [13) (16) SPADØ0 11ij (1) B7 0 [2A2) (2) B16 O 5A29 35 40 46 50 56 60 66 NOTE: +5V TO ALL 2102’s (PIN 10) [242) ONDTO ALL 2102’s (PIN 9) BA5 0 4A [2A2] (6 2102 2102 2102 2102 2102 2102 2102 2102 BA4 0 3A [2A21 (5 843 0 . 2A [242] (4 A 842 0 A [242] (8 841 0 [241] (13 RAMCE*0 CE’ C C C C C C C [283] R/W C C C C C C C RAMWRT’ DIN AC2 CC2 [243) *J11) J11) J(11) J(11) (11) GND O—4 >>—o OND 11) J3 cL(11) AJ1 CJ1 o—<( >>—o BDALB9 BDALØ8 BDAL13 BDAL12 BDAL11 BDAL1Ø IIM1 CM1 BDPILI5 BDAL14 [241) [241) [241) [241] [241) [241) [241) [241) o—<< AT1 CT1 o—c::c >>—o BC2 DC2 o—_ >>—o Oji O—<( >>—o BM1 o—<< BT1 DT1 51 GND Q—<< >>—o OND SPAD2 c [143] >- SPAD1 [143] SPADE [143) Q 847 0>- [242] Q_ 442 CR2 B46 [242] +5V O—<< )>—o +5V — (_) w 842 D42 BA5 Q—<< >>—o [242) ‘C C) 844 wI- —w +5V +5V Q.____. >1____ w c w 0 (/* [241) m — w BA3 w n 0 w v) — [242) U — . 842 ÷5V [242) BAl zz w [242] BB2 o,-- RAMCE’ —12V w - B [2B3) Lfl I- [243) - —12V ECN DATE REVISIONS NUCLEAR DATA :3 LOGICDIAGRAM FI4ARE OPTIONBOARD (ND-OOM-A) DRAWNBY: T.H.J. I CHECKEDBY: c’IJ I SHEET4 0F6 DATEDRAWN:I1-24_76 APPROVEDBYIIdW I S702q34o1 2 3 I I I I I 2— I 3 I -4 881 0 thru B89 [282] (16) B09 8 7D Dl 5 [2I21 [281] C; (17) (8) (17) (8) BA8 0— 7A 6D —0 D14 [2i2] [281] (18) 5D (7) (18) (7) Bl7 0— 6A —0 D13 [2L2) (19) [281] (6) (19) 42 37 31 21 13 (6) BOb 0— 5A 4D 012 62 52 [2A21 68 (20) [281] (20) 56834 56834 56834 (5) D (22__o- S6834 56834 56834 56834 BI5 0— 4A 3 011 [2I21 (21) S6834 [281] (21) (4) 3A 02 ci___ BA4 ° 0 Dl0 [2a21 [281] (3) (22) D (3) (22) BA3 0— 2A 1 —0 DØ9 [2a2] (23) [281] (23) (2) B82 0 1 D ----—-o008 [202] A (24) (13) [281] (24) A B1 0— [242) (15) (_;_; (15) OSB* OsH*0__C cs* Q÷5V Q...... ( OSC0—( OSD*0__.( OSEO( OSF0—C (14) [383] (14) [3831 [3831 [384] [384] [384] 13841 11(3)PULL1 R/L4 0c_i)__—129 PULL1O— (1) (11) [E](2) PULL2_(ii) VPROG 1 PULLD— 0 008 THRU D15 [281] 881 0- thru B89 [282] z w (9) B89 8 07 007 [2821 [2B1] (17) I- Li___ (8) w 8118 87 06 0 006 [2821 (18) D _cn___12B11 (18) (7) B87 0— 86 0 005 Q_ [282] (19) (6) >- 04 [2B1] (19) 63 53 43 38 32 22 B46 0 8 004 14 [2821 69 [2B1] (5) (20) 03 _c!___ (20) 56834 56834 56834 56834 56834 56834 S6834 885 0— 84 003 S6834 0 [282] (21) (4) wI-c,)I- 83 2D [2B1] (21) - 884 0 002 )- — [2821 (3) [2811 (3) Ew i- >- (22) 1D (22) - : 0 B83 0 —0 oØi 2 w 0 wJ [2821 (23) [2B1j (23) (2) —. z L) 0 W B82 ° 81 D 000 z [2B1] •wo [2821 (24) (13) (24) C)WWb W >c -) 0 B81 ° [2821 (15 (15) cs* --;-;-;- 0sc* OsD* OSF* 0sJ 0_( Q+59 0__C 0—( Q( OsH [383] [383) [3B31 [384) [384] [3B4] w v C W rE-i(4) PULL3 (14 R/W (14) — —12V PULL3(— I- W W W 1E1 PULL4 (11 (1) PULL40__(-ll) WI-z I- PROG LU 9 zoz w 0 _1 _) I- 1 —— I- x LU I— Z B vu 0 oss = >- — thru I- D07 [281] +5V 33uF/15V (x8) NOTES: OND 1. ON THIS MEMORYBANK,ADORESS—(B8—).ORTA—(D—) POWERCONNECTIONSRRE BUSEDAND IDENTICAL TO THOSE SHOWNFOR 1C68 ANDXC69. 3.3uF/15V (88) -12V ECN DATE REVISIONS NUCLEAR DATA I LOGICDIACRAM FIRMVIAREOPTIONBOARD C (ND-OOM-A) DRAWNBY: T.H.J. I CHECKEDBY: v1 I SHEET5 0F6 DATEDRAWN: APPROVEDBY: Vc/-h’I 2 .3 11-24-7I S7O-2434-OI I I I 0 0 fl I > cr)c:clJ’o cncw m.oomc’ w I- w I- 0) k) k) w c) c) SPAD- 2 z 0 0 -4 :E r’) C- -.4 -.4 0> •UG) 5> Co I I,, THIS DOCUMENT IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF NUCLEDR DATR. 0, Cs -I AND MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, NOR MAY THE INFORMATION CONTAINED C) THEREIN OR DERIVABLE THEREFROM BE USED IN ANY MANNER, EXCEPT BY WRITTEN PERMISSION OF NUCLEAR DATA, THE PROPRIETARY ‘1 RIGHTS TO THE AFORESAID INFORMATION, OF A PATENTABLE OR UN— 0) PATENTABLE NATURE. ARE EXPRESSLY RESERVEDTO NUCLEAR DATA. > PENDING £04______I I I 2 I 3 4 81 (11) cDnøcc BSYNCL SYNC* BV2 DL1 5 C, BDOL15L (21)(3t1) (243) Dl 5 (281)(2B2) Q4(2) (31) REFCY* DALi4 (243) BOAL14L (2A1 )(341 ) (1B1 ) D14 (341) DIN DALi3 BDINL (2B3) BDAL13L (241 )(342) Dl 3 (342) DOUT BDOUTL (2A3)(2B3) DALi2 *+CSD4 BDAL12L (241 )(342) CSC D12 (3B1) A (342) A BWTBTL CSD4+C SB (3B1) BREFL BDAL11L 4R2 BDMGIL 4C2 CC2 BDAL1OL 452 +5V O—<< >>—o +-12V 0 BDMGOLO—(< AJ1 CJ1 >>—o 1+ 1+ 1+22/15 TYP. BDALO9L DM1 CM1 CR2 AT1 .—- BDMGILO—<< CT1 III BDLILOBL BC2 DC2 +5v0 CS2 >>—o BDMGOL BJ1 O—c TYP. BD2 BM1 DM1 DM2 >>—o. I I 22115 BT1 T BIAKILO<< 04L07 D2 (2B1)(3B1) 4N2 + 12V D07 BIAKOLO—<< —o (3B1) 0 DALØ6 4D2 (281 )(3B1 CM2 D6 BIBKILO—c +3’) +12V4 (3B1) +5’) DALØ5 (2B1 )(382) CN2 005 BIDK0L0—c (3B2) 04L04 330 BDDLO4L (2B1 )(3B2) 004 (3B2) B B zo DDLO3 BD4LO3L (2B1 )(3B2) 10 003 (3B2) L _ zi DDLO2 BDDLO2L (2B1) Ii 002 +3’) (3B2) R2 22 DDLO1 )(3B3) BDDLO1L 2B (2B1 12 001 17 (3B3) 26512 23 04L00 3B (3B3) 13 000 2E 1E (3B3) (7) ?(9) ECN DATE [244)MDI REVISIONS NOTES: 5 — THE FOLLOWINGSYMBOLS/NOTATIONSARE USED ON THE DIAGRAMAND/OR PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDASSEMBLY. ADC SIGNAL NAME CONNECTOR [4A2] — SIGNAL SOURCEDRAWINGLOCATION, DR IC - INTEGRATEDCIRCUIT SAT SELECT AT TEST GERMANIUM CONNECTORPIN 1 - ALL DIODES ARE 6964 OR EQUIVALENT, EXCEPT AS NOTED. - - DIODE NUCLEAR DATA F (442) — SIGNAL LOADDRAWINGLOCATION — IC. PIN TRANSISTOR (P1) PRECISION RESISTORS 100PPM —p4——— SILICON DIODE LOCATION 2 — ALL RESISTORS ARE 1/4W, ±5%, EXCEPT AS NOTED. TZONE 1/BW, ±1% METALFILM SHEET NUMBER ( ) — IC PIN DESIGNATION ._.:_. ZENER DIODE -P.C. BOARDNAME 3 — ALL CAPACITORS ARE pf, EXCEPT AS NOTED. LOGICDIAGRAM DC COMMON x 16 RAMMEMORY —.>>—... CONNECTORDESIGNATION TUNNELDIODE 526—01 4 — I .C. VOLTAGES, EXCEPT AS NOTED: C NC - NO CONNECTION .-—— FERRITE BEAD —a-—-SELENIUMDIODE (ND-ORM-A)(ND-ORM-BS70-2457-0I) 14 PIN DIP, PIN (7) GND: PIN (14) +5’) )(. I .C. LOCATION DRAWNBY: CHECKED I OF 16 PIN DIP, PIN (B) GND: PIN (16) +5’) INLINE RESISTOR PACK D WIREWRAPPOST T.H.J. BY: UAU SHEET1 3 j] .C. LOCATION ON P.C. BD. PIN GND: PIN +5V 1KTO+5V 24 DIP, PIN (12) (24) I .C. TYPE ON P.C. RD DATE DRAWN:11-22-76 APPROVEDBY:VA41- I570-2435-01 I I I I I I —.———— C IO-cEh-OLS :i O3AOddd 9L-ZZ-LL:NMHa 3!O C O Z f33HS a3D3H3 rH1:A8 NM (IO-Lct-OLS e-NdO-ON)(V-O-ON) AOW]frHVd91 X )Ih HVdVIO 3Th01 tQ [z1 V.LVO NV1OflN D:. xnw I •(c: dO c: ±3HS NO SN0ISIA] VdDVIO SNIddVdIS GNV±ON OS1V S) 3100 N33 SJN3VJ9aS AèIOL’N3L’N1VDISAHd (1dO I) ANVCd. S)1NV-SSèIGGV 9 dO 3N0 ANVNDISSV01 cI3sn 9 1NAVI 9NIddVl!S LVIdd0dddV SDAD HS3ddH 099 [Zn] DNIèflGA1dd SJJ9IHNI r DNI11V±SN DNAS 0 [LOLl :S3ION LOlOC [101] Z0100 A10a [LOU 50100 Li-M [LOU] jL] DNAS - -I - -Ic, — -C m— Ln rn P1 -4 v — — V V—-4 r) F- m rn ZmVV oX [Loll m m rn V -I (8) 00100 :— — ø1Hr1 I-I 0 U ‘i r,1 — r- CL0S)(L0c) [LOU (M 0 P1 0 V 000 50100 V C I,, rnmr [LOU] c—v-zm. Vr 90100 A1di9 [LOLl I’1 0 C — ( UOS)(LOS) C,, r- 0 L0100 (d P1 L00 r- X -C -4 [LOU] “zOV -CO- 00100 (LOS) -CrV1O zo 0 O - ( UOS)( (LOS) .503 Lf )IU (U JION) (lONOIldO) AS÷ 110 )INOO, (5OZ) [sol] Ald000 .DNAS V XflL’ V LO (ZL) [ LOU] (SOZ) 1 SL100 SOD O 170 [LOU] OO VL100 SO S 90 (L) 9 [LOL] S L100 099 3 —0 L (SU) 00133135 NO0 OZU SdNi SUQ/ suOOZ DNI1 A013 AS+ L_ J I I I ______ I I C IO-SEtiZOLS %fl:A O3AOidd 9L_Z_II:NMO ]1 C Jo £ !33HS :A a]){D3HD rH1 : . (IO-LQt7-OLS e-O-aN) (V-IO-ON) AOV43fr4frV 91 X h v3vIo DIDO1 raøi c- [17L1 CL) DSJ -.-——0asD+DSD viva V31OflN (L)H ] (L) SD p I [ 17 LI SNO S I L!ø! LsD —--0 SD+*11SD 31170 ND] 117 L [S17D OS17N 1— c 0 pas17 C DS17D p 1!) t)J CLa)S17H p (flic) V117 —I I [01I ,Th \.1 (L17) S17D 0— V17 (LLl) as 0 01c17Ll [zj Ir [tJL1I 117 L1JM p —C 411U1 1!s17D0— VI — —0 S17D 17S17H0 LrL 117 3dfl03D0dd SIH± 0± S±H9IH 11V SIAèJ]S]èJ 3N1VJX1GUV31DflN G11V±SNI 1SflVJ S±èIVd GILVIDOSSV GNV SS3H±N1èJVd NINMOHSS±NNOdVJOD [LaL] [Lat] [LaL] [LaL] [LaLI [LBL) [LB-L] [LaLI iDflGOdd SIH± dO 1A1 NQLLdOH1 3ONVHD0± 00117a L0117a øiaa øia 1701170 s0117a 90170 10117G 0 W —I -I u •AeI0vj:1v’jdO S>INV9dflOd 0± dfl 1VG0LN0DDV -4 m NVDGèJVO9D/d-VièJ0H± JO ±flOAV1DISV8 H± :J0N I,,x- x— — I.,, C C)) m 96OPNW 1S () H]d L dAl L0 ozm.><— rn c r — p AS- U, I- 0 0 C., I” ‘i r- : -< - w : -u C,,. 96O17)W O N3d L dAl L0 Zv C) pAL+ -I _m-l N17a ADd L dAI 0 AS+ aa—za 6 SL 6L S 6 S Ui 517 LS 55 19 19 LI 11 58 a GIOA 17 OL tiL O 9 0c 9 17 917 S 95 9 99 U 91 179 3 alGA S LL 51 L L L L t7 LV S IS 9 69 ci 61 58 a (DA17)aL1IJM 17 aI a-IGA GIOA 9 L 9L c:a 8 175 9 01 171 O 98 (3 ‘8 II) OS] [85} 17 S HL 51 V LS17—OL LS17—O1 0 9 I 8 6 -ii—LI L L (3 8’ 17)SAD V A—WAG A—WHO 17—WHO [LA] (AAOA 17)a SAN GNQDDS) OO9N 009N Q99N AS+ 099ON A 1+ 1S960170W 1117 01 NOWWOD AS— C I I I A B 4 2 3 1 NOTES: — — — — lb 14 ALL 24 ALL DLL IC. PIN PIN PIN DIODES CAPACITORS RESISTORS VOLTAGES, DIP. DIP, DIP, ARE PIN PIN PIN (9) ARE EXCEPT 0964 ARE (8) (12) (7) 1/4W, SPARES pf, GND: GND: OR GND: AS EQUIVALENT, EXCEPT ±5%, NOTED: PIN PIN PIN EXCEPT •1 (16) (14) (8) AS (24) NOTED. +5V +5V EXCEPT +5V AS NOTED. AS NOTED. SRUNL BPQKH BEVENT OND +5V NC NC NC NC 5 RC—8 RC—6 RC—1 RC—8 R RC—2 RC—9 RC—7 RC—3 LE— — — E—O+5V -.>-. C—4 — C NC THE IC ) — — — — FOLLOWING TRANSISTOR NO CONNECTOR INTEGRATED IC CONNECTION PIN DESIGNATION I SYMBOLS/NOTATIONS DESIGNATION CIRCUIT ÷5V .—l—.— DRE (P1 SAT USED ) — — DC 1/8W, FERRITE SELECT PRECISION ON COMMON THE ±1% AT DIIIGRAM BEAD METAL RESISTORS TEST 2 FILM DND/OR 100PPM PRINTED .——— —I— —*1— ..... CIRCUIT — — — SELENIUM GERMANIUM TUNNEL SILICON ZENER BOARD DIODE DIODE GSSEMBLY. DIODE DIODE DIODE I I [4821 (482) It ADC* I—SHEET ZONE — — LOCATION SIGNGL SIGNAL SIGNGL NUMBER CONNECTOR SOURCE NAME LOAD DRAWING DRDWING 3 LOCATION LOCRTION, ON OR P.C. 80. DC LED ON -CONNECTOR I.C. CONNECTOR TYPE I .C. I HDLT PIN PIN P.C. ON I .C. BOARD P.C. S26—O1 LOCATION NAME 80. (ND-PMM—A) DATE DRAWN DRAWN: BY:T.H.J. 11-18-76 4 +5 +5V V 813 2.2K RC—5 R14 2.2K APPROVED CHECKED POWER LOGIC NUCLEAR BHDLTL MONITOR DIAGRAM BY: BY: V14— VdtIfI DATA •I S7O-2439-OO SHEET ECN REV I I S I OF DATE ONS I A B j SPECI Fl CAT ION S ) /MPQ7 : ,,, OQ 22o VAc ±10 Y , 47_ 3 2. OUTPUTS I. ,LV, 25i4 2 # /2v 2. 5A ADYSTA8LE 3. -/2V, 2.5A _) ±5’/ 4. */5V 2OOMA (. eM,.JA 5. -/5v, 2MA (- 4T7ERMINAL h’66ULAT/OAJ : ,, 2, 3 — • I UTpurS 4 t 5 - I % : RIPPLE •y OAJ ALL OUTPU7S P2recr,ô,J : CURAJ7 5A”er ‘vir AAID PEV6R5 L’oL r 6d PRarc’r/oJ o_, ALL OL/7PUT3 Cp-QAr,AI TEi-ip. : REc:oMMEJO6D IFIPLIT PLS’J : SA p //oV4C. 254 Fo 22oV4 C F” DATA A72- 1408-00 (39-7009) B AOO6D 2Mv4 8QA. WARt I A AtJa ‘EOAi1/ 14 vJA5 ‘C’ SiZE XENTEK INC. SAN MAPCOSCALIF. i:i C Pow SUPPLY OUTL/AJ tt:Mu t DA r Aloo 27951 Rv 8 NOTES: 2. I. FOR ALL 23OVAC RESISTORS II5VAC UNLESS JUMPER INPUT OTHERWISE ARE 2 JUMPER TO 1/2W, 3. SPECIFIED APPLY I ± TO 5 1/. LINE 2 AND CARBON POWER 3 TO FILM. TO 4 ON I AND TI;FOR 4. TI 9 j_ SEE C3018-501 C3018—SOI SEE ------+.i. --——--- REGULATOR REGULATOR SCHEMATIC SCHEMATIC —lay, +12V,2.4A A4 2.4A (XP2O—12) (xPzo-12) ASSY. ASS’I’. NO. NO. - __J r — I 1 —I2VDC — G BLUE RAY -I NUCLEAR POWER AIAooa •*LI IO-I2-76 4rr” Zov.4c 472-1408-00 SUPPLY SAN (39-7009) XENTEK DATA *PPROVID•V MARCOS, CO.%JA’ECT’øiJ SCHEMATIC INC. CALIF. ±I2VDC + +I2VDC —I2VDC + -I- + + + + N/C ZOVAC 1- + + f5.COM 4- ±I5VDC + — 5COM 5VDC 5VDC 5.COM 5VDC 5VDC 5. I5VDC 5COM tVDC 5VDC 5.COM 5FOM COM DATA om*41Ae , ge-v. CO1L4 SHT.20F3 COM 3..-77 4 XP2O-3 XP2O—9 . XP2O—5 XP2O-28 XP2O—I2 XP2O-24 MODEL MODEL 3.5,9 NOTES: 24,28 CAUTION L L 2. 2. 2 3. 4. I. I . ALL Q2 DERATE CR3ANDCR4 RECOMMENDED POWER SELECT OF TO CLOCKWISE ALLOWABLE CONDITIONS APPROXIMAT€LY TURN VOLTAGE (SEE ______• 2526V, 27$28V, I I92OV. ovP 7 INPUTTAPA 2-3V.,4.OA 2N3O55 SET THE 470-ft 12V,2.4A IIV,2.5A 1.2K I RESISTORS 13V,2.2A 1.5K R2 5V,4OA 7V,3.OA 8V,2.9A SV : UNLESS TABULATION OVP . READ Q2 PROPER SUPPLY OUTPUT OPTIONAL I 1.6 I.OA TABULATION . .9A TO 8 . USED TEMP. A A ADJUSTMENT TRANSISTOR AT ARE 4.7K 2.2K RE-APPLY 1.2K R4 INSTRUCTIONS OTHERWISE DESIRED ARE 40°C INPUT EXTERNAL 293OV, 3I432V,.6A 2324V, I 21 IS 4V,4.OA ON PRIMARY 6V,3.3A by, 14V,2.2A I5V I5/e 16V, 60505 9V, VOLT) BLOCK). 22V., OVP IS DESIGNED —24 I/2W,±5’/. IN 1.5K 2.9A 2.7A TAPB 2.IA 1K R5 1K 150°C. FOR .9A POWER I I.2A .8 . FREE OVERVOLTAGE . -28 5 ON A SHOULD TURN A SPECIFIED POT FUSING:.7SAFOR TURN 50 TRANSFORMER BEFORE -3,-5,- 390.ft LM300 LM3OS L AIR 47ii.. LM3O5A LM3O5 LM3OSA MODELS FOR ICI R7 M Hz AND SLOWLY 305 POWER OVP BE ENVIRONMENT. CONTINUOUS OPERATION. SET OPERATING MONITORED IOQUF IOOUF IOOUF IOOUF MODELS 16V ADJUSTMENT 47UF 3W 16V 4 ONLY. 25V LIMIT CI CLOCKWISE 7 OFF SUPPLY UF II5V TAPS . ONLY. (2o°/oABOvE IOKUF TURN 3.6KUF TABULATION_____ 2.5KUF IOKUF 2.5KUF 5KUF 15V 15V OPERATION. C2 25V 35V OPERATION soy SOy POWER UNDER VOLTAGE FOR IF UNTIL 115 (SEE 47-63 AIR POT VOLTAGE VAC±IO% 47OUF DESIRED 470UF 22OUF 220UF 220UF 220UF IOV 35V 3W IOV 25V C6 16V NOTE FLOW SUPPLY. PARTICULAR 5CR Hz FULL TO UNDER OUTPUT 2) NORMAL FIRES IN400I ADJUSTMENT IN400I IN400I 1N4002 IS IN4002 1N4002 CRI,2 OUTPUT COUNTER-CLOCKWISE. COM RESTRICTED. AQ FULL 0- VOLTAGE WORST (VOLTAGE ______ ______ OUTPUT. 2.7K 8.2K 12K 15K RI 1K 1K VOLTAGE LOAD POT 330fl 180i1 3.9K 6.8K CASE 7.5K R2 RECOMMENDED) 1K AND THE DROPS WE TI FULL . RANGE 22Q.tl 470.fl- 270 270.ft 220J1 MAXIMUM R7 HIGH CASE 80-ft SET COUNTER— TO ft 820±1 OUTPUT LINE TEMP. 1.5K 33K 2.21< cw R8 5.6K 31< OPTIONAL CIRCUIT •18f2. .22n. •47t .68f. ..12J2 RIO 221L 22011. 5.6K 18K 12K 15K 271< Ru L R2 RI2 2K 2K 2K 2K 1K 1K IOOfL RI3 1.8K 1.8K 1.8K .3K I K C3 S POWER £ //--75 PROPRIETARY NO BE OR PERMISSION R5 INFORMATION NUCLEAR DISSEMINATED COMPANY MODEL SUPPLY _-___- SAN 72-1408-00 XENTEK APPROVKD (39-7009) OF MARCOS WITHOUT XP2O •Y: SCHEMATIC XENTEK GIVEN TO R9 INFORMATION ____J DATA INC. ANY CALIF. THE HEREIN INC. PERSON EXPRESS SHT. C3O18—SOI DRAWN DRAWIH RKVISKD + REV.A — MAY 3OF3 CR5 OUTPUT IN RED 4001 W OUTPUT BLACK WIRE NUM•1 I RE C! 0 C _+ ___ 8 I 7 I 6 I VlJ 5 4 I 4 3 j_L L ‘- 1$I 2 NOTES: —. TI• NOTES: 4 I . ADJUST114 SO THATTHEcPU FREOUENCTNEASUREDAt E57 PIN S 5. CONPOWENTSAREHOTINSTALLED(RESERVEDOPTION)UNLESSSPECIFICALLY Is 2.3 Il ± .0mHZ. ThE NODULEMATSE OPERATEDATOTHEP INSTRUCTED. D FREJENCIES FORTESTPUPPOSEONU. SEE SHEET(Al). D S. DELETEDFOPU7284-YAVERSION 2. ADJUST515 SO THATTHEREFRESHFAEOUENCYNEASUREDAT Eli * OVG .39V55 LSI SET. -S V RMI 7. lIP r ‘9TFX U s PIN I IS 525 HZ t5 Ni. SEE SHEET(Al). BG .39V FON151GIIP SET,NDONBIW I74•YA 3. TIRE lIEU? FNCNFALLINGEQGE E3I PIN 9 TO FAILINGEDGE M74A8 i.SI ONIPsr. -s v INTEL4ARAM 51101110 NS. P7 MAYBE RENOVED I .g R I Eli PIN 4 SE 110 10140 3 • FON151 GIIP SET. 5V95 4ARAM THAN •5.Ov dTEK TO INCREASETHEDELAYSLIGHTLYIF LESS 110 NS IS I4• WEASURED.SEE SHEET(Al). S. SIIL ISIGêTIG4 4. JUNPERFUNCTIONS*110CONFIGURATI4AREAS FOLLOWS: g i!! 1 E—_-.H (HIGI). L (La) ASSERTED JI*PER SELECTFEATURES -I--—I F.c.54Il:.1).f SKIPPINS STATUS I ‘Ic’.+! — •——;---— — — 4 — — .7; SELECTIONWHENINSTALLED IPTION h17254(REV Y1 .i!.!! £) Lsig&ONIGIN(PAGE)It(TIFIER J_[;IJ RESIDENTMEMORYSANAI C.O. R R RESIDENTMEMORYSANKI .L2._ 13 DISASLEEVENTLINE CO. P Il + I EE :::::DISABLEMEMORYREFRESH C.O. R [1 + E +B 1 E R POWERUP MODESELECT CO. R P / POSERUP MODESELECT CO. R P BIASINGVOLTAGEVDATAVROI F.O. I I NOTEI C ._!!__ s C BIASINGVOLTAGEVCTL:VROM F.O. I I , 4 LtJ • . + E 1 + T is DISABLEREPLYQOU RESIDENTNEMORF.O. P + +÷ EJ +- ——— + i + . :i: DISABLEREPLYDURINGREFRESH • C.O. R P 8.44 ENABLEONBOARUMEORTSELECT CO. ] U RF a INSTALLEDIF RESIDENTRAMISNOITHESLOWESTREPLYIN THESYSTEM. mF] El R + - - ++ E1 L .i €. E - +_ + •+ g POWER-UPMODES 1 i;i MODESELECT j ..L ._rPE_;__ -Jz{±j+u 4 0 N R PCAT24ANOPSAT2S.ORHAI.TMOOE / UtEJL E + . + Li L EEL . I Ei + ZL E14 I R I OOTMICROOOE OE & t 2 I R PC AT 173000 FORUSERBOOTSTRAP 3 1 I SPECIAL PROIESSORNICROCOOE •EIEI (not .pIe.ent.d) EI IEI 4El 131 EIØfEIfrEI IFJ$’PJ E ‘ B + ‘ . E+ ‘ I; INSTALLEO C.O. CUSTOMEROPTION I - R; REMOVED F.O. FACTORYOPTION I B 4k RAM / q 8 Rz !EI’ IIE• +L f;j lJ IE R . . + I 4 + E E DCCMHØc2 .3 . + 4 +4 +.{——;•;--;-Y. ÷. j_,_I ? , __ id-. ++ . + , , DEC.. 7S32.2 ‘7 14 DEC 747 S DEC... e4qf I’ 1VU1SPNWLCJHF[DCI 1VUSPMMLJHFEQCI VUT” . VU!MLLJHF DEC. 74S257 8 IC. EJEC.. 74.S174 IG, DEC. 74.l4O 7 14 10.44 RE.F DEC 74SI39 S DEC. 7475 /2. 5 DEC 74574 7 14 EEC. 7474 7 14 ITEM DEC. 7442. 8 H. QTY REF.DESIGNATION DESCRIPTION PART NO. I FiRSTUSEDONOPTiONUOOEL DEC 745” 7 14 L PARTS LIST DEC. ETCHBOARD REV. 74SiØ 7 4 E I I I I I I I I I I I DR DEC. 8;37 S IC. I., DEC. 7.sØ5 14 ciwo. DATE i i A 7 Idi191ItIai_1 I DEC. 74S$4 7 14 z DATE 0 TITLE DEC. 74SØ 7 ‘4 0 PROJSMO., DATE 0 i2’-7 LS1 II Dtc. t1Ø 7 14 0 C 74 0 DATE MODULE TTPt +w •I2V D 5’ i.2o-J Cpu l. . 0 NEXT HIGHERASSY ‘9 C •m eo w USUALLYPWI 7 ømo 14 SIZECODE NUMBER V. PWTWtLY L1Ic1FT1O$ STATtO U, AI0t DEC NO. EIA NO. DECNO. EIANO. SCALE —T DICSJM724-O— I pIll LOCATiONS SEMICONDUCTORCONVERSIONCHART SHEET cw •T••••••• 01ST. _c _ I I I I I I I I I I I 7 6 I I 3 2 S70—2344—OO 1 I 10) 1 *__ 4 (Sheet of ______ 8 7 6 5 4 I 1 3 - 1 -Tw AW# AM D5 DIODE, IN1lA,5.1V, 5% 1110994 43 IJ EF RE REF EF c 7P4. IIV ATION x-Y COORDINATEHOLELOCATION rr dOT •-:—• k-CO-M1264.g-4 -:— c — —j— 06 DIODE, 1N751A5.IV, 5% pAl? AS T) S4 T)* JaCIMI t SF4.1 I11094 44 ñ7 w T• ASSY/DRILLING cw rT UT SflB PMI i H0I1 LAYOUT D-AH-1264-g.5 TAa. IQUNI COIAfl4 3 3 . 3 02.06,09 DiODE, !N75IA, 5IV, 5% 1110994 45 tw 2 UODIiIEECOHISTORY B-H-M7264--5 4 4 4 4 Dl ThRIJ04 TRANSISTORPNPH1GH £PED I5i11 46 E •_ i__ ETCHEDCIRCUITBOARD 5011545 3 3 3 3 E38,E45,I72 IC. DEC14fl t905515 41 I I I ClOD CAPACITOR,I2pt bOy, 5% C 1002081 -1— -;—- E24 LI:. DEC 74S 1910532 46 S :i: •r— r •-r -i—-• CIO4 CAPACITOR, 68pt CDV%’ 1000014 E37E59.E69 I.C DEC 744 1909686 —:—• 2_. .1.. 1— -i-—— C103 CAPACITOR,220pf, ICOV’, 1% 1012121 7 E6l I .C. DEC 14SB4____ Iq10534 ._L.. •9_ ‘1— •—r -i•— C102 CAPACITOR, GBOpt, IOOV. 5% 1000026 D E51 I .C. DEC14S65 1910535 51 -:— 8 I.. .__!_ E• 7’ Cl THRIJC4,C9 THRU CI2Cl1 • CAPACITOR, .OIuI, 53V, 10% 1001510 THRU I I 1 I E31 IC. DEC 8037 1911116 52 C2O,C23 THRUC26,C31 9 THRU C34,C31 THRU -:-— —:-— •-:--• C52,C54 —— E55,E62 I.C. DEC 14SIV 1910536 53 THRUC57,C59 THR1JC62,C64, C65,C9IC68,C69,C1l E48,E55,E62 DEC .C12,CR :::i: :::::i: IC. 14SIB 1910536 54 C16.C11,C80,C96,C91, 2 2 2 E32,E52 IC. DC 74SI’ 1910531 55 -:—- —:-- •—:— Cl THRU I 1 I ES I .C. DEC7442 C4,C9 THRUC12,Cl1 CAPACITOR, 1910046 56 ‘j .Olut, V, 10% 1001610 THRUC2O,C23 THRUC26,C31 1 i•— —i •i E43.E44,E49,E64,E11 IC. DEC 7414 19fl541 51 THRUC34,C37,C38,C39,C43 THRIJC52.C54 THRU C57,C59 •r• -•i- •i-• E50.E54.E57 DEC 1910544 i IC. 4s;d 58 THRUC62,C64,C65,C97,C68, 4 4 •—:— E25,E40,E42.E41 1.C. DEC 1415 1909050 59 C69,CII ,C12,C1OC71,C80,C96 _i— •‘i’— —I-—E56 IC. DEC 745139 19I616 60 T’ -i—- —I— CIOl CAPACITOR,.33ut, 50V, 10%POLYCARB :i: E39,E17 I.C. DEC 745148 1910546 61 1010031.4 I .. •iI C5 THRUC8,CI3 THRLIC16,C21 CAPACITOR, .4luf, 25V, 20% 1010279 ,_:_ Eli IC. DEC74SI48 1910546 62 C22,C27 THRUC3O,C35,C36, 12 C53,C58,C63,C66,C1O,C13,C14 I 1 I I E60 IC. DEC 14I14 ‘910550 63 C18,C19,C81 THRUC85,C90 —I-— —:— THRU 5• •7 E2,E4I2,E2o,E34.4:. C. DEC 14S251 • 1911641 64 C95,C98,C7’ c7S —:-- —:— —:---- —:— —. —:-• C53,C58,C63,C86,C7O,C73,c74 —- E2.E4.EI2,E20.E34 IC. DEC 745251 1911641 65 j• CAPACITOR, .41u(, 25V, 20% 1010219 C78,C79,CBI THRUC85,C90 13 •T_• I-.— ‘•i•- E16 I.e. DEC 15I1 1910268 66 THRU C95,C98,C’T, C75 —V.. ‘T• E3,EII,E17.EI6,EI9.E23,E33 !EC 8641 -.-— :— lit. 1911519 61 -i_ CBS THRIJC89.C1O5 CAPACITOR,I5ut, 2OV, I0 1004812 14 I 1 I I E65 IC. DEC 1491 1911195 68 4 C8GTIIRUCBS CAPACITOR, C lSut, 20V, 10% 1004812 ‘S 1 I ElS DEC IC. hIC424 1911038 •r- -:-• • .I !. r E1,EL5 RrSjSTQR NTWK,i4-33O,)4-6o 13fI003-OL i E67.E14 DEC 3 3 ,_I, IC. 15322 1912955 70 3 RIl,R12,R45 RESISTOR, ID OHM, i_ i_ 1/48, 5% 1301317 17 2 2 2 2 E66,E13 I .C. DEC tWR26 1912098 ) . R45 ii RESISTOR, ID OHM, I ‘41, 5’, 1301317 59 . 56 - - E5 THRUE8,l3 THRUE6, IC. DEC4K, RAN, 3 ‘1” T” 2112958-01 72 “Y R42,R43,R44 RESISTOR, 22 OHM, 5% rHRU l’49, 1301969 Ig E71,E22,E27 E30,R35, —‘i—‘-— — —i- C38 R35,R62,R64,’2 RESISTOR. 33 OHM, — — — — ———— l’41, 5% 1300197 20 IS • ‘ IS TIRU E6,E13 THRU I I • I R9 [5 E)6, I.C DEC 4I, RAM, 2112126’OO 13 RESISTOR,38.3 OHM.RN55, 1’, 1305121 I,E22,E27 THRUE30,E35, 21 i I — i R54 PE3ITOZ’73;.—,’4,/4 /1 — — E36 . ——— 57,, I3I’72. — . . —‘:— 3 3 3 3 R13,R16,R60 RETOR .)Hty1.I/.W, — — — ——j—’E53 IC. DECCPI6I1BSI 2111549- 74 . /c 3O9 23 C 2 2 2 2 R36,R6I . - RESISTOR, 100 OHU. I 49, 5% — — E58 IC. DECCP162I8451 23001C2-OI 15 1300229 24 . . 2 2 - 2 Re,R1O RESISTOR, 533 — — E63 IC. D1C CPI631B-301U 23O88A5-OI 76 OHU,RN5S, IS 1303039 - . I I 1 I R2I . I E1O RESISTOR. ISO OHU, 141, 5% — — — — IC. DECCPIB31B-3BB1 23087A5-OI 77 — — — — 1300250 —26 1z l. 1 1Z R2 R4,R28 R3OR32 R49,R58, I 1 1 • RESISTOR,330 OHM,1 49, 55 E51 I C. DECCPI6IIB-39 2111549-01 78 R66,R68,RiO,R72.R,7 1300295 27 E5J IC. DECCP1621B439 .1...._L, 23001C3- 79 .“j” .‘“ “7 R3.R5,R6,R20,R23,R29,R3I, RESISTOR.680 OHM.I 41, 5’, 305424 29 ‘ I ‘ E63 IC. DECCP1631B103 2300IB5- R33,R50,R53,R52,R51,R61,R69 — — — — !_ P71,R73 0 ._!__ ,J__ ,_:._ ElO IC. DECCPI63IBC7’3 2300285 . !J. . - . . . 14 - R3,R5,R20,R29,R3I,R33,R50,- — — 20 20 • 20 P1 THRUW6,W9,IIO,WuI,TPI. PIN STAKING 9009149 82 29 R5I,R52,R57,R67,R69,R7I,R73 RESISTOR,680 OHM,l’41, 5% ‘fp - 1301424 I c’J — — . ———-— . - I I . I R41 — N — J3 THRU16,E9,TPI,TP2 PIN STAKINI 9009149 RESISTOR,909 OHM,RNS5, 1% — — — — 83 . 1302585 30 I S ‘ I R34. RESISTOR, 8 8 8 — 8 ______EYELET654 • I 9006732 84 1K, I.’41. 5% 5300365 •31 — — — — . - . I • 2 W7,W8 JUMPER.INSULATED R3 RESISTOYI,5K. I’49, 5% ) ..L_ .___ — 9009185 . 5 1300365 32 I I • I R17 RESISTI.R, HANDLE LEFT -t.4v8r.—OO 5.2k, 1/4W, 5% 30I320 ..,L .J_. . . 10 50 RI,RI9,RIR,R22,R38 THRU RESISTOR,2k, [‘49, 5% I 5 [___ 5302388 34 .L. ‘- I-kANbE RIGHT t4138a6 - R41.R48,R56 -s-- s. t3,E5)63,t7OI tT5 SQC’T 40 ?N [T T “7 7 R15 POT 3 TTa3—o 2K. 1/2W. 10% 309I50-07 35 I B I I I R14 POT, 5k, 5/21, 50% 1309143-09 I I - I R46 RESISTOR,5.11K, RN55, 1% 1304954 37 -‘I—- — RI i• RESISTOR,6.8K, 5/41, 5% 1301423 -:- 38 T T r v12VII WIRE,SOLIQ 1t4S.*.3OAWC- -:-- — 1-L r W4,W9 /v flE SQLIO IWS.$30 AWC- q1C5’F40 —I— -:—• 05 ‘i DIODE. IN748A,3,9V, 5% 1100122 41 - iE Dl,D3,O4,D7,DIO THRU021, DIODE. 0664 1100114 D23.D24,O25)D2 42 a QJ U 0 U lb I I I LJ a - ,iiII c..j ‘-4 S !? -j Lu C.. 4-4 c ‘luJr-4Q: c>n.L. . 1 -rh44.4I4 c OQ0000 0 000000000 0 lu 0ct:r.c q .j >. k 4.4 I- zz z I F.’ f I I III / I I I II I —H(-1” 0 (4) sJ•. .--- - if 4.44.44.44.4 (%l; )‘-Q -“ Li n.j n.j U 0’. 0% ,)WU I- n.j cv - — ‘I ctL (‘J N . 0 •Oh -J 2 (4, N N 0’. c’.i 0% N *?N(I)N(IX ‘0 .j I-, 4.4 ‘4 1.4 I- 1.4 4.4 14 1.4 4 4.4 1-4 4.44.4 vi ‘.0 ID ee6B:? 8 “g.. s-”’ -J 0-0 Jj .4. t:( > NC%J : (p 4H • 1 :z 0Io 4 L::__j_j r.JN — -. -. 2!r%c00% N -,I -j-J.J.jj,J,JJ.J%j th1tfl?TTtM I 4. %%- >WrJ C- t%b Q%—r•4 n)i*IJj ‘-I N — : n.j 0% - 0’. : n.j N p.. 43 (V.) & ‘4, n.J ‘0• n.j . I’) (4) N 0’. n.j 0% N A NNN I4I-I 0% H4r 1 c-o r &ees& s - 8.-. Q< q _J_J .J_J 0 * m 0 4. Lj r’4 C,, 0 ‘-4 ‘HI-44 i-k’-4 r0U3U 0 ‘-4 :!z U, ij_Jj .jJJ_3 -j L&j —I U I- LP: 9” —:D U N 0 Q_ 0 (I) -4 UN iT) ‘0 > a D n.j n.j -J I w C.’ I- Ea%I+ I.’) I r41 0- U’ 0 Hk4I.4 (D 0- ocx (‘J N tkr 0 8 tL n. N*’ -.cJj lJjJ JJ -.j_j .i C1 rn 0 0 I- Cr 0 0 -J C,, -C ci ci) .4- en) 0 ‘4- C I I :c: U 8 7 6 5 4 3 _1Y-n TP4M• WIlCATO A11I*L A AT) NT N 0 1 I M? AS T) p TN CS w wt. Wfl TTI 1fl r•t j 5 IrrM. I? AT4 0 D D F 8DAL 00 L M7 ve ‘ØA C a WDAL Ø H C Ice &f4M £ØO H x3 DIlL 00 H A(’ RAM 001 II /(3 D1JL f H F( ?AM 002 H k3 DAL 2H SCAL. 3 1 N9 zP iij (a RAM 003 H 1<3 DAL 3 H ,(3 DAL 03 H 0 /c’7 IDIN L (7’ D;W L 8PAL L Ic7 DP2A B K RFN D44 H (3 DL 04 H RAM Dt5 N 9DIRL. 04, L K3 DeLØ5H ,c ,Dpi I5 F ,( RSM £?7 1 1<3 DAL ‘7 H 1(3 DAL.O7H A A 0 DICSIM7264-Ø-1 1w DIST.f I I I I I I T I_ 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 S70-2344-OO (Sheet 4 of 10’ 8 7 6 5 4 3 A• WCA ø T) TV. TI& 4T I JC L N I U I $041 n. wa wWv*i iN mt? MICTI p4T I 975To.& IAT4 D D B0iL 08 1.. KDPR ‘58 14. L2AL 08 K2 v/DAL 08 g€ PiM 008 &DAL 09 L icc? DPR ‘38 AC’, DAL 08 RAM 009 ,c 8DL 10 L K4 DAL 09 (9 DPR ‘28 1<4 DAL 1 N C /G RIZIM DIØ H K4 DAL 10 BDAL Ii L C o(9 DI’!? KRAA4DII H 1(4 CAL fi H K4.DAL II H 1(7 EAL L l(S• IDZAI L 1(7 OINR L 8DRL 1 I,. 0ccDPF I 8 i<4•D’L f2 H F< R1M OIaH 8DAL 3 t 1(4 DI?L 72 H K RAM DI3H K DL 1.3 H B /(4 &xTM KQ RcM P15 H K4DAL 15H — —— — 585 7 L L__ F9 DPR/4 I(8rrvIr (I)H KY DPI GCYH A A DpSM7264-Ø-1 jJ 01ST. I I I RN 8 7 6 5 4 2 S70—2344-OO(Sheet 5 of 10 ______ 8 7 1 I 6 I 5 4 3 — I I 2 -n O.lI M WICAfl _• t-ø-2L Ii I ,ITy TAI. AT1 M _:.. cT N 01 I CU I . I14 •n. Ml7 WI rT r WW1T TTSl IW rv 1t 7 k DTA H4T CIATIatr )(3 DAL 00 H C +sv D ‘<4 EX1M L D k4. DPLL I. H , REFP H .s FMX H c1 5•94CR L K4 DAL )2 H K3 D1 H 1(3 E CS H C K DAL II H C K3 DPL Ø H - C K4 OFL 10 H K3 DI\L Ø H K4 H DLØ c’J B OPiL H 3 U) B K4 DL 08 H K3 DAL 02 H <3 DAL 07 H k!DLØI H A A ROt6 clix CHANGE NO. REV. C?ACUITCHEMAT!C ON THIS .HEET 3 CELETD “YA’ /ERSDN NUMIER REV. I I TITLE LS — I 1SIZEDool I I 1 CPU MODULE M7264-Ø1 J KD51 f [SCALE . L—/— SHEET OF DIET. .1 I . I L _ J J f J J I I L 8 7 6 5 4 3 I 2 S70—2344—OO(Sheet 6 of 10) I I I 1’ _____ JO V L 4ae1S) I .a, (oi. L OO—Vi4—OLS I --- -- I - I L - -Fr ‘-0 t9LV’JISDIa (9>-I)]7flOOVi fldD II — Jill! A3W U3WflN I3OO13ZIS I Si I I I •ATh •ON3NVHD AVG 3/16’W2// S •L/i2;cv/:’ . . . . - . - . ?;K1/tp/t?i’ Q3J373Q 5/ ±3H ci#i SNOlSlA3l ‘ CD V jq ‘i.v V ?‘3Q ‘p33 ‘“) ‘P;,fr — W&’Y,4- i:- rnj• I 9 iczi ‘bz2’z2’q7 lid? 7 •j’zc7 4:7 -ci ciy”z: s. I7 1 A — ,— /-/c’c1’A — ;— i’YA — 1 L J1 2/,’ 0 1d7 -W V?I’/A , .c177 7 gtI7cY 517,-i )7 7 s-,Y:w çfi’7 zati I)lg ;_ ?? >— -7 s-va’a’ SVb’>— 7 SYe’/ )-7- 7 cve,ø’ )— 7 5119’ >..— 7_U;,? 3.i&’ 21/144 ):— 7/Af/ )— __1Af T 7.1a5 7 I 2M ):—7bU/ 21,12 1 ‘• Sf 7f7t7 1— 717-cl •*)1 fyzo ;— /7’ _c/ 7117 -pX [“IC — /7’ z/ 7117 -SI /7’ t4/t’2’ i;— _7__ f’ bVd’ 7__ sly 517- /1 SlO’ £4’172— jocv /1 pf t4’t’ LUt:K7 j7’ h’ /71/Z/1”J Z(7L7C ZIG, &V— LI-;:7 w,/- 1-;—--- t6’t’2’ 7’;’ tV/Y ,7;;— H P17 14’,2’ ‘V 1/ ‘7’ Pfr MIIY,Y L jJL P JOL Pj 9W ;— iT °7E çi I-I b’ L’W’ -)—_- /7’ ca’ ivo’a’ ci, t4/1/?J i H f II IAJI”,Y 1 z:j 7___ a;—“ -1 äT - — /7, V L4’’ z1 —H 21/ t4’t/,Y 21/ —f1 Z1/ wtg’ Zb’ s— H It! /4//It’ Q,,7_ L-Vb’Y-1- r—‘ I V /17’:—tl It’ C4’t’ /17 ‘7’ I/I 2:— 7 /1//4/1/ 9)1 2 ,1/1/3/ 2 :— H VL4f’ 91/ ::— ti 91/ t4/172’ H(/ 14//I,Y fl sc-7 623 c2cy /A’ti wyo ;y L4’1/a’l —‘I If7i7 N) U)N ci 4-i WöA— —W6’à’A — VrJA— — r_L/ti/A ?____ 7_____ 7__ h’6’WA svy ?7 517?);— 7 5b’’ )— 7 51/W 2)j,;— 7 S1/7,?/ St.-;, w— 5bVa’ _;__ _7 .c/IJ& 1c- >— -7 17/Y >1 7 b’’Y )— 7 ,ct,’e,a’ >7 7 SiYô’’ )--— _7 Sb-a-a’ ):— 7/41/&A )— 7 _I_41/ 21, D D 5;, -—-—h’’A — A’b’ ;— /b’e, A- ,— ‘6’.l/ A — 9>1 St.,;, 7 51/2 7 Sb’7o’ •7 ;— b:—7yy SM.; 7_ —7 St2/ w— gt.7 ;;— t5VcY.’ -we, :7—7 St9w& >— 7 .cb2,w st/a’ 5b’Ye’ ‘51/a, 51/p >7- 7 ,-c172/’ 7 Sb’.’ -c)l 5 )-.— 1 1dM ):— 714l e 21A >j7JAl 0 7:ZMS YJ,2’Al 7 _/A4 IJI.’M ::—7--1Al 3.149 21/2/Al —7_1_44’ 7.1fa’Af 41>-r-- . 7?L,W 5>1 fy10 7tt7 £)1 Nra t’’71/C 6)1 11/10 H EO 71/C ‘via 29’ 71/17 fYK7 ‘-“ /çl 7//C 1,-Ic? -’ /-iø7yf7 ? —H W W 7-p--- — ‘I / T— a— Sb’ 51? u1/1i’ ‘-7, /4/1/e, — 511 w—/I 51/ St7 .91 ;— 5,- Wt’b’ .91 7___’LI 51” rncii El W&’4/ SI /L7_ g’c7 Joc?a H 1R17k7 w— iñl?’ö— 1i?Ql7 “7’ j4? 1j7170’ Wi/l— P1/lWb’ G ,1 PV t’W’ ticøc P1/ /1 p.1/ lc/M7’y— (lct7 p.1/ 14/1/tI irici ,w’a-— L0tU ui-na’ — ,)i I-;—— 77__ )f 2;— Wf7’/ ,—H I’ll 1’ — /1 Pt/ 14/1/a’ J7—IIP I4’D’3 .cx £11’ äT “ -‘ ;-_ II LV L4’LYJ a;— ft/ t4’1/Y 217 cli ?? ;‘ Eb’ IIL’LIa f-I i, SW ‘p— /‘ 26’ L4’6’b’ s—’Zb” L4’fr2Y ---— /1 21/ 14/1/1/ 211 57—/1 21/ 14/1/a’ 2?;’ — H 21/ /A’b’a 2?” —w It, H /1/ /1/ 1 7’ Iti’ t4’Vb /1/ It; It/tI/va, /1/ /t/ 6’VLYd’ ‘V —H /VVYfr2’ z__ 2:— z— z—/ 7:— “ H ‘t/ t4’t/b’ ffr’ C,;’ L4/i2;/ .:__/I1 9t;’ l/L/fr’ :— .?-_H “LI :—H c1 /4’t/’ —H fri-Wa’ P,t “2/3’ T “ 17?1:? L3 vI/ )1 w , 14’1/b’)ib’ bfl;, ;Y L’Yt’3’ Y a ci NOLLVjOd W*Iiamiw W10PLL L1iIb I M 374 3wu_,v_w alL w w 4j IV igw m m . i _ . 1W Gfr NAVO W1 ,u rw 4 uvm fr sz( co NUMI(R WI. I 1DkDSM7264-O-I V 9 I .T[ f c I 9 A B C I I D CHK I I .4_ ,I4TVJ -“ 1T — REVISIONS M kf KB K7D1N xa KT 8 _. 7 NO. K DOIJT 114 RPLIR S WDOUT INIT DT4. n.e PH - D L flI REV. IIt 1 (I) (I)L I btN H H H L Af 2 a AOl AC e,Pi I i I +3V w I I I -:‘r1-ø —-i- W13 Ru P,7 I:,, R51 g • PH 3 R72 RIØ /<7 +!V R58 I:,8 7 -1 ,<1 K 7 SYA./C REPL’1 REPL( PH 3 (i (I) H H H L +3V I I KB ka -T INtTO) ww RPLI’ EPL’1 H H 6 4”8 eeyr,) )- ()H 6 <-T TP DOUT CIA’ 16 REFR (I) . L H ( H It —Q 84I w 1<7 EIE 10 DOUTR ----a + 5v 5 80 I-I 5 k8 src< DF*1G I I FE 1(2 k a (I) WDIN L 1<7 WSINC L ‘41WR OPR -t IL H I . +sv 1 H 9 L H Icr iom 4 4 L 1(7 S’NC ‘e L —————— I mr 1a i (I) P113 H L 8q.) L E3 — tci Ri 3 DIN DIN __J L H I I SCALE TITLE Icy K9 I 1 I FPLI DPR I ItIITZøt?9Lv1 LSI—I •Aa I FDIN I MODULE I H K-r I [EET (I) RFCr V4 L 2 0 8 E e lB L ,c9 I OF 1SJQ121 EUPL Iiao:ilwsl .N O1NR DPR JQ L S70—2344—OO 6 L 48 H JDDSIM7264—øi 1SIZEcODEJ 01ST. K1 I DINR L S’fNC DP (Sheet PJUIER S L , I P j H I S’NC I 8 I of L :: 10) I A B D T C (Q ‘0 C) D D Q V a D 0— a 3O )IH j ID Oj t •I Iu Th 4 W zx •H ID W *ID 9W 3VH 4L IV SNOIA3d ‘cX W £?JWM •ON 9 g_7w44 gj W ID 4L /z 7Fh’,-bH •A3 H(’))LZ7VT ,va’ I ID U UVKIêW a NDILVI I FM FIM G(V I I I I I I t:.ZJr h7U “ — 1 ?4’Oa’. H E 91 ,. L N L HE ------J I I 1 ‘\fJD—1 n——-- - Z7t -c’Ja’f7 9 gH 9)? 7 g9idcz,)1 ‘Sd,4—1 dd :13 1 -TwT /A’’)( . H I ()_J 7(/)A2:/a’hl E44 I I c AE A•,L 9f QY (/)JPYZ 9) •7 W Z i I I 7(()3H 7(i)7/t’1s 4, Ffci)N(aJ t ,1c:-- ;,‘L2A1 [ I I I YJvA.LY /lidb 7 FvtflH fr19 L? 7 H I ) . 57- , I I I (/2 ‘E7 ‘ ii I LDVZIW :,‘;‘2 &VQ .‘ I A7 /1 :v 1-1(1) /1 fr’ I 7 4li(Qk2 &‘Eyok7N K 31vS i — I - ‘z3I TdD —,‘-,--- — I I j £•3’ .L3JHS ‘ 2C 1flGOfrN ----—- ii Q7 io bW 7 I— r------ /-fZN.d 9) 7ri)IgH c 9), 8,’ IslzKo ..LI7(7 a c I ) I) • zst, ( C/i Zn,’,, z:1v7 c7 liv) (I) •.s’c’ 7 iLl ,.y I w t7, koo3zIs1 I Q.rg 27d7 idi ocd7 O?d7 o9?vq I w’ OO—irie--oLS frCkfa I I I L H3Ufl I 4a09S) I--t79LVJISDIGj 6 I i £ (ot a ) V - y) -J •0 ; a 8 D a Q Oi jo b’ * cI •0w iza ij bX 4 * r’.’ t7,A_zt::7 U g.ah 8 SNOISIA3N •ON elY () W4 ,-,, 4 .ai.i I wi,iubl *4J 1 4 NOILY fly I LLVQ 11 . u I I L L ILON S# I I 13HS I 9 9 I I c °;•8.7-r- c —‘-- ‘i agz;’ i 1- iØ• 4, ;-i, i t 1 II 11 P v I I I Ld I I I I i LI Tw54 TZf 10’ ØID iø- T2,T i M- I1 aiwsj -÷*— fldD IiTTLzTtT idS)-0S:,T 1II IS1 Li jj J_ T-c;T iflGOVi 4)i ;f8:ki_;i 4)1 )j )1 L4 44 1)1 b)l &)4 QIioOIJ33HSL o7 ‘dCi :de 2cfU b’O (6>1) ;1(7 37 ‘cC :‘c7 .‘dU ?‘dU &fC/ 2’ fic7 ‘O’Q YdU 2W0 ‘dt7 aia’ ?idU èJdC h/ i.;, w/ ‘ AI’ b’E tf’/ &c Fp p v_F, tiff ‘L b/ “ 1,/f 7Z/ VcIYdUq 1[PIM72Ø-i VT— 7__ 1—7Z —5; F__ r— i— 1 15__• iT fri w- ;-_ _7___ F— OOZSJ —•c) r— w-. •g—V6 r— 7___ ;7—. FT U— ;— 1— 37__ 5! OO—lrfrEl—OLS S;-F øE E5T øF “zc Ø-E £r ØrE 0FF -- &3 _z._g ,,1 )1w: -wv-E Dw, q’ ØV2 , Øq; , I?’ I&’ _ff (ib”2 Øgc) 3INflId ., - —-r p&.G,) 4’-1S) ---- --E: I. -frt9LLISDJOJ I OL I J° c1 A3W [IIII1IIll’.sio! (oL V a .ct -0 B A 4 2 3 HOTS: 1 - — - - B 1-. ,4ND:pI,__H(i6)/ ALL ALL ALL I.C. x XDMR2 XDMR1 XDMR4’ 0MG DMA PIN IL CrCiIG RES!STORS D 3 VOLTAGES, I ODES DI DRE I WE EEL ,RL G94 (7) EPT5NO 1/IL.I, pf ND OR ExCPT EQU ±5%, +5V P11 5V I VDLENT ED: EXCEPT (14 AS I I [5A21 NQTFD , MPR [AS 5V +5V S EXCEPT I NETED. AS NOTEO. +5 +5V 5 V > - I NC THE a C - FOLLGING NO TRANSISTOR CON9ECTOR IC INTEGRATED PIPCKELRAPST CO1 Pt ±1 I (5) W DESIG +5V TIO SVtBOLS/NQTRHONS DESIGNATION OMR ( C A4) IRCU ATON I 1 RESET (82)(84) .-1T-- ARE (P1 SAT MC MA [A3] [63] USED ) LR ST — — ER DC FERRITE I PRECISION SELECT ON 83 -S.-.-’ COM1ON THE 1P’ AT DIRGRRM REDD RESISTORS TEST T 2 L FILI1 RND/OR 100PPM (A4) PRINTED CLAIM CLAIM* (Al ) (5A4) —— —-— —?4-— .f CIRCUIT — - SELENIIJ ZENER TIJNNEL GERMAN SILICON 00MG (A4) BODRD DMGW* 3) DIODE DMASTP RESET B [5441 [B2] 12B3I IUH DIODE RSSEMBLY. I NIT DIODE DIODE 0 ODE A4)(2B2) I MASTER (583) (A2)(A4)(3B2) MASTER 4J DDC* Jt —SHET COfl MPB MP1 MPS MP [AS] [AS] [81 [ ) ZONE BS 2 CTOR I LOCATION SIGNRL NURLR IGNL P (9 cErc7ic N---- SOURCtDRTJIN6LOCiUIO4 NAI1E vyY 3 21 \ (R2)(A2)(A4) (2B2)(3A3) MCLR t C07 (83)(5A2) (582) MP3 C$--,.—---— B BOARD BS MPO (Bl r’ , 7L DM60 OR (A4)(5A2) )(B3) P C O—<< ATIOI4 NAME XDMO4* XDMG3* x XDMGI PIN DM6 2 IP2 S27-2 CONNECTOR —CONNECTOR \ ‘ I F j P’ VIAS .1 (551 .C. 0 C [B2j [j52j MC [83] 64I MP4* (SEl T DMR [AJ —Cl LR F f P P!V P (5) I .R)o N —-—-<--—— N (542) (382) (SAl) VIA5TER RESET [As] [B2] 8857 [B4] DIG0 (AS) JDPl8PJO4LO 0- 0 BBS7 (14) (11) (5) 2 PCTDFFICE z 3 I 12 zi : 11 C 3 2&S1 8 4 bbUO/66O I! 2 83 B2 Bi B 0 BOX NUCLEAR >i )(4) )(12) DLL) 451. PAL-TNE. CU1 DATA 1CIS .- A X XAO THOU 85 CO67 AR1 —>>—OBSIVCKL BN1 AN1 7 DR >>—o >>OBREFL >)‘OBDMRL INC T ECN REV I BDMGOL S I OTE JNS A ED U 0I > >< .C >< = ,__l + %fl; a’ ‘-* ‘— M k) —:—c,, —>< \, m — 3 Ci, C-, r — I- :, fl 2 D ,_n — — -4 : rr - -C- C— -< -I n- - rr THIS DOCUMENT IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF NUCLEAR DRTA. C,-’ --1 RND MLY NOT BE REPRODUCED, NOR MLIY THE INFORMRTION CONTAINED THEREIN OR DERIVABLE THEREFROM BE USED IN ANY MANNER, EXCEPT BY WRITTEN PERMISSION OF NUCLEAR DATA, THE PROPRIETARY CD RIGHTS TO THE AFORESAIL) INFORMATION, OF A PATENTARLE OR UN— PATENTABLE NATURE, ARE EXPRESSLY RESERVEDTO NUCLEAR DATA. . n fl ‘-‘4, U ______ > J i: ‘ a .j1 C ‘.1’ C a- ul C ‘J C C, 1 a , , , 4 r. ‘J I- I -‘ r- — I- I- I- 1 .- .— —-- r- r- r —----, I c2 C C.I Z t)—4 r ;c i1 .1 1 ( ( J i: I :: (i cL i i J i? . - — — —‘ —- Dcx, —:i r- LZ: 1:\$/J : ::; I ;: r4;:: LIr—i C,, a, r’j , g j “ A A C —>< —>< k) —: C C, —4 - .— -I- a r- r— —r- .—r ____Q D - r’J A — ilF c• ‘—I w C,, Lf1 CM D . I1_1r : , I _!____‘_i — ‘0 - a a, 1 cr fZifL, I r I ——Cr)C,CCM c - -J I r- I c- C, C) C/C CM C—j CM Q r,C CM ‘ CM c:1 :‘ rn C’ ‘ ‘1 C 1 C - — c z 3 z, : ..—-) —0 —‘O — z C r’J C ‘J NC C N) ‘—r- _fL - I I I .-__ . j : : : (f c c ) x r I THIS DOCUMENT IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF NUCLEXR DXTX, P.ND MM NOT BE REPRODUCED. NOR MM THE INFORMXTION CONTAINED THEREIN OR DERIVABLE THEREFROM BE USED IN ANY MANNER, EXCEPT BY WRITTEN PERMISSION OF NUCLEAR DATA. THE PROPRIETARY RIGHTS TO THE AFORESAID INFORHATION, OF A PAIENTABLE OR UN— PATENTABLE NATURE. ARE EXPRESSLY RESERVEOTO NUCLEAR DATA. > . :v A B BDL1 [441 [441 j j 1 4HØa C p p BDLR9 BOL1Ø BOLLø8 BDOLR7 4A1 14i] BDRL6 BDALØ5 {481 4A1 BDALR4 [4B1 200L03 R0LLØ2 4Bi) [4s1 BDLøi B1 4B1 [!31 C2 220 RiO C3 j I I j I I I I 47tif 100 - 11) BBS? [1B41 - R8 S.A.T. +5 74 II II XTL 10MHZ V R6 2.2K BSYC [343) 3Oms* (R3) I INIT* [2441 (5) 74H04 74H04 5V 74 +5V Q—---( o_!iik __L.iQ __c_i) _D WB (10) (6) (9) (12 (12 (5 (5) 39KHZ* (A2)(R3) •.:__.o .- .,-. D c S A L Cu C B L Cu 74L51 . C 74LS193 88 .- —0 81 —.,—.- CLR 041 rt(i3) +5V Qc QAL!L Q8 CD B QBJ1I- Qc CLR CO >—.---o (4) --- -,——.- 1OMHZ* (183)(342)(343)(343) _L&L — _c!L_0 (2) () 2 2 XCLK 5 BOCUT [3431 V 1.25MHZ (isi ) SCCLK* (641 INIT* 12441 B BD4LØ1 [4B1 1481 0 AL0B I 1 I I RDKYBD* (682) 3 IGRPLY4 [2831 XD4L6* XDOLØ5* L451 (481 xD XDPiLø3* 4B1 XD1Lø2* [4B1] [4Bi XDALØ1 14B1 A L04 I 1 I I I (4) IRQ6* (241) 39KHZ 1421 +5V . •IL XDLØ7* 14B1 X04L06 [481 XDALØ2* [4Bi 5V j 1 I : EET51J NC-C1G C90N: .------ /I ‘73 4 NO600/860 CPP’C’ED KYQ. NUCLEAR (1) PITERFACE DNA RI :Vd4 CONTROLLE/ DATA DMAR* (IAI) DTE ::,:>- o Q_ LI S7O-248 w :cDc a>--- = U) —w D Q : ‘J c : z REd LJu w _J c, w XbJ = W — ‘,, w >- S I-DO : — a , — Q — CD)— ONS >- w w -J A C (51 > J r,, , o CD cD — , Cc r’ ,- m w J * , ‘C CD a’ : - C*,c _.J C I. *,- --1 —fl —: —m —-< -Q-- -. ‘C r’:o C -C - 0 0— C vi C DC : — : -. CD -C c () cM ‘: -1 - C . ... ‘..—.— C..C - - 2: -1 C-) C;.) C.- C’) - O•) 7’) CD CD CD rn cm cm CD rn CD I- cm -. 2: DOCUMENT IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF NUCLEAR DATA. ‘— C-’, THIS -C ND MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, NOR MAY THE INFORMñTION CONTAINED THEREIN OR DERIVABLE THEREFROM BE USED IN ANY MANNER, EXCEPT BY WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nu;LEAR DATA, THE PROPRIETARY cm —C-’ C RIGHTS TO THE AFORESAID I[IFORMATION, OF A PATENTABLE OR UN— PATENTABLE NATURE. ARE EXPRESSLY RESERVEDTO NUCLEAR DATA, : C Cs > — r, c- z r c Js —;: — ; — c .t c --- - -. , - Q I— -1 C) cQ T 7 o— P j;o— %..1 FJ — 0 C1 0 + , — C — CM C, vi C) - p C- — - .— — — - C- 0 k) 0 0 0 0 0 0 M0 0 x 2 C aC — — C- - C- -C- -C .- — . — .- - l’J CM ‘0 CM — (‘3 1:’ C, C, -.‘ C_C THIS DOCUMENT IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF NUCLEAR DRTA. AND MM NOT BE REPRODUCED. NOR RAY THE INFORMRTION CONTAINED THEREIN OR DERIVABLE THEREFROM BE USED IN ANY MANNER, EXCEPT BY WRITTEN PEVRISSION OF NUCLEAR DATA. THE PROPRIETARY RIGHTS TO THE AFORESAID INFORAArION, OF A PATENTABLE DR UN— PATENTAFCLE NATURE. ARE EXPRESSLY RESERVEDTO NIJCLEAR DATA. > ______2 3 ———- ——----— — A SIGNAL PIN SIGNAL PN SIGNAL P1JSIGNAL P SPARES AAI AA25V ir — = +5V AB t 4B2 E••i XSPARE 2 — PSPARE GND XSPARE 3 GNC AC I AC2 i XIRQ1 (2A1 ) PSPARE AD I AD2 CDI AEI BDOUTL (3.A4) CEI XIRQ2 (2A1) CE2 4XDOUT (3B4) CFI XRPLY* E7;D— AFI AF2 BRPLYL (2BA) XIRQ3* (2A1) C2 (3A1) AH AH2 BDINL (3M) CH1 XIRQ4* (2A1) CH2 XDIN* (3B) XSYNC* AJI GND AJ2 BSNCL (3A4) CJI OND CJ2 (3B4) AKI AK2 BTBTL (3M) CKI XAD* (3B1) (2 XI.JTBT* (3B4) BIRQL CLI CL2 XSPARE 4 (12) AL! AL2 (2B4) X8YAD (3s1) 1,7:1H74;8 CM2 XSPARE 5 AM I GND AM2 BIAKIL C281 ) •E•i AND A AN BDIIRL (1A4) BIAKOL (2B4) •E;-;—XIRA1* (2A3) •Ei XSPARE 6 A API BALTL (NOT USEC) AP2 BBS7L (1B3) CPI XIRA2* (2A3) CP2 XBS7* (1B4) ARI BREFL (1AA) AR2 ADMOIL (1B1) CR1 XIRA3* (2A3) CR2 XSPARE 7 .:!L BONGOL (1AA) XIRAA* (2A3) XSPARE8 ATI AND AT2 BINITL (204) CTI OND CT2 xINIT* (1AA) AUI AU2 BDALAL (B4) XADDR* (1AA) XDL\LØA*(4B1) AVI AV2 BDALØIL (454) CVI +5V CV2 XDAL1* (AB1) BAI BDCOKH (NOT USED) BA2 +5V DAI XCLK (5B2) DA2 ÷5V BBI B82 DB I XSPARE 9 —15V BC, 8C2 GND DC I AGND DC2 AND OW BD2 001 XDMR1 (1 Al ) DD2 + 5V BEt BE2 BDALA2L (4B4) DEl XDMR2* (ill) DE2 XDALB2* (4B1) XDMR3* BFI BF2 BDALØ3L(‘B4) DFI (ill) / DF2 XDALB3*(4e1) LJ 8H1 BH2 BDALØIJL(AB4) DHI XDMR4*(1A1) DH2 XOALØA* (481) GND D2 XDALB5* o_ I3JI DJ2 BDALA5L (484) DJI GND (481) >- G SKI BK2 BDALBbL (4B6) DKI XDATO* (3B1) DK2 XDALBN* (481) Q SLI BL2 BDALB7L (484) DLI XOATIO* (381) DL2 XDALO7* (4B1) DM2 XDALB8 SM I GNU 8M2 BDALB8L (444) M1 GND (441 ) a>- CL ir I- >- BNI XDllG1* XDALB9 (441) BSACKL (144) BDALØ9L(4i) 2.!_L. () .2!:f! AC2,IJ1 w o : w : V) !i AM1 All — (_, c, w BPI BP2 BDAL1BL (444) DPI XDMG2*(143) DP2 XOIL1Ø* (441) GND O—<< x04L11* SRI BEVNTL (NOT USED) R2 BDAL11L (444) DRI xoio (143) (441) 442 +5V o_-—-————4. 5V DS2 XOAL12* p BSI BS2 BDALI2L (44) DSI XDMG4*(143) (441) BC2BJ1 U c w cz c2: J — 842, 8Vi AM1, BT1 •5•_i_ •i:2 XOAL13 (441 BTI GND 8T2 BDAL13 L (444) 6N0 OND +5V O—<<—-— -0 +5V BUI BU2 BDAL14L (444) DUI XTMOUT*(1B4) 0U2 XDAL14* (441) C42, CVi CC2,CJ1 BVI +5V 8V2 BDAL15L (444) — ÷5V XD4.15* (441) +5V +5V bj : O cz ....<< CM1 :o= w .j D42,DV1 OND _____..<< : w - B +5V Q—<< v, aw :i: : >- — DC2,DJ1 - I- a CONN. RCK DM1,DT1 SIGNAL J SIGNAL AND : KBIRø (642) K3Iøl (642) KBIR2(6A2) K8103 (642) KBIR4 (642) 13 K8Iø5 (642) —f— DC1 R9 KBIR6 (642) ! K9107 (6A2) AGNO O—<< Lri (Nc) (NC) 22 —.. .!! —- (NC) .!.. (NC) 7 KERØ (643) 17 KBB1 (643) S K602 (i63) I8 K843 (643) 002 +15V p+15y ——----—--,.—- K844 (643) 19 K425 (643) o—__<< r L2_ i. DATE 10 8806(643) 20 K807 (643) 02 —‘------ECN —15V < 0—ISv REI S IONS I LJ: NUCLEAR DATA ND6OO/6O JA CCNThLILER/ KYbC. Iir:RFLCE N-L 4 DR2N BY: Jp CHECEO 8: r SHEET 7 CF 7 DATE D4N: 8 1277 DPPAD.ED AY:4 37O-2’8)3 3 1 4 r II I n w I > )< >< )< >< >< )< >< >< 1..’ )< )< > >< r- ‘JI —C- -‘ - — — - —. — — r — — i .r a- r— r r -. C-,. r r r c - cj c, -t, -t, 0 — —4 , -V V (d L ;) > :0 m i rJ-’-- m — ---‘----. -V ______-: :‘ E - .. , C, m !% O t ci) r,, II —-. : Iz a I! E9àZi: + : 4. — Co . -. - -. : — a rn C Co I- Co Co Co a Corn = o a Co Co z - a + m (fl_U Co — CoCo Co a ..— Co a Co a , : a 0 Co a a rJ a :: - 0 Co Co Co Co : : a C Co a Co Co Co Co Co c’ Co a Co Co Co a Ii o aa CoCo H :JJ I c I- Co ‘ Co — = L,, — Co Co Co Co - Co — Co PLNiNG EC I ______I - 4 ———2-- 09 1600 428 8.2K T _ (5 4 ) +5V +15V —t —-3-—-C 9 2) R26 2 2K 10is C—----—á) - R41 I (6) 74LS08 BLANK Q —— PLTI NH 24 COL6* BLiNK [1o31 74511 EEK 0 LOTEN [42] 3 6 PLOTF +5V47438(P ZDLY (13, 51 [42] 9602 7474 (43) (12) °-H L____j CEPLD B C 0 +5j (13) LANK Q* (7) Q* 4 CR* • CK L1jCET (15) C0 [B1 3* j PL0TF 74161 CD C (42) [B3IACCLK* CR8 —12V0—--AQBC (13) —154 c- — I COL4(Lb1) C8 27 +5V 13) 12)11) fl .047 1N4728 15K DRB1 H* 1)i FLDr4S* ÷5V [144] (8) _LLDR*S* [143) _- A2) j (1 * [44] PLTINH* 6) (8)]) (10) 7400 lJCOL MR(MS D (A1)(83) (14) ALPHA (81 1(443) [431 +590 45 H I ( , Z507 )L1 MRKMS 0— 1 [411 (81 )(4B4) PLOTF* SEC {4i2j j9 (541) (13) L(3) (B2) [441 R54 iN A 7sø C— 44 CR7 A (9) 46 [42] (12) PLOTF ZS05 43 44 C [44) 2N412 0— )(5) I o [i2] 3 [83] Cli ]± (11) I (3) 42 1 I R33 ;i (13) Zs04 0————— +5V0— (5) luf T 39 4 V MRKMS ____c_L_41 (2) (9 (42) 2 ( )(J( =L’ [42j 0 3258 5 J)I LD A B C D I 2N4124 (9) ZS02 ] 40 3 I CEP 0— 356 15 [4A2] 19 ZTC* CLK (15) 4 33 74161 —a () (Bi 1 (2) 15) 74LS151 (2) CLK (14) CLR A QB QC Qo 0R03 5 (6) r—i (144) RC 25 w :1b (13) 6 (1(14(13j(12 COL4 ALPHA —0ZTC (B2) 74O0 CHCKEN 1411 [BlI (B3) 7 C -- t - ZDLY END 2MHZ* SKIP* (A2)(A3)(A3)(83) (184) (11)r — -i- — —I [344) I-=-- 1144] [B3] 74564 (8) CIIRYF I— •t CHAR0- [3441 , (12)1 74LS3 Q: I- [3431 (11)1 ROW7*Q 413 (B3) 2MHZPr [B2] [341 CHAR*cL (B3)(84) (9) (3)(4)(5)J (6) [3421 —0 CALPLS* ‘C7 ::>- 54000 2MHZ (344) CEPLDA B C D [342] :100 ZTC (5) 13 15) (2) (5) CET [42] 74LS11 0MAF1 0 D Q - 74161 CALMOD 11 [1B3] CLX [342] COL6* s— 8 C 0Q (4)? (8 ZCHA* 6 [42) (4) 18 (442) - : - ADVINH 14 (342) 7474 (1 (14 (13 (12)(11 (5)1 74S74 [342] 74LS32 I — DWELL* +59 L) W I (15) (6) ALPHAO SKIP [143] :D LJQ (3) (Al [B31 (6) (3) (6) COL6* I CK Q LSRU* CK p —NC [14412MHz I 0SF0* (b) )< = (Al ) R0W4 I 0- (11) [42] (3) [1B4] (6) 0 Q I (B2) (42) 0 c — I CB3) RQW2 (4) ROW7* C (12) (B3) (10)1 C Lj LI 0:1(B1)(483)(4B4) I ZCH3* ROW1 (5) 1(1) (13) 6 10 EOT* —,—— (442) — 74161 CHAR 1 74LS08(8) EQS (10) ‘— (14) [343] [811 +59 COL6* LOG A 4Q LI (8) 7402 :D Q LI I COL6* R40 (42) [344] (9) (1) DU1 >-:-- 2.2K LD CLR [421 (12) I C : LI r I- B XTF-b0UT 1/) cLI 0—< 9 CEP CET CLI (1) :c >- — (9) ZS09 (13) 74LS32 8 [4421 11o(2) (2) NK* (9) (7) BLI ZCH2 7 4 (14) (42) (442) ZSØ7 44 P JHHZ 0 [182] (6) (2) (5) 18 ) [442] ‘13 6 1413 SKIP ZS05 43 CD 0— SKIP [341] (B2) 74S74 [442] 5 (5) (6) ‘12 0 SCL* [B31 CFS3 0 0 QD (2(b0) ZSB4 0—’--—— 42 (Bi) (11) Q [3B21 (4) (Nc) 0—C OK (8) 4 F—-.-] ZON Q4(5) (5) QC [4421 Os * O C (42) 741 96 [182] SF1 FS2 f!O4(8 C---———---—81 t ZSØ3 OMAEN 3 (3) CNT MR (1B3) 74LS74 (42) [3S2] ci__L. C çI B 31 114 [4421 (10 0 LF* [3B21 EQ 0 DMAGO* CFS1 0 z1 40 r ZONS Q (6) 74161 - LDAR* SKIP* cj (13) (442) ZS2 0———--—— (2) (463)(4B4) Q( 4 CK [342] (14) CFS 3 [4421 46 2 [] CR (8) [B21 42 (42) 0— .i__q A 134 6331 p ZINH[3B4] [3B2] (A2)(433)(4B4) 3 (B2) (1) SF1* (41) 6 [1 p* +59 111 LO E p (1) CH43 (43) SEC 1/2 2 [3421 CETCLRCL (9) CEP (403) -- B4] I E:z R31 J(7) (1o)2) 1 25 (10) F 470K DMAF2 0—( CALPLS* b28 8—25—77 ZS08 2N4126 [1B4] 74148 CHIbR[3A2] [44]EOS’ 0 I (10) 0 [344] EON DATE [442] DMAINH*0-C SF10 ZCH0 ZS06 [3n2] F——— 4 1 (43) [1d2] 5321 I (442) REV S OHS [442) Cl 0 CHCKEN 74LS51 I (442) luf [43] (lo)’ 1•1HZ [ 144] DATA ALPHA ALPHA (b) K* *Th [B1] [81 —040 CL E ZZ’-Lr1’.IE V- +5V (41 ) LOGICCIACRAM (383) 74S; DISPLAYll4TERFACEASSEi-SIf 2DLY ) - (IbA) I (11 [42] 10141ZQ———-—-b—-——— INIJ-D)IB-A1 CHAR* [182] [342] .— -- iHiSJEET2F6 JAIEDPII.IN:2-18_77 APP1-C:E0 B’:fj* 113-02hS7O-2 - — i_’_•__ ;I [ 2 ——---—- 1 ______r______C ZC-CIhOLS : Gdd LL-L— N C LQ 9 E !ES —- :Ac H! : tZut) . 1DJ [LJ j______onogx [] — LdGNa ( J(ç) v-;c-UN) I I(st> [cuLl A1c]SSV 3DV.i 31N1 AV1dSIG (1 Ic isja vVIQ DIJO1 0•J) [t’J) L r .d [cut) (zu] L3 (cut) (SL) CL) t:::: LøOuOI vJ_vG uvmnN øøJv (EL) N1D’dI c:’—d zcsiui 0 : [c L (9) tD [tilti [LJ * zHW uzu ____1 !Ti—i--5-.—-oøOOI t) --5------OLØW Ctc3) øZOS —i--i-i-j 9 h-?-i_i.-.--o [cut] (zuu)(cu) U.) øWJdS At7 [cHL) 590 S ___J Lø3 cuauoi LL)u 0— (-?3-—---o —0 —ThTI--j CS) z (;Ty—° (OL) (zuu)(cu) S6LS1L 8S•1t7L t7t1j [1] ]1S tD3 zuDu s— AS+ DO D cj) c: Løci1S CL) 1 [t71 --j——-O (z)(cu) 3 99 Løads Ac: cuDu 0— —• ZøD j(tiL) i: CL) Z)[ [8) LSLS1tL TiS° [l11 L) (Ls) ti3 (LL) ZøGdS (OL) [tie) [ciL] ØOVOI Cs) (cuz) [ 3j] (uu) [tifl] (6)1 (La) L O øas I—Q - CL øGdS O——--j- [cCL] [cx] c Cl [zu] aOI °\jD-ct —0 a uci [cut] (fl 1N MdS [ tut) A5+ [xxi] (zxL) NølUax 1INI atnai [teL] 0— Lølxax -- (zuu) Czuu) [txL] [Lix] [zu] (ru) (cu) L] zxixox UHD ui 1/S Cuxz) (6) [ LeL] [Let] [uxu] NSdD y— uxiuax — m ---i- cøixox z : ub u 50W (uuz) ( tLis) [ teL] z —4- Ltixax aNgu ASL+p I (xz) CL) 03 [Lieu] (xeu)(cxx) AS+ Lx --j—--—-0xtw CcxLi)(xxx) V L3 [Lix) Cxxx)CuxL) (Li) hS-+ Lv ---—-—oxL3x (cxx) Cue) Ccx)zLDx [Liex] Ccxx) Cxx) xx b9 ax xx dLN [xx] (Li) (sL) tiL) (dt)xtDx o— [xx) CIC) NflNd as as eL1NI (d) (xL) dL) [ LxL] Ccv)xiDv 0— LitLS1Lt dexsluz [Lieu] [tiC] x tivax aLu cx xtw avoi Ox I txt] Cx) --- 06 Cceu) d3 68 [] c tivax CcL) Lte bc ac cx xLJx uxnxui CL) __ii— [ Lvi] Cxvx) [xxx] Cxex)CcxL) ti tixax (xxx) JA’duD Liz 0 [xvi ax SW I (i-i--i—-— [ Lxii Cdxx) CL8u) Cu) Cxtlt) h--y---—-° Li] [Pt] Stixax Sd1vD SitS 0 cxxx I (EEflC0L0L) xx SLD HNICI - LiD (6) • * HNIAC Ccvs)(xvx) wiois cOavS Cxe)(cx) (xxt) C ) CLiZ) Ccvx) - [xv] xxcvs * 001 cxx ±ON3tid ?xif xeaxs C I __ ia 31DflN O1G3A3S3 A1SS3JdX3 3H 3Hfl1tN ]1V!N3!Vd —Nfl UO ]11N1 JO NOIJ’dWè1ONI OIS3NOd 3H1. 01 S1HOl Ad113èidOd 3H1 ‘11C) 31DflN O NOISSI3d N]1!IUM A ld]DX] U3NNW AN1 Ni asn WOJ13N3H1 31Ai]O HO NI]3H1 ON G3NJNO3 NOI1Jè1QdNt ]H! A NON Th]DflGOid3è 3 ION )JW Lu •ia ]1DflN JO A13dOUd 3AISfl1DX] 3HI SI 1NWflDQG SIHI Lu •__L’) -.< . D — r’J — —‘ r- — c_) t .— .- — — — .-- .- .- 0 L) Lj ‘ __J — :D 0 cz)__I () __J w 0 — -J Q — Q 0 ri — O .— w 0 Q & ‘- co Li.’ ‘- .— — -.-----.-..- —,-- ; Ef l;7 ; ,..‘ .- :E , ‘c o 0 * - - U.’ 0 ,r.’ LLi1LL \._JI . U.’ LD Ui-: — 7 v____ (.‘ (. U.’n.o’ g: g — :1 U’ i::— ,. • u. .‘ : U. : + 7 •1 o LI) .‘ r’J — 0 0 co co h :: co gLlI Lj• ‘ r—.— :€-‘ ;:(-•.J — (_, C) () ..J .J .- _J _J — co c/c ‘ cr 8cr co co co cor-co co ;i r 1 :i: 1 co ‘ 0 I : co Ut * cj.’ r r r r . ca co — a. co v) 0 — (‘J — c/c co co ca co r’i c..c O IEIi co co co co c.’c D 0 & i - a. h th ccI.’0 J co —C ; -C ?; ::coco : 0 ; Hi :EJ j L D I 1 . cx co 0 ;:: —: JE -l — cr - IC -. --- n ‘1 Pt > -o — - — a C- a u, a a ‘J1 a a . a a II T Id.IL;TJ;1 , a Q_ r — a m - p1 L p1 THIS DOCUMENT IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF NUCLEAR DATIX. AND MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED NOR MAY THE INFORiATON CONTAINED THEREIN OR DERIVABLE THEREFROM BE USED IN ANY MANNER, EXCEPT BY WRITTEN PERMISSION OF NUCLEAR DATA. THE PROPRIETARY RIGHTS TO THE AFORESAID INFORMATION. OF A PATENTABLE OR UN— PATENTABLE NATURE. ARE EXPRESSLY RESERVEDTO NUCLEAR DATA. > I 2 I 3 I 4 PN SIGNAL PIN SIGNAL P1 N SK3NAL PIN SIGNAL L AAI AA2 5V T__CAl CA2 5V GN 0 — GN 0 ADI AD2 iCDI xIRQ1* [1041 CD2 -i- ______XIRQ2* 1] XDDUT* [102] :i- CFI XIRQ3 [104] CF2 XRPLY* [104] I______XIRO4*04] XSYNC* [102) GND -- ..!_! GND !_ [1 4 I ALl AL2 CLI XBY0D [1B’4 CL2 A --i GND - ON 0 A x’Ri [1A2) XIRA2* [1021 XBS7* [102] .L XIRO3* .c___ [1021 ASI 2!_ XIRO4* [102] i: OND :E ONO E!: XINIT* [1071 AUI AU2 XODDR* [13) XD0LO* [181] XDOLO1* [181) -i— +5V 5v YE -i v ..c LK [ 181 1 Li p__ -15V GND .E!_ OND ONOLOG GND P2. 1 1 5 x DMR [ 1 04 1 PP + V !!_ --- XDMR2* [104] XQOLO2* [11 XOMR3* [iooJ XDRLO3* [181] .fL Pf__ . >< Q XDMR4* XDOLO4* a:LJ .!:!_ 2tL [lool [11 BJI GND OJ2 Dii OND DJ2 XDOLØ5* [181] ! i.ii --i-i DK2 XDOLO6* [181] i:- 91: XDOLO7* [1B1] =>- G o_z t• .-.:. BMI OND 6M2 DM1 OND DM2 x00L88* [1011 o P!_ XDF1G1* [102) PN? XDRLO9* [1011 C !.!_ . !_ XDMG2 [102] XD0L1ø [loll !_ XDMC3* [102] XDOL11*[1A1] !:!_ XDM54* [102] XDRL12* [1011 GND —L)OW OND XDOL13* [101 1 PI!_ :D •wzzro XTMOUT [2B2] QU2 XDOL1O* [101] Y!_ +5V .2Y! +5V XDOL15* [loll c c J — LU J) W _T 00 CONN. SIGNAL SIGNAL : Z .. c: _j Q>--- ‘z GND XOUT [502) :: , : =ww - B OND OND .--— 3 YOUT [502] 6 OND —:•— OND :i: BLANK [2031 5. OND Is GND :: I7 20 9 22 - • . - -— PLOTEN [203) II 24 SEEK [204] :: COMPLT[2031 13 OND 26 ECH DATE RE’JISCS rcr —- NUCLEAR DATA - - LOGICDIAGRAM DISPLAYINTERFACEASSEM]3LY ND-D8-A DOTE ETF6 BY: S7O-L,iJ-OL I’2ii /7 2PPR’DE) I 2 3 c A B 4 3 2 1 NOTES: - — — - fC5 1 2A X ALL ALL ALL I C PIN PIN PIN CAPACITORS DIODES RESiSTORS VO’ DIP, DIP, DIP TAFS ARE PIN P1 PiN ARE EXCEPT 0964 ARE (8) (7) (12) 1MW, pf DUO: OND OR GIlD: ‘TS EQUIVALENT, EXCEPT ---—— ±5%, ----.- LO PIN PIN TED EXCEPT (16) A 1 (24) : I NOTED V EXCEPT AS +5V NOTED. AS NOTED. 5 - - THE >- C — - FOLLOWINC I TRENS1STOR RIjBONCBLE CONNECTOR 1. INTECkVIED C i CO IN DSIGNATtOJ CTII c SYMBOLS/NOTVTIONS DESIGNAT t.iRLUIT ION BPOKH’( GND< NC< NC< RE NC< (P1) . SAT RC-3 RC-7 RC-4 RC-I RC—9 USED — — FEMALE ----.-. PRECISION SELECT - ON /8N, L COMI•ION THE E ±1% NC D AMP AT DIDGRA1 TiEAL RESISTORS TEST PIN 2 ------FILM DND/OR 100PPM PRINTED —*-- —RI— .i CIRCUIT - - - - MALE GERMANIUM SELENIU1 ZENER TUNNEL SILICON BOERD A.’P DIODE DIODE SSEMBLY. DIODE DIODE PIN DIODE ------ 1 CONNECTOR flDC TZONE PIN SHEET NUMBER — NAME LOCATION -- SIGNAL 5IQNSL rUIVBLR p NDME LOADDRiIGLOCATiO4 .C. (1 -.------rYPE ) 3 I35 I.C. 7ARS\ r—I.C. ON OR P.C. LOCATION p I AD. I 273 ‘ --- CDNNECTCR ;—--;.--—-..,. ---CClu:ECTCR ‘ I.C. (2)1 q E TYPE PIN 1—- P:’i P C ONP.C.BD. ( BOARD - S2b-O1 HA , —--.-- (ND—PMG—A) DATE DPE,.?4 +5V DRAM: RI: POWER 11/7/77 ‘4 4 MONIR LOGIC PO.ED ?iUCLE4 DIAGRAM & LINECLOCK ITA SHLET ECN REV --- I S I OFt DflE ONS A B